Home

HP LCS60 User's Manual

1. 2 J20 20 1 J26 3 m O mn OO 63822882 83883 88338232333 O a J _ yu J14 1 J17 19 jig pma aal a OOOOH i 13 6 J18 14 14 14 14 Bi 13 1 OOD 1 838333313 R7 R6 R2 R3 Tegi ors 4 i AEri OO 8 DS1 Ds2 B B 2 7 4l Ol O E s 4l o P aulo o 10 a olo 8 7 28 O A fi A I A J6 JA i 2 10 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Table 2 6 RS 232 Interface Pin Designation Function Direction Port 1 2 BA TD Transmit Data To DCE 3 BB RD Receive Data From DCE Async DTE 4 CA RTS Request To Send To DCE 5 CB CTS Clear To Send From DCE Emulation 7 AB Signal Ground 20 CD DTR Data Terminal Ready To DCE Pin Designation Function Direction Port1 2 BA TD Transmit Data From DTE 3 BB RD Receive Data To DTE Async DCE 4 CA RTS Request To Send From DTE 5 CB CTS Clear To Send To DTE Emulation 6 CC DSR Data Set Ready To DTE 7 AB Signal Ground 8 CF DCD Data Carrier Detect To DTE Pin Designation Function Direction Ports 2 3 2 BA TD Transmit Data To DCE 3 BB RD Receive Data From DCE and 4 4 CA RTS Request To Send To DCE 5 CB CTS Clear To Send From DCE Async DTE 7 AB Signal Ground 8 CF DCD Data Carrier Detect From DCE Emulation 20 CD DTR Data Terminal Ready To DCE Pin Designation Function Direction Ports 2
2. Issue 3 9 19 Processor Board Firmware Update Network Auto Boot at power up only Y N N N Network Auto Boot Controller LUN 00 0 Network Auto Boot Device LUN 00 Network Auto Boot Abort Delay 15 15 Network Auto Boot Configuration Parameters Pointer NVRAM 00000000 0 Memory Search Starting Address 00000000 0 Memory Search Ending Address 02000000 02000000 Memory Search Increment Size 00010000 00010000 Memory Search Delay Enable Y N N N Memory Search Delay Address FFFFDOOF FFFFDOOF Memory Size Enable Y N Y N Memory Size Starting Address 00000000 0 Memory Size Ending Address 02000000 02000000 Base Address of Local Memory 00000000 0 Size of Local Memory 02000000 02000000 Slave Enable 1 Y N Y Y Slave Starting Address 1 00000000 0 Slave Ending Address 1 01FFFFFF O1FFFFFF Slave Address Translation Address 1 00000000 0 Slave Address Translation Select 1 00000000 0 Slave Control 1 01FF O1FF L Slave Enable 2 Y N Y Y z Slave Starting Address 2 00000000 0 C Slave Ending Address 2 00000000 00000000 2 Slave Address Translation Address 2 00000000 0 Fas Slave Address Translation Select 2 00000000 0 Slave Control 2 0000 0 Master Enable 1 Y N Y Y Master Starting Address 1 02000000 02000000 Master Ending Address 1 EFFFFFFF EFFFFFFF Master
3. Related Commands The following commands may be of particular interest when administering the LCS60 s SLIP service e ping netstat The manual pages for these commands are contained in Appendix E of this docu ment they are also available online Issue 3 5 15 dS Administration 5 16 Issue 3 ARAP Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection Issue 3 for ARAP Service 6 1 ARAP Service Connection Dialstring 6 5 Administration 6 5 Show Service Example 6 5 Show Session Example 6 6 Call Trace Example 6 6 Log File 6 7 Related Commands 6 7 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for ARAP Service Figure 6 1 shows an example network using ARAP service Note ARAP service requires an R2 0 or R3 0 software key Refer to Chapter 3 for information about the software key dVuVv Figure 6 1 Example Network ARAP Service Zone Research Lab 7 2010 114 F a Vw N iy Lucent Data Switch Se mlkway earth Modem Pool Remote Access Clients vA alleyn Zone Research Lab AA 2010 11 LCS60 morse Zone Starbase 520 88 Virtual AppleTalk Zone Research Lab 2010 1 ak LAN m holmes File server Outer Workstation You can configure the LCS60 for ARAP service using either the srvsetup command or the individual commands protocol maxses
4. m Select option 1 from this menu This will prompt for the login ID group and address as shown in Screen 4 2 If you are using a NAC the User Login Id is the NAC ID otherwise enter your own unique login ID In the example in Screen 4 2 user tbaker is assigned the address 154 12 23 7 in the group morse To request the reserved IP address allocated for your PC or Mac by the LCS60 administrator enter zero for the client package s IP address and omit the D option from the data switch dialstring The PPP software will then receive this address during IP negotiation with the LCS60 PPP server 4 16 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Note If your client package does not support entry of a zero IP address i e it is not fully IPCP PPP conformant enter the reserved IP address instead of zero If you are using a reserved address but not authenticating by means of a NAC then you must also specify your userid on the data switch dial string as shown below DESTINATION area exch 60name ppp uuserid This specifies the full address of your LCS60 including the userid entered when the address was reserved For example for a userid hartnell on the LCS60 morse DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp uhartnell Note When reserving IP addresses it may take as much as a minute for the IP Network Address Server to detect changes in the database Users who attempt to log on before that delay
5. none J Return local Delete Screen 2 2 MSM Configuration Dialogue CCO gt enter group GROUP up to 8 chars gmorscon TYPE local trunk local local 2 14 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Screen 2 2 continued Va i DIRECTION originate receive 2way receive DEVICE OR HOST up to 8 chars standard morscon HOST AUTOBAUD on off off off g E ROUND ROBIN SERVICE per_port per_module none none Return Creating New Host morscon CcO gt enter msm COMPONENT module port p I MODULE ADDRESS 18 o PORT NUMBER 1 12 1 12 11 mmy CCO gt enter group Q GROUP up to 8 chars gmorscon CONNECTED TO 2 WIRE MODEM yes no no Return BAUD RATE 75 110 150 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 j 4D 19200 28800 38400 57600 76800 115200 9600 Return PARITY off even odd off Return FLOW CONTROL OF MSM BY DEVICE xon_xoff eia none eia none FLOW CONTROL OF DEVICE BY MSM xon_xoff eia none eia xon VDM ON THIS PORT yes no no Return PERMANENTLY ACTIVATED PORT yes no no y BITS PER CHARACTER 5 6 7 8 8 Return NUMBER OF STOP BITS 1 1 5 2 1 Return f f ENDPOINT NUMBER OR RANGE 0000 9999 none none Return PORT NUMBER 1 12 1 12 Delete CCO gt enter address LEVEL local area exchange local speedcall local local TYPE num
6. 12 From the Top directory enter start all Note In order for changes made to the IP network number or subnet mask to take effect you must first stop and then restart tcpip and routed 13 To complete PPP configuration you must configure the client side of the service Refer to the documentation included with your client software examples of some software packages are given in Appendix F To unconfigure PPP service stop the service using the stop ppp command enter maxsessions at the Top gt Config gt prompt and choose option 2 to delete the service PPP Service Connection Dialstrings One of the following types of dialstrings shown with the area exch name from the example in Figure 4 1 may be used to connect to the LCS60 for PPP service Issue 3 4 13 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp q0 e6 DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp D DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp Con The options for the dialstrings are described below qN 4 14 Specifies whether or not priority queueing is enabled 1 or disabled 0 By default priority queueing is enabled In priority queueing IP datagrams are marked as either interactive e g telnet packets or non interactive e g FTP packets interactive datagrams are always queued in front of non interactive datagrams This reduces latency in interactive applicat
7. 9 0b LL LCS60 AppleTalk Router t t v ARAP PPP ELAP Commkit Host Interface a head Ethernet EtherTalk Link Access Protocol EtherTalk is Apple s data link protocol that allows Ethernet cables to be used to connect an AppleTalk network AppleTalk Network Number and Zone Assignment The LCS60 supports dynamic AppleTalk address assignment within a virtual zone of PPP and ARAP clients Refer to Figure 1 2 Upon dialing into the LCS60 the PPP client is assigned an available network and node number automatically The client then becomes part of the virtual zone configured on the LCS60 no special dialstring options are used Figure 1 2 AppleTalk Virtual Zone E 10 45 E Virtual network 2010 Mac ___ Virtual zone Research Lab eee of pos Se Virtual Zone 5i Tek j Research Lab Lucent Data Switch y f Ee j MS Network a 0 107 i D Zone Starbase 520 88 Mac 1 8 Issue 3 LAN Protocols Note It is not necessary to configure the LCS60 s Ethernet interface for AppleTalk The LCS60 is not a seed router on the Ethernet It will discover the network range and the zones assigned to the Ethernet by another router and will dynamically acquire a unique AppleTalk node address within the assigned network number range sounjee4 IPX Protocol The IPX protocol is used to connect hosts in a Novell network The LCS60 can b
8. Screen 5 1 continued on next page Issue 3 dS LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service Screen 5 1 Continued a gt gt Library Enter an Internet network address q to quit gt 154 12 24 gt Is 154 12 24 0 divided into subnets ly n y Enter number of mask bits for this subnet for help q for quit gt 8 New IP Network Security Group Library Configuration is KKK Class B IP Address 154 12 24 Network Mask 255 2595 2255 0 Is this correct Enter y n gt y IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group Delete an IP Network Security Group Edit an IP Network Security Group Display all IP Network Security Groups PUNE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q Top gt Config gt A 6 Configure IP addresses ipas for those users that require them m Enter ipas at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config ipas from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for adding a reserved IP address Reserved IP addresses are useful in cases in which a user s security privileges are dependent on his her source IP address In other computing environments a reserved IP address could be used to assure that a well known permanent IP address is set aside for server applications residing on a user s client machine 5 4 Issue 3 LCS60
9. To reserve specific addresses for users m Use the ipas command refer to Screen 5 2 m Select option 2 to display the R AND PPP S m Select option 1 from this menu ERVIC ES menu ES ERV ED IP ADDR ESS ES FOR SLIP This will prompt for the login ID group and address as shown in Screen 5 2 If you are using a NAC the User Login Id is the NAC ID otherwise enter your own unique login ID In the example in Screen 5 2 user tbaker is assigned the address 154 12 23 7 in the group morse Note Reserved IP addresses can only be allocated by the system administrator or someone with root permissions To obtain a reserved address from the LCS60 the dialstring is Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service dS LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service DESTINATION area exch 60name slip uuserid This specifies the full address of your LCS60 including the userid entered when the address was reserved For example for a userid hartnell on the LCS60 morse DESTINATION mlkway earth morse slip uhartnell To obtain a privately administered static address that has not been reserved by the LCS60 use a dialstring similiar to the following DESTINATION mlkway earth morse slip 154 12 23 11 This specifies the full address of the LCS60 and a specific IP address The IP address specified in the above dialstring c
10. Type for HELP Enter y n gt y Note Changes have been made effective Issue 3 7 7 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service Aemaye y Access to Gateway Services Dialstrings Telnet Service The following dialstring options are available for the telnet service The usage is telnet e lt off char gt 8 B D lt off char gt M raw uucp tterminal w lt 1 16k gt host name port When using more than one option the options must be separated by a colon e lt off char gt 8 B D lt off char gt M raw uucp host name tterminal w lt 1 16K gt 7 8 Allows the user to turn the telnet local escape key off or set it to something other than the default of Ctrl Allows 8 bit character mode Negotiates with the remote host binary telnet character mode processing Otherwise the user must escape into the local telnet and manually negotiate binary mode with the remote host Allows the user to disable the local delete key option or set it to something other than the default ASCII DELETE i e 0x7f For example the user may choose to set it to Ctrl C which is the default delete key for Sun Workstations This option if enabled will recognize the Delete key and map it to the TELNET IAC AO and IAC IP sequence which is sent to the remote host Allows the user to transfer binary files across the telnet session between two coop
11. motse e0 is the interface name Issue 3 G 1 AS i ts110 9 gt 2 40 9p 9 2 Glossary HDLC IETF interface internet IP Network Security Group IPCP IPX LAN LCM LCS MIB NAC network name node node name originating group PDD PPP G 2 High level data link control A link level protocol used by PPP Internal Engineering Task Force The connection between a host and a network A network of networks A symbolic name assigned to a virtual subnet IP address This name matches the group ID assigned on the NAC Four such IP Network Security groups are supported in LCS60 R2 0 the first IP Network Security group name assigned is the uname IP control protocol Internetwork Packet Exchange protocol Local area network LAN Communications Manager LAN Communications Systems Management information base The Lucent Technologies Network Access Controller The NAC is used to provide network security The name by which the network is identified in the configura tion database In Figure 3 1 dock net is a network name The point where switching between computers and terminals takes place The name given to a LCS60 This is the hostname and is independent of host interface names This becomes the uname for this machine e g morse in Figure 3 1 A group assigned to devices which can call each other Predefined destination Point to Point Protocol Similar to SLIP
12. option should be used BUGS dkcu buffers input internally There is an artificial slowing of transmission by dkcu during the put opera tion so that loss of data is unlikely If the to file of put cannot be created an error message will be displayed but the from file will then be written to the stan dard input of the remote system and the connection dropped Issue 3 E 7 DKMAINT 1M DKMAINT NAME dkmaint host interface maintenance SYNOPSIS dkmaint r i interface c channel v DESCRIPTION dkmaint is a program used to reset and perform other maintenance operations on host interfaces or channels When the r option is specified dkmaint sends an ioctl 2 to the host interface driver which eventually causes M_HANGUP messages to be issued to each process using the specified channel Use of the i option without the c option resets all channels on a given interface dkmaint must be run as root The following flags are recognized by dkmaint r Reset Used to reset the host interface or channel specified Any active connections on the interface channel selected will be closed as a result of the reset operation i interface Specifies which host interface to reset One and only one interface must be specified on the command line To reset all host inter faces installed on a system dkmaint must be run multiple times c channel Specifies a channel to reset Combined
13. Q 1 Cc Cc 0 ca Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 1 a Pa 8 The system will ask if you want to install Motif NCD and X11 package features Examples are shown below Choose the defaults by entering Return 9 4 Issue 3 Reload System Software Motif Package Query 1 Install the Motif clients yn y Return NCD Package Query 6 Install the NCD 19 server yn n Return X11 Package Query 2 Install the X11 software development files yn y Return 9 Continue with the dialogue as shown in the screen below g 5 bnu Package Query 1 Please enter the node name to call this machine it must be 8 or less alphanumeric characters unix morse inet Package Query 1 You can enter the value of the IP address now if you know it otherwise you can just press RETURN to continue If you do not enter a value now the IP address must be initialized later using the instructions found in the Initial System Setup booklet in order to use the Internet functionality Internet Address Return lp Package Query Enter the name of the OLD spooling directory just press lt return gt if this is a new installation usr spool l1p Return lp Package Query 2 Should the disable enable commands be available to ALL users y n n Return lp Package Query 3 Will you be attaching a PostScript printer to this system yn y Return nsu
14. Table A 1 Server Table Flags Flag Description a Additional arguments should be read from the incoming data channel before execu tion of the program This flag should be specified only for remote execution channels see x option e Arranges for the exit code of the program to be passed back to the originating system This flag should be specified only for remote execution channels h Invokes the mapped program with the SIGHUP hangup signal ignored t Opens the tty mode data service and invokes the program with the stdin stdout and stderr files attached to the dev dkt device for the tty channel Note that the t flag should be used with caution when it is associated with non standard service The t flag uses a TTY interface that echoes its input by default Origination endpoints other than a user terminal from a DESTINATION prompt or a dkcu will not receive the echoed data If the data is not drained by the originating endpoint the network will flow control the echoed data which will build up on the destination host The UNIX System STREAMS module Idterm that actually echoes the data does not honor flow control and will consume all of the STREAMS resources u Opens the raw URP protocol data service and invokes the program with the stdin stdout and stderr files attached to the dev dk device for the raw channel v Environment variables should be read from the incoming data channel before execu ti
15. Top gt Manager gt show Name The server name Pid Process ID number Total Ses Cfg The maximum number of sessions that can be configured Total Ses Used The maximum number of sessions in use Total Servers The number of servers Start Time The starting time of the session with the Pid shown Verbosity The verbosity level Log File Name The session log file Server Directory Show Top gt Manager gt Server gt show Service Name The type of service tcpasy asytcp slip ppp arap Psid Process ID number of the specific service Maxses The maximum number of sessions configured for the ser vice shown Issue 3 AS i ts110 9 Glossary Inuse The number of sessions in use Startup Time The starting time of the service shown Server Name The name and number of the server running the specified process gt 2 an YW WY 2 G 20 Issue 3 Index Issue 2 Index l 1 Index ii Issue 2 Index 2WAY G 17 enable G 6 8 bit G 16 8 bit character mode enable G 7 A Access remote 1 12 8 2 ACCM G 12 Add default route 3 24 DNS information 3 25 hosts 3 28 networks 3 28 protocols 3 28 service ports 7 3 SNMP information 3 26 Addhost delhost 8 17 Adding a user 8 38 Addnet delnet 8 17 Addr G 12 Addr comp G 12 Address ipx G 13 Addressing dynamic 4 17 5 12 Reserved IP 4 16 static 4 16 adial log 8 47 Administration 1 19 ARA
16. 4 22 Issue 3 SLIP Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection Issue 3 for SLIP Service 5 1 SLIP Service Connection Dialstrings 5 9 Privately Administered IP Address 5 10 Reserved IP Address 5 11 Dynamically Assigned IP Address 5 12 Administration 5 13 Stop Example 5 13 Call Trace Example 5 14 Errors 5 14 Log File 5 14 Related Commands 5 15 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service Figure 5 1 shows an example network using SLIP service Figure 5 1 Example Network SLIP Service _ aa S a SS lucent Data Switch ty a hastings See mlkway earth A 3 i 154 12 23 7 dock net 154 12 jJ Modem Pool Mac Remote Access Clients fox LCS60 TER lt S 154 12 25 2 morse e0 154 12 21 5 Virtual IP Addresses 154 12 23 1 morse 154 12 24 1 Library Fane 154 1221 _ LAN 154 12 25 1 Techs 154 12 21 3 ua holmes Router 154 12 21 2 You can configure the LCS60 for SLIP service using either the srvsetup command or the individual commands protocol maxsessions ipas etherif The examples in this chapter use the individual commands If previous configuration for example for PPP service has been performed some of the steps required for configuring LCS60 for SLIP service may have already been completed e g etherif
17. At Host Number select the StarKeeper II NMS host interface number that should be used to monitor the LCS60 Enter 0 Return At StarKeeper II NMS name field if the field is not already populated enter the name of the StarKeeper II NMS that will monitor this LCS60 and then enter Ctrl g The StarKeeper II NMS should confirm the entry of the LCS60 with Alarms connection has been added Press Delete 6386 or Break HP three times to exit the menu sys tem At the CONFIRM EXIT prompt enter Return to return to the main selection menu Issue 3 B 5 n Z D Q eb oO x s w Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS 20 To exit the selection menu press Return and enter yes at the Exit the Menu program prompt 21 At the SK prompt enter conn_sync Alarms to StarKeeper II NMS Once you have configured the StarKeeper IT NMS to monitor the LCS60 the alarms listed in this section will be sent from the LCS60 to the StarKeeper II NMS If the condition that generated an alarm corrects itself StarKeeper IT NMS will automatically clear the alarm Alarms transmitted to StarKeeper II NMS are not accompanied by the display of corresponding user messages on the system console of the LCS60 The data switch controller detects the loss of the LCS60 s CPM HS module and sends the alarm to StarKeeper II NMS The StarKeeper II NMS detects loss of connectivity to an LCS60 for Ethernet Refer to the Sta
18. DE Console Port LC S60 Connection through StarKeeper II NMS For the StarKeeper II NMS connection Figure 2 6 follow the steps below 1 Serial Port 1 should be optioned to emulate DCE operation This is the default therefore if you haven t changed anything there will be no need to change the option Issue 3 oJeMPJEH Installing the LCS60 2 Connect the LCS60 rear panel connector labeled Serial Port 1 to an asyn chronous port on the data switch using a straight through connection D8AH connector connect the 25 pin end to the LCS60 3 Configure the asynchronous port on the data switch according to Table 2 4 as a receiving group Conduct the dialogue shown in Screen 2 1 TY 12 or Screen 2 2 MSM on the data switch console to a Configure a group on the data switch network for the asynchronous port connected to the LCS60 b Configure a name pointing to this group which can be used to access the LCS60 console port D 5 L Refer to the appropriate Lucent Technologies data switch Node Reference Guide for complete instructions 4 Restore the asynchronous port and name to service 5 Log on to StarKeeper II NMS execute dkcu to the call address created for the LCS60 console Maintain proper security precautions to guard against unauthorized or accidental usage 6 Continue with the Connecting Fiber Interface section Figure 2 6 System Console Connectio
19. INSTALL Issue 3 B 3 Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS 6 Remove the floppy diskette or tape from the drive when installation is complete 7 Enter exit Return to restore the user id to cnmsadm 8 Re start the StarKeeper II NMS 2 Z D Q eb oO x s w At the SK prompt enter SKsh this displays the main menu b Choose SYSADM this displays the sysadm menu c Choose STARTSK select y to continue with startup Enter Return when you see the startup completed message d Exit the SKsh program by pressing Return and then y at the Exit the Menu Program prompt 9 You can now configure the database to monitor individual LCS60s see below StarKeeper II NMS Configuration Commands After the software package has been installed the network administrator can configure the StarKeeper II NM9S s database to monitor individual LCS60s 1 Log on to StarKeeper II NMS as cnmsadm 2 At the SK prompt enter SKsh Return This displays the selection menu Select the Configuration Commands by entering c Return this displays the Network Elements menu 3 Select menu item System Node by pressing Return This displays the Configure a System Node menu 4 Select menu item Add by pressing _ Return At System Node name enter the name of the LCS60 e g morse _ Return in the example in Figure 3 1 6 At Type enter L60 Return 7 At Release enter 3 0 R
20. K P Choose a logical name for the backup The backup is the filename on the server which stores the variable files The default yymmddhhmm signifies the date and time of the backup 8 36 Issue 3 A restore from server example follows Va Restore Clients monday a client s variable files known by this server Enter client name Type q to quit or for help gt brown for client brown wednesday s gt Dec 19 10 48 Dec 17 09 55 Type name of backup or press RETURN for default of wednesday Type q to quit gt Return Restoring backup named wednesday Retrieving backup stored on server morse morse calling brown send backup morse calling brown install backup Select a type of restore 1 COMPLETE Return the machine to the state defined by the backup 2 Password User ids and passwords 3 Server Centralized backup restore control files 4 0 Contig Protocol and services configuration files Enter a restore number Type q to quit or for help gt 2 You have selected a Password restore A Password restore will recover these files and directories IF they existed at the time the backup was made etc TIMEZONE etc group etc passwd etc shadow Do you wish to proceed with a Password restore y n q y Proceeding with a Password restore Reading the archive Please wait Done Restore complete Restored
21. Set Display Options The display options currently assume your terminal has 24 lines unknown cursor addressing 1 No change proceed with installation or upgrade 2 Change the number of lines and return to this screen 3 Select vt100 cursor addressing 4 Select wyse50 cursor addressing gt xe O D 2a x w 5 Select unknown cursor addressing Enter option number of choice 1 5 1 1 UNIX SYSTEM V 88 Release 4 Upgrade Installation You have the following options 1 Full installation 2 Upgrade an existing R40V2 or later system 3 Exit without doing anything reboot 4 Enter maintenance mode Enter option number of choice 1 4 4 e e e Entering maintenance shell Ne P 9 For the Seagate ST5660N drive only You are now able to edit scsifmt info by entering ed etc scsifmt info at the prompt above Issue 3 D 3 UNIX System Software Installation m Add the following line to the file SEAGATE ST5660N mfuj2624 7 SEAGATE ST5660N Note Separate the fields above using tabs only spaces are not allowed m Write and quit the file 10 For the Seagate ST5660N drive only Enter Ctrl D at the to return to the installation menu and continue as shown below eC CtreD Leaving maintenance shell UNIX SYSTEM V 88 Release 4 Upgrade Installation You have the following options 1 Full installation 2 Upgrade an existing R40V2 or late
22. Virtual IPX Address lt Zone Research Lab 78 1 oa 2010 114 p wimsey tag PPP lucent Data Switch S mlkway earth D dock net 154 12 E m hastings Virtual IP Addressesm 5 e _ A D 154 12 23 7 IP 154 12 23 1 morse Modem Pool ase SLIP 154 12 24 1 Library Virtual IPX Address 9 Mac SUP 154 12 25 1 Techs 57 1 i labroid dp x parker PPP ek z Kesan Zone Baker Street zl T e EEANN SEF 609 11 X o umi morse e0 154 12 21 5 Virtual AppleTalk Zone ARAP 54 12 22 9 IP 2 Zone Starbase 520 88 Research Lab 2010 1 78 1FC IPX IPX Address 1562 8003E224056 Remote Access Clients oO p Note Refer to Chapters 4 5 6 and 7 for examples of PPP SLIP ARAP and gateway configurations 154 12 21 3 m net0 154 12 21 LAN Ma holmes Router 154 12 21 2 Note All addresses and names in this figure are examples only Preliminary Hardware Requirements Before configuring your LCS60 make sure you have followed the instructions in Chapter 2 for hardware installation Issue 3 3 1 o n o op a Introduction Verify that the following procedures have been followed 1 2 The LCS60 is securely mounted as described in Chapter 2 There is a fiber pair connection between the LCS60 and the CPM HS module in the data switch node
23. When command and option are omitted telnet will enter negotiate mode as indicated by the negotiate gt prompt To negotiate an option in this mode enter command option at the prompt To return to command or input mode from negotiate mode enter a carriage return at the negotiate gt prompt The negotiate commands are list the commands and options that can be negotiated DO request the remote server to start performing the option DONT request the remote server to stop performing the option WILL inform the remote server that you will start performing the option Issue 3 TELNET Issue 3 TELNET 1 WONT inform the remote server that you will stop performing the option The following options can be negotiated binary transmit in binary raw mode echo remote echo input is echoed by the remote server exopl extended options list negotiate from the extended options list status display option status display options currently in effect tm timing mark send a timing mark Options can be abbreviated to the shortest unique sequence No options are defined on the extended options list at this time Note that the sga suppress go ahead option can no longer be negotiated This option will still be recognized and processed correctly by the telnet daemon to sup port communications with older implementations however open ec 8 host port Open a connection to the named host The e option will select an alter nate e
24. gt y CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature LCS60 AND SERVICE SESSION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Add Change a Session Parameter 2 Delete a Session Parameter 3 Display all Session Parameters 3 12 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup 5 Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1 Enter session parameter maxsessions ppp slip arap asytcp tcpasy Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt ppp Enter session parameter value Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 90 NOTICE Entering lt ppp gt service with value of lt 90 gt Is this correct Enter y n gt y CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature LCS60 AND SERVICE SESSION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Add Change a Session Parameter 2 Delete a Session Parameter 3 Display all Session Parameters Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1 ep D ie o z S o Enter session parameter maxsessions ppp slip arap Tasytep tcpasy Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt asytcp Enter session parameter value Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 120 NOTICE Entering lt asytcp gt service with value of lt 120 gt Is this correct Enter y n gt y CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide
25. 1 15 1 18 4 5 4 13 5 5 5 8 G 2 G 6 F 9 F 21 Name G 9 G 13 G 15 G 19 Nameserver G 5 NCR uucp example 7 17 Netstat E 28 Issue 2 Network example 3 1 management 1 20 name G 2 G 4 G 8 security 1 18 Network Access Controller see NAC Network access password 8 38 Network address G 6 Network control panel F 15 Network number G 3 Network security group G 5 configure 4 3 5 3 No hangup G 6 Node G 2 name G 2 Nodename 3 3 3 6 8 18 Nohup G 6 G 17 Nslookup E 30 Null service A 3 O Online manual pages 1 21 Operation 2 1 Originating group G 2 name 8 33 P Parameters G 3 Passwd 8 38 8 40 Password option 8 38 restore 8 30 Patches software 9 15 Issue 2 PC configuration F 1 F 7 F 9 user information F 1 PC TCP example screens F 12 PC TCP PPP F 9 Index PC TCP Session Configuration Screen example F 13 PDD 1 11 7 3 7 12 G 2 G 7 Peer addr G 12 Peer comp slot G 12 Peer max slot G 12 Pid G 19 Ping 9 29 E 34 pkginfo 9 9 9 15 pkgrm 9 15 Point to Point Protocol see PPP Port G 14 Port G 16 Ports configuration 2 9 configure 7 3 number G 7 serial 2 9 Ports directory 8 10 commands 8 10 disable 8 10 enable 8 10 flush 8 11 report fields G 16 show 7 18 8 11 show configurations G 16 show statistics G 16 summary 7 19 8 11 G 17 update 8 12 Power 2 25 rear panel connections 2 26 Power dow
26. 3 2 BA TD Transmit Data From DTE 3 BB RD Receive Data To DTE and 4 4 CA RTS Request To Send From DTE 5 CB CTS Clear To Send To DTE Async DCE 6 CC DSR Data Set Ready To DTE 7 AB Signal Ground Emulation 8 CF DCD Data Carrier Detect To DTE 20 CD DTR Data Terminal Ready From DTE Issue 3 2 11 oJeMpJEH D 5 pan L Installing the LCS60 Direct Connection to the LCS60 To connect an asynchronous terminal or PC directly to the LCS60 for use as an LCS60 console refer to Figure 2 3 and follow the steps below 1 Serial Port 1 should be optioned to emulate DCE operation This is the default therefore if you haven t changed anything there will be no need to change the option 2 Connect a 25 pin RS 232 cable between the LCS60 rear panel connector labeled Serial Port 1 and an asynchronous terminal or PC Figure 2 7 3 Power up the system console and set the options as directed in Table 2 4 4 Continue with the Connecting Fiber Interface section Figure 2 3 System Console Connections Direct Asynchronous Teminal DCE Console Port LC S60 Connection through a Data Switch To connect an asynchronous terminal or PC to the LCS60 for use as a system con sole through a data switch network refer to Figure 2 4 and follow the steps below Note Connections to the data switch network must be to an asynchronous po
27. Copyright Motorola Inc 1988 1994 All Rights Reserved MVME197 Debugger Diagnostics Release Version 1 1 06 17 94 06_17 94 Local Memory Found 02000000 amp 33554432 MPU Clock Speed 50Mhz Initializing Local Memory 02000000 Done Idle MPU s NONE 197 Bug gt set 0310951210 197 Bug gt env Bug or System Environment B S B b Field Service Menu Enabled Y N N n Remote Start Method Switch G M B N B b Probe System for Supported I O Controllers Y N Y y Negate VMEbus SYSFAIL Always Y N N n Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Startup Y N Y y Local SCSI Bus Negotiation Type A S N A a Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot Y N Y Y Auto Boot Enable Y N N Y Auto Boot at power up only Y N Y N Auto Boot Controller LUN 00 Update Non Volatile RAM Y N y Reset Local System CPU y A z 3 Once you have completed the dialogue shown in Screen 9 6 the system will perform an autoboot 0 1 Cc Cc oD Cc ca 9 22 Issue 3 Processor Diagnostics MVME197 The MVME197 automatically runs its processor diagnostics on start up after power is applied and after a reset has occurred If an error is found it will be displayed on the console if possible and the FAIL LED will be turned on refer to Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Faceplates KO O OJO MVME 197LE FAIL LON ORUN
28. Disabled Wait for Input timeout minutes 2 NOHUP darete ta sane ie elon aie Se aera BO Disabled e AWA yeot mwe e glee EEA Disabled w SID Verri wtish anbe eaa e ahacle dans Disabled Enter this service port Enter y n gt y Port lt 2981 gt has been added Press RETURN to continue gt we A Example UUCP Service Using SunOS 4 0 To use socket service to initiate a uucp connection to a data switch connected host from a SunOS on the LAN add the following line to the etc uucp Systems file on the Sun host_name Any TCP g port 6Oname in nuucp word password host_name is the host name of the data switch connected host port is the port number of the port configured in the LCS60 database to provide socket service and 60name is the name of the LCS60 that is used as the TCP to Async gateway Note The LAN host must be able to translate the symbolic name 60name to a TCP IP address either through an entry in the etc hosts file or by access ing a DNS server nuucp is the login ID corresponding to the UUCP service on the data switch con nected host and password is the login password for the nuucp login on the data switch connected host 7 16 Issue 3 User Information Note If the socket port has not been configured with a PDD additional fields for the LCS60 call address prompt and data switch call address of the host must be added to the line above Using port 2981 as configured above and re
29. Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES 1 Add an IP Network Security Group 2 Delete an IP Network Security Group uy Screen 4 1 continued on next page Issue 3 4 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 1 Continued a 3 Edit an IP Network Security Group 4 Display all IP Network Security Groups Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter an IP Network Security Group name q to quit for help gt Library Enter an Internet network address q to quit gt 154 12 24 gt Is 154 12 24 0 divided into subnets ly n y Enter number of mask bits for this subnet for help q for quit gt 8 New IP Network Security Group Library Configuration is KKK Class B IP Address 154 12 24 Network Mask 2552552550 Is this correct Enter y n gt y IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group Delete an IP Network Security Group Edit an IP Network Security Group Display all IP Network Security Groups PUNE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q Top gt Config gt a H Note Do not use the IP addresses shown in the examples as they should follow your corporate IP address convention 8 Configure reserv
30. Enter number of mask bits for this subnet 7 for help q for quit gt 8 Entering Ethernet interface 0 morse e0 154 12 21 5 gt Is this correct ly nl y Ethernet interface 0 morse eO0 154 12 21 5 configured Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q NOTE Changes to the configuration will not take effect until you enter the lcsadm command and then type stop tcpip from the top command directory to stop TCP IP protocol enter the lcsadm command and then type Start tcpip from the top command directory to start TCP IP protocol Top gt Config gt te P 8 From the Top directory enter start all Note In order for changes made to IP network number or subnet mask to take effect you must first stop and then restart tcpip and routed 9 To complete SLIP configuration you must configure the client side of the service Refer to the documentation included with your client software examples of some software packages are given in Appendix F To unconfigure SLIP service stop the service using stop slip enter maxsessions at the Top gt Config gt prompt and choose option 2 to delete the service 5 8 Issue 3 SLIP Service Connection Dialstrings One of the following types of dialstrings shown with the area exch name from the example in Figure 5 1 may be used DESTINATION DESTINATION DESTINATION DESTINATION mlkway earth morse slip mlkway
31. RETURN for menu J 2 RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address Edit Reserved IP Address Display Reserved IP Address Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions uy Screen 4 2 continued on next page Issue 3 4 5 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 2 Continued a gt Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter User login Id for help RETURN for user ids q to quit gt tbaker Select an IP Network Security Group to add an IP Reserved Address morse Library Techs q to quit gt morse Selected IP Network Security Group morse Enter an Internet host address allocated from IP network 154 12 23 q to quit gt 154 12 23 7 Added reserved IP address 154 12 23 7 for tbaker within IP Network Security Group morse RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address Edit Reserved IP Address Display Reserved IP Address PUNE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 4 Enter User Login Id for help RETURN for user ids q to quit gt tbaker Reserved IP Address for User Login Id tbaker is morse 154 12 237 Enter User Login Id for help RETURN for user ids q for quit gt q RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Me 7 Scre
32. Remote user G 14 toG 15 Removal application software 9 13 inet package 9 8 Report fields G 8 Requirements configuration 3 2 hardware 3 1 Res 9 27 Reserved IP addresses 4 4 Reserved IP addressing 4 16 5 11 Reset G 16 Restore complete 8 29 from a server 8 37 from tape 8 29 password 8 30 server 8 30 types 8 29 Return to DESTINATION option telnet 7 10 ReXmts G 9 RFC G 3 RIP 1 7 G 3 rl A 3 root 8 1 Route E 40 Route Proto G 13 Route Proto ipx G 13 routed 1 7 3 24 3 26 to 3 27 G 3 Router 3 24 G 3 G 12 Router name ipx G 13 Routing fiber cable 2 19 Routing Information Protocol see RIP Issue 2 Routing IP packets 1 7 RS 232 connections 2 4 2 9 to 2 10 2 12 2 16 rx A 3 S Scanning rules server table A 8 Scripting language F 21 SCSI interface 2 2 Security client and server 8 31 network 1 18 telnet 1 10 7 10 Security groups 1 15 Security ID enable G 6 Security server type G 7 Selective copy option 8 29 Serial Line IP see SLIP Serial ports 2 9 optioning 2 9 Serv name G 17 Server change a client to a 8 33 change to a client 8 35 error messages 8 44 restore 8 30 show example 8 23 Server directory 8 15 log 8 15 report fields G 19 show 8 16 G 19 Server information atalk G 12 Server log file error messages 8 45 Index l 11 Index Server name G 20 Server table A 1 flags A 4 modifications to A
33. S o Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter User login Id for help RETURN for user ids q to quit gt tbaker Select an IP Network Security Group to add an IP Reserved Address morse Library Techs q to quit gt morse Selected IP Network Security Group morse Enter an Internet host address allocated from IP network 154 12 23 q to quit gt 154 12 23 7 Ne 2 Issue 3 3 17 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup a D Added reserved IP address 154 12 23 7 for tbaker within IP Network Security Group morse RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address Edit Reserved IP Address Display Reserved IP Address BwWDhN EE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Configure Display IP Network Security Groups 2 Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q Ne x Note The following prompts atalkas will be displayed only if ARAP or PPP is configured f n f op zi Note Itis not necessary to configure the LCS60 s Ethernet interface for AppleTalk The LCS60 is not a seed router on the Ethernet It will dis cover the network range and the zones assigned to the Et
34. TELNET The valid NVT commands are ao send an abort output request ayt send a message are you there to remote server brk send a break request ec send an erase character request el send an erase line request dm send a data mark to signify end of urgent data ip send an interrupt request nop send a null operation display a list of transnvt commands Z Suspend the telnet session True job suspension is implemented if sup P by the original shell csh or ksh If not sh a new local shell will be The TELNET specifications specify defaults for line mode transmission with the local tty driver echoing The Wollongong implementation by default provides character mode tranmission with the local tty driver echoing DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination SEE ALSO telnetd A E 46 Issue 3 F User Information Introduction F 1 Client Software Configuration F 1 Client Packages F 2 Mac Connection CCL Script F 2 m CCL and Modem Hints F 5 m CCL F 5 m Modem F 6 PPP Service Examples F 6 Windows 95 IPX over PPP F 6 m PC Configuration F 7 m PPP Connection F 9 WIN PC TCP 3 0 F 9 m PC Configuration F 9 m PPP Connection F 11 InterPPP F 14 Connection F 14 SLIP Service Examples F 19 ChameleonNFS 4 0 F 19 Issue 3 Table of Contents ARAP Service Example F 22 Connection via Modem F 22 ii Issue 3 Introduction This Appendix provides examples
35. The error message will be identi fied by its appropriate error code in the following error message where xxx is the code number ERROR DURING CALL SETUP CALL SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR CODE xxx c 4 Dkserver Can t push your streams module The call could not be completed because the configured STREAMS modules could not be pushed onto the open channel You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 131 Dkserver Invalid protocol requested The call could not be completed because the remote server did not under stand the connection protocol You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 132 Dkserver Dksrvtab not readable Call System Administrator The call could not be completed because the server tables files in etc opt dk srvtab on the remote host were unreadable or damaged You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 133 Dkserver Can t chroot Call System Administrator The call could not be completed because the remote server could not change root to the home directory of the caller on the remote host You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 134 Issue 3 Outgoing Call Error Messages m Dkserver Can t set get circuit parameters
36. This will generate ins tallation screens ending with the Screen 9 1 This information will not be repeated use Screen 9 1 as you proceed with installation for instructions on entering responses Screen 9 1 How to Enter System Responses J gt How to Type Responses during Installation When typing responses lt response gt lt RETURN gt Enters lt response gt lt CTRL gt h Erases the last character typed lt CTRL gt u Erases the entire line lt CTRL gt r Reprints the entire line lt CTRL gt s Pauses output to the screen lt CTRL gt q Resumes output to the screen lt CTRL gt z Suspends the installation lt CTRL gt c Cancels the installation and returns here lt RETURN gt Gets help for the current screen Press lt RETURN gt to continue a A Note If you have not inserted the tape the following will be displayed Booting from VM197 Controller 0 Drive 40 Loading COREunix Boot logic error Packet status 0000 Additional Error Status 0002 1 Cc Cc oD Cc ca 7 Enter Return when Screen 9 1 is displayed this will lead to the installa tion screen shown below Continue with the dialogue as shown 9 2 Issue 3 Reload System Software 5 Set Display Options The display options currently assume your terminal has 24 lines unknown cursor addressing 1 No change proceed with installation or upgrade 2 Change the number of lines
37. a gt ie x 3 fed 2 Note Enter information in the fields shown on the screens example entries are shown in the figures From the PC TCP Main menu shown on the left in Figure F 3 select Dialer This will display the Dialer screen shown on the right in Figure F 3 Issue 3 F 11 Cc 2 5 90 E Z O 4 lt fod 72 mD PPP Service Examples You can configure the PPP connection options as described in the PC TCP Software documentation by selecting _ Configure You may specify the PPP LINK and IP negotiation values that will be used during negotiation with the LCS60 when you make the connection The Dialer screen allows you to specify the PPP server to which you would like to connect and the connection script to use Figure F 3 PC TCP Example Screens PC TCP WinApps 3 0 E d S Statistics Configure Server Control m Network Control fz PEAN a g TN3270 Query Dialog Readme txt _ somom meso O muu nose Sessie Sgipt Cr Optiees Help 5ospt dialup c petcp dialmt scr 4 Edi j Proger Mentor The choices for servers and scripts are read from the petcp ini file Make sure you have added a session for the LCS60 server and created the dialup and hangup scripts for it Select Configure to set up your connection configuration for the LCS60 This will display the screen shown in Figure F 4 Issu
38. attach a console to the console port on the rear of the LCS60 as described in Chapter 2 Then turn the LCS60 rear power switch on Within a few seconds boot messages will begin to appear on the console screen At the 197 Bug prompt use the set command to enter the date in the format mmddyyhhmm that is month day year hour minute and use the env com mand to reset the autoboot Refer to Screen 9 6 Note Responses to the prompts generated by the env command are listed in the table below Bug or System environment B S S B Field Service Menu Enable Y N Y N Remote Start Method Switch G M B N B B Probe System for Supported Disk Tape Controllers Y N Y Y Negate VMEbus SYSFAIL Always Y N N N Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Startup Y N N Y Local SCSI Bus Negotiations Type A S N A A Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot Y N Y Y Auto Boot Enable Y N N Y Auto Boot at power up only Y N Y N Auto Boot Controller LUN 00 0 lt Auto Boot Device LUN 00 0 g Auto Boot Abort Delay 15 15 Auto Boot Default String NULL for an empty string lt CR gt ROM Boot Enable Y N N N ROM Boot at power up only Y N Y Y 2 ROM Boot Enable search of VMEbus Y N N N ROM Boot Abort Delay 0 0 ROM Boot Direct Starting Address FF800000 FF800000 ROM Boot Direct Ending Address FFBFFFFC FFBFFFFC Network Auto Boot Enable Y N N N
39. for HELP or to GO BACK Jj gt 3 XS wf Insert a blank tape which is not write protected into the tape drive when instructed to do so If the LCS60 has been configured as a backup restore server the tape that is created will also contain the backups of all of the server s clients This copy all function should always be used to back up backup restore servers Although it is possible to use the centralized backup restore facility to back up a server the user is strongly urged not to do this since doing so consumes a large amount of disk space on the server and provides no additional network security For example if an entire network were backed up remotely to a server and the 8 28 Issue 3 Backup and Restore Operations server itself was never backed up to tape then the backups for the entire net work would be lost if the server were to suffer a catastrophic accident When the backup has been completed the system will redisplay Screen 8 10 To Restore from Tape Note You cannot use Release 1 or 2 backup tapes for Release 3 To restore variable configuration files from tape 1 Enter lcsadm config backup at the root prompt Select option 1 from Screen 8 8 Select option 3 from Screen 8 9 Select option 2 from the Tape Backup Management Menu Screen 8 10 Insert a backup tape into the tape drive when instructed to do so Dn oO FF Q N After performing a COMPLETE Server or Config restore as sh
40. for help gt 1562 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Configure Display Network Address 2 Configure Display Framing Type Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 2 Current Ethernet Frame Type lt Undefined gt Enter frame type ethernet 802 2 802 3 or snap Type q to quit or for help gt ethernet ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Configure Display Network Address 2 Configure Display Framing Type Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu Me A 4 8 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service gt 2 VIRTUAL PPP CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Configure Display Network Address Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Current Virtual Network Number lt Undefined gt Enter an IPX Network Number Type q to quit or for help gt 57 Network lt 57 gt is already configured for your Ethernet Interface VIRTUAL PPP CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Configure Display Network Address Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN fo
41. lt Sx dynamic P address i address No address P Ny assign reserved OS busy Say NIP address ea Error IP address is busy _ oe Issue 3 Multiple IP Subnetworks IP Address Assignment by the LCS60 PPP and SLIP users need to be assigned an IP address when they connect to the LCS60 thereby allowing them to run TCP IP applications over their serial con nection Figure 1 5 describes IP address assignment refer to Chapter 4 PPP or Chapter 5 SLIP for more information Note IP address assignment is defined in RFC1332 The LCS60 has three mechanisms for assigning a SLIP or PPP user an IP address 1 Privately Administered Static IP Address The user s IP address is locally administered by the user on his her PC software package The LCS60 will use the IP address requested by the PC package if it is valid and unused 2 Reserved IP Address This IP address administered by the LCS60 adminis trator is requested by specifying a zero IP address on the client software package A reserved IP address must exist in the LCS60 configuration database before the session start up attempt 3 Dynamically Assigned IP Address This IP address is randomly assigned by the LCS60 from the IP network range associated with the particular IP Network Security Group A dynamic address may be requested on the dialstring if no reserved IP address exists for a user ID Hardware Features Enhanced Pro
42. lt dev rmt ctapel gt LCS60 Network Interface Version R3 0 Bldxx m88k Copyright c 1996 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright c 1994 1995 AT amp T A Rights Reserved Copyright Motorola Inc 1988 1994 A Rights Reserved Copyright c 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 The Wollongong Group Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright c 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 Novell Inc All Rights Reserved Processing package information Processing system information 20 package pathnames are already properly installed Verifying package dependencies Verifying disk space requirements nstalling LCS60 Network Interface as lt lcs60 gt Installing part 1 of 1 usr etc lt implied directory gt usr local lt implied directory gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script nstalling DKHS module Installing DKUX module e Installation of lt lcs60 gt was successful Insert a cartridge tape into Cartridge Tape Drive Type go when ready or q to quit q ab oO Cc Cc oD pr fam a IMPORTANT NOTICE If installation of all desired packages is complete the machine should be rebooted in order to ensure sane operation Execute the shutdown command with the appropriate options and wait for the Console Login prompt XS A 9 10 Issue 3 Reload System Software 3 Remove the cartridge tape from the tape drive 4 R
43. server 8 27 tape 8 27 Backup Restore menu 8 28 BadF G 9 Benefits 1 5 Break character 1 10 Broadcast Supp G 13 Busy G 16 G 18 C Cable error message C 1 Cabling 2 4 precautions 2 4 CAC 1 2 Call address G 1 Call trace see Trace Cap G 17 to G 18 Cbr A 3 CCL G 1 CCL script F 2 F 5 example F 2 Centralized Backup Client Definition menu 8 34 Centralized Backup Operations menu 8 35 server 8 36 Centralized Backup Server Definition menu 8 33 Centralized Backup Restore menu server 8 32 Cfg G 17 to G 18 ChameleonNFS SLIP F 19 Chan G 14 to G 15 Change date 3 28 default route 3 24 3 28 DNS information 3 25 3 28 Ethernet interface configuration 3 28 nodename 3 28 PPP information 3 28 protocols 3 28 Issue 2 service ports 3 28 7 3 SLIP information 3 28 SNMP information 3 26 3 28 time 3 28 Char mode G 10 CIPX 1 13 CIPX max slot ipx G 13 Class G 13 Client change a server to a 8 35 change to a server 8 33 define 8 34 definition 8 34 Client software ARAP F 2 PPP F 2 SLIP F 2 Commands common 8 4 path 1 22 protocol and services 3 9 UNIX 1 21 CommkKit Host Interface Software 8 7 Common commands 8 4 Compressed IPX header see CIPX Config 8 5 Config directory 3 28 8 17 addnet addhost 8 17 backup 8 18 commands 8 16 console 8 18 datetime 8 17 delnet delhost 8 17 nodename 8 18 softwarekey 8 18 subnet 8 18 upgrade 8 21 viewhosts
44. synchronous Ho b net 154 12 26 154 12 22 1 brown LE A s Tyo NAC alain m yard watson moon gee 154 12 26 1 Jae O 5 Lucent Data Switch A Qf ree Pa W mlkwayjearth Das ccess dock net 154 12 j Modem Poq Clients 1CS605 Virtual morse IP Address J 154 12 23 1 morse S morse e0 154 12 21 5 5 net0 154 12 21 topper mof 154 12 21 2 You can configure the LCS60 for gateway services using either the srvsetup command or the individual commands protocol maxsessions etherif The examples in this chapter use the individual commands If previous configuration for example for TCP IP service has been done some of the steps required for configuring LCS60 for gateway services may have already been completed e g protocol etherif Skip the steps that have been completed previously Issue 3 7 1 Aemaye y LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service Note The user should familiarize him herself with all aspects of the LCS60 gateway service For details including a description of service ports refer to Chapter 1 After configuring the LCS60 as described under Initial Setup in Chapter 3 per form the steps shown in Figure 7 2 to configure the LCS60 Gateway Services Figure 7 2 Gateway Services Configuration config protocol tcpip tcpasy asytcp maxsessions
45. telnet socket State The state of the port service up or down Total The number of times the port has been accessed Busy The number of times the port has been busy when access has been attempted Fail The number of times port access has been tried and failed Reset The number of times the port has been reset Show Configurations Top gt Ports gt show c Port The number of the configured port Service The service configured on the specified port Tcpws The window size configured for the port 8 bit Indicates whether the service port is configured with this option enabled on or disabled gt 2 4 9p ip 2 G 16 Issue 3 Glossary Nohup Indicates whether the no hangup feature has been enabled 2way Indicates whether the 2way feature has been enabled SID Type The security server type e g NAC Idle The inactivity timeout in minutes Wait Indicates whether the wait for input timeout feature is disabled or the number of minutes configured if it has been enabled Pre Defined The PDD call address associated with the specified port Address Summary Top gt Ports gt summary Limit The maximum number of ports that can be configured for service ports Cfg The number of ports configured Cap The number of ports configured Cfg divided by the Limit Use The number of ports in use enabled Directory The port number of the port configured for directory service S
46. viewnets 8 21 Issue 2 Configuration 3 1 AppleTalk network zone 4 10 6 3 AppleTalk virtual network 4 10 6 3 ARAP 6 1 changes 3 28 dialogues 2 24 ethernet interface 4 11 5 7 files 8 28 gateway services 3 10 7 1 initial 3 3 IP address 5 4 IPX network 4 7 LCS60 2 29 Mac F 1 network security group 4 3 5 3 PC F 1 port 2 9 PPP 4 1 protocols 3 10 requirements 3 2 reserved IP addresses 4 4 service ports 7 3 SLIP 5 1 SLIP information 5 3 StarKeeper II NMS B 1 system console 2 9 TY 2 14 Configuration commands 3 28 StarKeeper II NMS B 4 Connect time G 10 Connection console 2 12 direct to LCS60 2 12 fiber error messages 9 25 fiber verify 2 28 fiber cable 2 19 to 2 20 Index Index fiber interface 2 19 power 2 26 system console 2 9 through modems 2 17 through StarKeeper IT NMS 2 17 through the Lucent Technologies data switch 2 12 verify 2 27 9 28 Console 8 18 connection 2 12 Controls 2 1 Copy all 8 28 Copy protection 1 19 see also Software key CPM HS module 2 24 2 28 9 27 installation 2 20 CRC G 9 G 11 Creating a tape 8 38 Customer Assistance 1 22 Customer Assistance Center see CAC D D8AG cord 2 16 D8AH connector 2 13 2 18 Data switch G 1 Data switch dialstrings 4 13 5 10 Data switch to LCS60 to LAN 7 13 Datetime 8 17 DB15 connections 2 29 Default route 3 24 Ethernet connected host 3 24 example 8 23 setting 3 2
47. 38400 13 LABEL 19 write 13 matchstr 1 20 USERID matchread 400 jump 59 LABEL 20 note Got USERID ask 1 Enter USERID write 13 matchstr 1 21 Password matchread 400 jump 59 LABEL 21 note Got Password ask 1 Enter Password write 13 S matchstr 1 22 DESTINATION D matchread 400 jump 59 3 LABEL 22 Q write nj exch system ppp 3 note Sent nj exch system ppp v matchstr 1 24 PPP or ARAP ready Q matchread 400 jump 59 LABEL 24 note Got PPP or ARAP ready pause 40 exit 0 Ne Pi Screen F 1 continued on next page Issue 3 F 3 Client Software Configuration Screen F 1 Continued i gt LABEL 59 exit 6019 Attempt to hang up the modem HANGUP exit 0 Edit this script with the information appropriate for your modem and configuration The entries in the above script are described below Indicates a comment ORIGINATE ANSWER Labels to begin execution of originate and answer mode XXXXX Anything specific to your modem should go here Refer to your modem documentation 38400 Baud rate S note Dialing 1 Writes to a log E write ATDT 1 Writes to serial driver fey ask This line tells the system to prompt for the information in this example for the User ID and D password Without this line you would need 5 to hard code the information into the script LABEL 19 Numeric label mat
48. 42 9 MB available Name Size Kind Label Last Modif AppleTalk Connection LocalTalk EtherTalk AppleTalk P Built In Current Zone lt No zones available gt AppleTalk Version 58 1 AppleTalk P Version 1 0 2f1 D VersaTerm FTP Server 42K control panel D YersaTerm Time Client 17K control panel Figure F 6 Modem Port and PPP Screens eee pem E fromai targe Bearer ere a i Cc Q 5 90 E fan O a lt fod 72 Character Hap popoocgaonungania epee fa tale pepe yey eye at Tereectian Tee E Pieters ipi Mexia frena Fire Lt CLS A riran 171 deutereatic Detaul bettie 1 terete D Direct Drep ale araia afr ea rererey F 16 Issue 3 PPP Service Examples Notes US Robotics Sportster in the preceding figure is the dialing script CCL which contains the necessary instructions to set up the modem and log on to the LCS60 Modem Port selects which device the modem is connected to the modem port is usually designated When setting your physical link parameters LCP you can take the defaults as shown on the right Make sure PAP CHAP authentication are not selected Authentication is handled by the NAC Figure F 7 IP Address Screen TCP IP Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 l TCP IP Header Compression C use SLIP Protocol Default Settings Note If you are using a privately
49. 7P udp 7P The packets captured are only those received transmitted at the interface It is not possible to use iftrace as a media monitor because promiscuous mode is not sup ported and enabled on the interface E 25 IPXNETSTAT 1M IPXNETSTAT NAME ipxnetstat show IPX network status SYNOPSIS ipxnetstat ir dv p rip ipx interval DESCRIPTION The ipxnetstat command symbolically displays the contents of network related data structures to show the status of configured interfaces routing tables and net work statistics related to IPX packet traffic The i option shows the status of both the ethernet and virtual configured network interfaces This display includes the network number node address state of the interface the number of packets received and sent and the number of sent and receive errors When used with the i option or the r option the d option displays the network address number in decimal The routing table display r shows the status of configured routes This display includes the network address the number of hops or routers that must be passed through to reach the specified network the number of ticks or length of time i e expressed in units of 1 18 of a second that a packet takes to reach the designated network as well as the node address associated with that network When used with the i option or the r option the v option enables debugging mode that displays additional inf
50. 8 Log Level 9 This will log the reasons incoming calls are rejected The token used is either ERROR or DENIED This will enter information when a call exits including the device process id and exit code The exit code is passed from the process which was spawned by the dkserver for the call The token used is EXIT Arguments that are passed with the incoming call are logged The token is ARGS Same as log level 4 Same as log level 4 Default Prints information useful for debugging Logs the number of channels per interface and for each call the parsed dial string This information is actually logged by dkmgr which receives and parses incoming calls The value of the DKKEY is also logged by dkmgr Logs the full dial string including DKKEY as it was received Additional Log Files A number of other log files that can be examined for troubleshooting and diag nostic purposes are contained in the directory usr adm Ics These files are writ ten to by the LCS60 application software and contain information as shown in Table 8 3 Each entry in a log file begins with a time stamp process id and log level similar to that shown in the example above The contents of a log file can be displayed by use of the pg command 8 46 Issue 3 Error Messages Table 8 3 Log Files Log File Information adial log Dialer information arap lo ARAP sessions asytcp log Async to TCP sessions atmegr log
51. 9 scanning rules A 8 validation and matching A 9 Servers define 8 33 Service G 10 G 16 field A 3 menu 9 30 name G 19 type G 7 Service directory 8 12 commands 8 12 disable 8 12 enable 8 12 flush 8 13 report fields G 17 show 6 5 8 13 G 17 summary 8 13 G 18 types 8 13 8 16 Service port 1 11 configure 7 3 directory 7 3 example 7 18 socket 7 3 7 15 telnet 7 3 Services commands 3 9 Sesid G 8 to G 11 G 13 toG 15 Session directory 8 8 commands 8 7 kill 8 8 report fields G 8 show 4 18 6 6 8 8 G 8 show ppp G 11 trace 4 20 5 14 6 6 7 19 8 9 G 13 toG 15 types 8 10 Session parameters G 5 Sessions remote access 1 12 Set 9 21 Setup initial 3 3 Show 8 8 8 11 8 13 8 15 to 8 16 example 6 6 Show arap G 8 Show async G 10 Show ppp G 10 AppleTalk G 11 example 8 9 IP G 11 IPX G 11 link G 11 Show service example 6 5 Show session example 4 18 6 6 8 22 Show slip G 9 Show tcp G 10 Shutdown 2 27 SID enable G 6 SID type G 17 Simple network management proto col see SNMP Site preparation 2 2 SLIP 1 11 G 3 administration 5 13 client software F 2 configuration 5 1 dialstrings 5 9 to 5 10 PC F 19 protocol 5 10 references 1 4 Issue 2 stop 5 13 SLIP connection 5 10 SLIP service configuration 5 3 configuration parameters G 5 miscellaneous administrative commands 5 15 SLIP service examples F 19 SLIP service field A 3 SLIP ser
52. 9 15 R2 0 to R3 0 9 15 remote 1 20 9 16 Use G 17 to G 18 User field A 5 User ID mapping options A 5 User information ARAP F 1 gateway services 7 10 Mac F 1 PC F 1 PPP F 1 SLIP F 1 User login ID G 6 Useradd 8 38 Userdel 8 40 Usermod 8 39 Uucp 7 13 A 3 ccd GG V Van Jacobson header compression 1 12 F 13 Variable files 8 26 Verbosity G 19 Verify connections 9 28 fiber connection 2 28 Issue 2 Index LCS60 console connection 2 27 Version determining 9 9 Viewhosts 8 21 Viewnets 8 21 Virtual terminal 1 6 Vjslots G 9 VMEDKHS diagnostics 9 25 WwW Wait G 17 Wait for input timeout G 7 Wall mounting 2 8 Whoami service A 3 Wild card A 3 Windows 95 F 6 X Xmit G 8 to G 10 Xmit Bytes G 10 Xmit Pkts G 9 to G 10 Z Zone G 3 G 12 Zone name G 4 l 15 Index 1 16 Issue 2
53. A grounded power cord is attached to the power input jack on the rear panel of the LCS60 An RS 232 connection exists between the rear console port of the LCS60 and one of the following m Modem m TY 12 port on the data switch node m Directly connected terminal Preliminary Configuration Requirements Before configuring the LCS60 you must have the following information on hand 3 2 nodename of the LCS60 IP and IPX addresses for the ethernet IPX frame type for ethernet protocols and services the LCS60 will be using the number of sessions required for each protocol the default route the Domain Name Service if DNS is to be used the SNMP manager if SNMP is to be used IP and IPX addresses for virtual networks if remote access is to be used AppleTalk address and zone name for the AppleTalk virtual network if AppleTalk is to be used Issue 3 Introduction Specific Services The instructions in this chapter describe the configuration of some of the avail able services on the LCS60 For details of configuring a specific service refer to the appropriate chapter PPP Chapter 4 SLIP Chapter 5 ARAP Chapter 6 gateway services Chapter 7 Initial Setup The initsetup command allows you to configure the basic LCS60 as shown in Fig ure 3 2 figuration required for your LCS60 refer to the sections Configure Protocols and Gateway Services and Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP in this chapter and t
54. Answer y to keep the current key or n to discard it and enter a new one 7 L f n f op You na You will now be prompted to enter your Software Certificate Number and Software Key Software Please refer to the Software Certificate for details on obtaining a Software Key from the WECARE Support Center 1 800 WE2 CARE You can bypass entry of the software key values by typing q at the appropriate prompt If you choose to bypass entry of the Software Certificate Number and Software Key at this time you must manually run the lcsadm c config softwarekey command before the LCS60 can be used to provide network services Please enter your Software Certificate Number Certificate number or q to quit gt 160r3 xxxxxx xxxx You entered L60R3 XXXXXX XXXX Is this correct y n q y Please enter your Software Key Software Key or q to quit gt XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Registration Completed Successfully x To configure LCS60 protocols and services enter the command lcsadm and x then type config srvsetup and follow the instructions in the LCS60 Network Interface Installation and Administration Guide Top gt Config gt These values must be properly entered to unlock the copy protected LCS60 entered XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Is this correct y n q y SOFTWARE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Display LCS60 ID 2 Enter Software Certificate and Software Key 3 D
55. B provides configuration instructions for the StarKeeper II NMS and lists the LCS60 alarms reported by the StarKeeper II NMS Error messages that the user may encounter are listed in Appendix C 1 1 sounjee4 Document Organization Software Installation This appendix gives instructions for installing UNIX System software on LCS60 machines with Fujitsu Drives and with Seagate 5660N Drives wn oD pas Oo LL Man Pages Appendix E includes copies listed alphabetically of selected man pages provided on line with the LCS60 User Information Appendix F provides examples of software packages that may be used with the LCS60 This appendix is provided for the convenience of the user and is not an endorse ment of any particular software package Glossary A glossary of terms is provided Reference Documentation Note LCS60 users can obtain assistance to problems encountered while work ing on the system by calling the Customer Assistance Center CAC HOTLINE 1 800 WE2CARE Because it may be necessary to integrate the LCS60 with data switch and Star Keeper II NMS products the following manuals are useful references m StarKeeper II NMS User Guide select code 255 114 707 m Network Access Control NAC System Installation Operations and Mainte nance Guide select code 255 102 101 m Datakit II VCS Node Reference select code 255 115 220 m BNS 1000 Node Reference select code 255 190 220 m BNS 2000 Node
56. Cc Q _ ow Top gt service p 9 Top gt Service gt l Return T Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config disable enable flush help 5 manager ports quit session show x summary types top The following commands are available from the Service directory Name disable or enable Synopsis disable or enable service type service type Description The disable enable command allows the administrator to turn a particular service off on These commands require root permission Note When you disable a service the current sessions will not be taken down 8 12 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Name flush Synopsis flush service type service type Description The flush command resets statistics for a service type This command requires root permission Name show Synopsis show service type Description The show command lists statistics on configured services capacities and current states Entering show without arguments will display statistics for all services Name summary Synopsis summary S Description This command summarizes the service information 5 including the number of sessions configured for each o service and the state of the service For PPP this command D lists the number of IP AppleTalk and IPX over PPP sessions 5 Name types Synopsis types Description The types command lists the available service types Manager Directory Comma
57. Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service m When a NAC is used the remote user s NAC ID is used in the ipas script to reserve an IP address for that user Therefore when the script prompts for User login Id itis referring to the user s NAC ID NAC user IDs are alphanumeric symbols up to nine character long A user NAC ID can be allocated a unique reserved IP address for each of the IP network security groups A sample session is shown in Screen 5 2 Refer to the IP Address Assignment by the LCS60 section in Chapter 1 for more information Screen 5 2 Configure Reserved IP Address Example a Top gt Config gt ipas CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Configure Display IP Network Security Groups 2 Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 2 RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address 2 Delete Reserved IP Address 3 Edit Reserved IP Address 4 Display Reserved IP Address Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter User login Id for help RETURN for user ids q to quit gt tbaker Select an IP Network Security Group to add an IP Reserved Address morse Library ug Screen 5 2 continued on next page Issue 3 dS LC
58. Connection through StarKeeper II NMS 2 17 Connecting the Fiber Interface 2 19 m Routing the Optical Fiber Cable 2 19 m Installing the CPM HS Module and Optical Fiber Cable 2 20 Table of Contents Configuration of the Lucent Technologies Data Switch LCS60 2 21 m Dialogues 2 22 m Enter Group Name 2 22 m Define the Local Address for the LCS60 2 22 m Configure the CPM HS Module 2 24 Power and Grounding 2 25 m Power Up Procedures 2 25 m Power Down Procedures 2 27 Verify LCS60 Console Connection 2 27 Verify Fiber Connection 2 28 Configure the LCS60 2 29 LAN Connections 2 29 Ethernet 2 29 Issue 3 Introduction The LCS60 is supplied with the operating software already installed therefore installation consists mainly of installing hardware and configuring the system The list below identifies the tasks in the order that they should be performed to install and configure the product These tasks are discussed in detail in the fol lowing sections 1 OO AN DBD oO Fe WO N Mount the LCS60 Attach the console to the LCS60 Connect the fiber between the LCS60 and the CPM HS Configure the LCS60 in the data switch Power up the LCS60 oJeMpJeH Verify the LCS60 console connection Verify the LCS60 fiber connection Configure the LCS60 using the lcsadm interface Chapters 3 7 Verify connections between the LCS60 and LAN hosts and between the LCS60 and data switch connected endpoints Chapter 9 Controls and Indic
59. Do you wish to retain the existing Software Certificate Number and Software Key values a Issue 3 8 19 Icsadm Interface a k Type for help Enter y n gt n Are you sure you want to delete the existing software key records Type for help Enter y n gt y A copy of your current keys have been saved in the file usr adm lcs SoftwareKey old for future reference You will now be prompted to enter your Software Certificate Number and Software Key These values must be properly entered to unlock the copy protected LCS60 Software Please refer to the Software Certificate for details on obtaining a Software Key from the WECARE Support Center 1 800 WE2 CARE You can bypass entry of the software key values by typing q at the appropriate prompt If you choose to bypass entry of the Software Certificate Number and Software Key at this time you must manually run the lcsadm c config softwarekey command before the LCS60 can be used to provide network services Please enter your Software Certificate Number Certificate number or q to quit gt 160r3 xxxxxx xxxx You entered L60R3 XXXXXX XXXX Is this correct y n q y Please enter your Software Key Software Key or q to quit gt XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX You entered XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Is this correct y n q y Registration Completed Successfully SOFTWARE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Display LCS60 ID 2 Enter Software Certificate and
60. Group name q to quit for help gt morse Enter an Internet network address q to quit gt 154 12 23 gt Is 154 12 23 0 divided into subnets ly n y Enter number of mask bits for this subnet 7 for help q for quit gt 8 x New IP Network Security Group morse Configuration is KKK Class B IP Address 154 12 23 Network Mask 259 2552 255 4 0 Is this correct Enter y n gt y a 2 Issue 3 3 15 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup a IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group Delete an IP Network Security Group Edit an IP Network Security Group Display all IP Network Security Groups BwWN Ee Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter an IP Network Security Group name q to quit for help gt Library Enter an Internet network address q to quit gt 154 12 24 gt Is 154 12 24 0 divided into subnets ly n y Enter number of mask bits for this subnet for help q for quit gt 8 New IP Network Security Group Library Configuration is KKK Class B IP Address 154 12 24 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Is this correct Enter y n gt y f 09 f op IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group Delete an IP Network Secur
61. LCS60 is connected and 60name is the name of the LCS60 performing the telnet For tcpsock 540 is the service type nuucp is the login ID corresponding to the UUCP service on the Ethernet connected host and password is the login password for the nuucp login on the Ethernet connected host For example for the network shown in Figure 7 1 the string for telnet would be moon Any DK g 0 mlkway earth brown telnet M uucp moon in in nuucp 012 word password 012 Note The above entry must be entered on one line Enter spaces as shown and for tepsock would be moon Any DK g 0 mlkway earth brown tcpsock moon 540 in in nuucp word password Both ends of the uucp connection must use the uucp g protocol 7 14 Issue 3 User Information LAN to LCS60 to Data Switch To transfer files using uucp from an Ethernet host to the LCS60 to a host attached to a data switch the system administrator must configure a service port for socket service Note Configuration of the service port for socket service requires super user permission To configure the service the administrator can assign a PDD of the destination to which you will be transferring files to the service port If a PDD is not assigned once connected the system will return the LCS60 call address prompt for the user to enter the destination desired The screen below shows an exam ple based on Figure 7 1 for the Ethernet host topper connected to the LCS60 morse to s
62. LCS60s and LCS50Es configured as clients The remote backup is done disk to disk over the data switch net work A backup restore server may be configured to be its own client However since this capability would duplicate on the server s hard disk files that are already in place and functioning elsewhere on the server s disk it is strongly recommended that servers back themselves up locally disk to tape see above and not remotely disk to disk Note A server can only be a client of itself although this is not recommended not of another server m A server to store and individually access multiple backups for each client m A server to restore variable configuration files to clients Any of the back ups that a server has stored on behalf of a client may be selected for restore The remote restore is done disk to disk over the data switch net work m Users to choose complete or partial restores This facility is identical to the facility available during restores from tape see above gt a 3 F D 2 w e m Remote backups and restores to be initiated either from a client or a server m A client to be backed up by more than one server m A server to create backup tapes for its clients A server can copy a client s backup from disk to tape rather than transmit the backup over the data switch network from its disk to the client s disk Such tapes may be used to restore damaged clients in case a remote
63. N Top gt session Top gt Session gt trace tcp LCS60 TCP to Async Gateway Tracking Information Apr 24 15 12 48 Sesid State Port Foreign Address Chan Switch Address 13 CONN 23 154 12 24 44 1188 5 marina pier cove T2 CONN 23 154 12 24 47 2331 4 marina pier cove 13 2 CONN 23 154 12 24 39 1448 3 marina pier cove Error Messages For error messages that may appear when placing an outgoing call through the CommkKit Host Interface refer to Appendix C Issue 3 7 19 Aemaye y Administration Log Files The log files shown in Table 7 1 are written to by the LCS60 interface software and contain information as shown in the table Table 7 1 Gateway Services Log Files Log File Information Directory tcpasy log TCP to Async sessions usr adm lcs tcpasy asytcp log Async to TCP sessions usr adm lcs asytcp tcplisten log TCP to Async service usrfadm cs To display the contents of the files use the page command as shown in the following example i D pg usr adm lcs tcplisten log Jun 5 12 27 06 381 6 main STARTUP Complete Jun 13 14 53 02 381 3 terminate Shutdown SIGTERM Received Jun 13 14 58 54 354 main STARTUP Complete Jun 13 14 59 32 354 terminate Shutdown SIGTERM Received Jun 16 11 00 40 640 main STARTUP Complete 3 6 3 6 7 20 Issue 3 8 Administration Basics 8 1 Logging On 8 1 System Console 8 2 Remote Administration 8 2
64. NOHUP no hangup feature for this port Type q to quit for help or press RETURN for default of n Enter y n gt y Enable the LCS60 2WAY feature for this port Type q to quit for help or press RETURN for default of n Enter y n gt y Enable the LCS60 SID Security Server Identification feature for this port Type q to quit for help or press RETURN for default of n J Enter y n gt y Enter Security Server type nac or other for port 4419 Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of nac Ne 7 Screen 7 1 continued on next page 7 4 Issue 3 Screen 7 1 Continued ye Nec gt nac Enter Inactivity timeout minutes Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of n J gt 2 KKK NOTICE KKK Entering port lt 4419 gt to provide lt telnet gt service as follows gt Pre Defined call address gt gt mlkway earth yard TOP Window S222 ykrar eak dial wae whee 1024 default 8 bit character mode Enabled Inactivity timeout minutes 2 Wait for Input timeout minutes 2 STNOHUB orare Sia ue te a kkr Sadie Pies Enabled BWA obs oy cece AE Seed a A Enabled SLD resvi ae case ahoa ta ansen a a alanis cee a Enabled as nac Enter this service port Enter y n gt y Port lt 4419 gt has been added Press RETURN to continue gt Return TCP TO ASYNCHRONOUS G
65. OLAN QOVMg OSS To run additional diagnostics on the MVME197 processor board conduct the following dialogue to obtain the diagnostics prompt and list the available diagnostics Note For complete details of available diagnostics and how to run them refer to the Motorola document MVME197 Single Board Computer Diagnostics Firmware User s Manual z E D 197 Bug gt sd D 197 Diag gt he 5 AEM Append Error Messages Mode Q BSW BusSwitch Tests DIR gt CEM Clear Error Messages i CF Configuration Editor O DCAM DCAM Tests DIR DE Display Errors DEM Display Error Messages Xe r Issue 3 9 23 Processor Diagnostics MVME197 a k DP Display Pass Count ECDM ECDM Tests DIR HE Help on Tests Commands HEX Help Extended LA Loop Always Mode LANC LAN Coprocessor Intel 82596 Tests DIR LC Loop Continuous Mode LE Loop on Error Mode EF Line Feed Mode LN Loop Non Verbose Mode MASK Self Test Mask NCR NCR 53C710 SCSI I O Processor Test DIR NV Non Verbose Mode PCC2 PCCchip2 Tests DIR RAM Random Access Memory Tests DIR RAMCD Generic Memory Tests with Data Cache only DIR RAMCDI Generic Memory Tests with Instruction Data Cache DIR RTC MK48T0x Timekeeping DIR SE Stop on Error Mode ST Self Test DIR ST2401 CD2401 Serial Self Tests DIR VME2 VME2Chip2 Tests DIR ZE Zero Errors ZP Zero Pass Count na p Use the st command at the 197 Diag
66. PPP Service Figure 4 1 shows an example network using PPP service Note PPP service using AppleTalk requires an R2 0 or R3 0 software key IPX service requires an R3 0 software key Refer to Chapter 3 for information about the software key Figure 4 1 Virtual IP Addresses 154 12 23 1 morse 154 12 24 1 Library 154 12 25 1 Techs morse oe i Virtual AppleTalk Zone Example Network PPP Service Nae a 154 12 24 49 IP Ep Zone Research Lab 2010 114 wimsey IP AppleTalk l Research Lab 2010 1 morse e0 54 12 215 e Zone Starbase 520 88 IPX Address 1562 8003E224056 Virtual IPX Address 57 1 LAN Apple Printer Novell File Server Workstation hudson IPX 57 1FE pe 4 Sue ee A Lucent Data Switch N i mlkwayjearth 4 dock net 154 12 we alleyn AppleTalk _ Zone Research Lab 2010 11 Mac fox IP IPX 154 12 25 2 IP 57 1F0 IPX Remote Access Clients You can configure the LCS60 for PPP service using either the srvsetup command or the individual commands protocol maxsessions ipas ipx atalkas etherif The examples in this chapter use the individual commands If previous configuration for example for SLIP service was performed some of the steps required for configuring the LCS60 for PPP service may have already been completed e g etherif
67. Package Query 1 Enter the number of pseudo terminal devices to configure on your system 0 1024 256 Return Ready to Start Installation z D 5 3 o gt 5 D O 4 At this point the installation should continue without interruption until finished You will only need to check occasionally for error messages which require a response If the installation media contains multiple tapes you may be asked to insert them as necessary 1 Continue with Unattended Portion of Installation 2 Review Package Questions and Answers Enter option number of choice 1 2 1 1 Ne 2 Issue 3 9 5 ab oO Cc Cc oD pr fam a Reload System Software i D Ready to begin Formatting The following disks will now be formatted m197_c0d0 You can safely ignore error messages such as Non Motorola volume id read on unit xx Invalid VTOC read on unit xx Press lt RETURN gt to continue with formatting or interrupt CTRL c to abort Return Slicing Installation Disk s Activating Swapping To Disk Making File Systems Installing Boot Block Mounting Installation Partitions Switching to Installation Partitions Installing Package s Installation in progress 10 Installation messages will continue to scroll as the UNIX System software is installed This procedure will continue for approximately 49 60 minutes 11 When the following message appears remove the tape and pr
68. Reference select code 255 191 220 m CommKit Host Interface 386 486 Computers Installation and Administration Guide select code 255 110 115 1 2 Issue 3 Reference Documentation m Data Networking Products and Services Ordering Guide select code 255 100 021 m CommkKit Internal Interface Specification select code 700 283 sounjee Order these manuals from the Customer Information Center P O Box 19901 Indianapolis IN 46219 1 800 432 6600 USA 1 800 255 1242 Canada 1 317 352 8557 other areas or contact your Lucent Technologies account execu tive AE Apple References When using the LCS60 with AppleTalk or ARAP the following references may be useful m Inside AppleTalk Second Edition G S Sidhu et al Addison Wesley Pub lishing ISBN 0 201 55021 0 m AppleTalk Remote Access Modem Script Workshop Software contact Apple Computer Gateway References RFC 854 Telnet Protocol Specification RFC 856 Telnet Binary Transmission RFC 857 Telnet Echo Option RFC 858 Telnet Suppress 60 Ahead Option RFC 859 Telnet Status Option RFC 860 Telnet Timing Mark Option RFC 861 Telnet Extended Options List Options RFC 884 Telnet Terminal Type Option Issue 3 1 3 wn o LL Reference Documentation PPP References RFC 1549 PPP in HDLC Framing RFC 1548 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 1378 The PPP AppleTalk Control Protocol ATCP RFC 1332 The PPP Intern
69. STREAMS buffers by the size of the requested buffer for each TCP IP kernel STREAMS module or driver Note that no entry will appear for the character driver w_ since it is not a STREAMS driver The display is a matrix containing a line for every kernel module or driver The columns represent buffer lengths in bytes rounded up to the nearest power of two Each failed request increments the counter for the associated buffer size The counters are reset only when the system is rebooted The packet traffic display is a running summary of packet transmission statistics This display is selected by calling netstat with a single numeric argument indicat ing the frequency with which the display is to be updated No options can be used with this display This display includes the numbers of inbound and out bound packets and errors for the most active interface and the total for all inter faces The first line of each screen of information contains a summary since the network was last brought up Subsequent lines show values accumulated over the preceding interval DIAGNOSTICS FILES Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination The message can t open device in the STREAMS display indicates that netstat can not open the device to obtain the requested statistics either because the module or device has not been configured into the kernel or because all of the allocated minor devices are already in use
70. Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 7 1 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Issue 2 Online Manual Pages Controls and Indicators Specifications Required Additional Equipment System Console and Port Configuration MVME712M Module Optioning RS 232 Interface Protocol and Services Commands Configuration Commands Config Directory Administrative Maintenance Commands Config Directory Gateway Services Log Files Start stop Command Dependencies Backup Restore Functions Log Files Server Table Flags User ID Mapping Options Program Arguments Specification 1 21 2 3 2 5 2 10 2 11 3 28 3 29 7 20 8 7 8 35 8 47 A 4 A 6 xiii Table of Contents xiv Issue 2 Screens Screen 2 1 Screen 2 2 Screen 3 1 Screen 4 1 Screen 4 2 Screen 4 3 Screen 4 4 Screen 4 5 Screen 5 1 Screen 5 2 Screen 5 3 Screen 6 1 Screen 7 1 Screen 8 1 Screen 8 2 Screen 8 3 Screen 8 4 Screen 8 5 Screen 8 6 Screen 8 7 Screen 8 8 Screen 8 9 Screen 8 10 Screen 8 11 Screen 8 12 Screen 8 13 Screen 8 14 Screen 8 15 Screen 8 16 Screen 8 17 Screen 9 1 Screen 9 2 Screen 9 3 Issue 2 TY Configuration Dialogue MSM Configuration Dialogue LCS60 Top Directory Configure IP Network Security Group Example Configure Reserved IP Address Example Configure IPX Parameters Example Configure AppleTalk Virtual Netw
71. The maximum definition length is 4096 characters A macro defini tion is valid only for the duration of a connection to a remote host all mac ros are automatically deleted when the connection is closed Issue 3 FTP Issue 3 FTP 1 macdel mname Delete the macro mname macls mname List the names of defined macros or the definition of the macro named mname mdelete remote file Delete the specified files on the remote host If globbing is enabled each remote file will first be expanded mdir remote file local file Obtain an extended directory listing of multiple files on the remote host and place the result in local file Globbing must be turned off when using this command Note that the specification of local file is mandatory meget remote file Retrieve the specified files from the remote host and place them in the current local directory If globbing is enabled the specification of each remote file will first be expanded mkdir directory name Make a directory on the remote host mls remote file local file Obtain an abbreviated listing of multiple files on the remote host and place the result in local file Globbing must be turned off when using this com mand Note that the specification of local file is mandatory mode mode name Set the file transmission mode to mode name Valid modes are block compressed and stream default Only the stream mode is currently sup ported modtime remote fil
72. ZONE NAME lt Research Lab gt NOTE Changes to the configuration of the LCS60 virtual AppleTalk network will not take effect until you Enter the lcsadm command and then type start atalk from the top command directory to start AppleTalk protocol CONFIGURE ADDRESS AND ZONE FOR APPLETALK VIRTUAL NETWORK 1 Configure Address and Zone Name 2 Display Address and Zone Name 3 Delete Address and Zone Name Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt q Top gt Config gt A Note Do not use the AppleTalk address shown in the example follow your corporate AppleTalk address convention 11 Configure the Ethernet interface etherif m Enter etherif at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config etherif from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for configuring the ethernet interface Refer to the example in Screen 4 5 Issue 3 4 11 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 5 Configure the Ethernet Interface Example a Top gt Config gt etherif TCP IP ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Configure an Ethernet Interface 2 Delete an Ethernet Interface 3 Display all Interfaces that are configured Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 WARNING This option will automatically delete each interface that was previously configured It reconstructs the Ethernet interface database from scratch and re
73. a 1 32 55 13714 3 ppp inbound 54 6 ch 508 uid tbaker 1 34 22 13714 3 ppp Feb 20 13 34 25 13714 3 ppp yardnac 65 3 c Feb 20 13 40 01 13714 3 ppp Feb 20 13 54 49 13714 3 ppp yardnac 65 3 G Feb 20 15 42 47 13714 3 ppp yardnac 65 3 C Feb 20 15 51 52 13714 3 ppp Feb 20 15 52 45 13714 3 ppp yardnac 65 3 c Feb 20 15 54 12 13714 3 ppp Feb 21 08 33 52 13714 3 ppp Feb 21 08 33 53 13714 3 ppp Feb 21 10 32 25 489 3 ppp Feb 21 10 32 25 489 3 ppp Feb 21 11 04 15 388 3 ppp Fri Feb 16 pg usr adm 1lcs ppp log Fri Feb 16 h 510 uid pdavison rqst_reserved h 510 uid pdavison rqst_reserved h 508 uid troughtn rqst_reserved h 508 uid troughtn rqst_reserved NEW 1 1 dkserver morse rqst_reserved 1 DEL oral NEW 1 1 dkserver morse DEL ed NEW 1 1 dkserver morse NEW 1 3 dkserver morse DEL 8 NEW 1 4 dkserver morse DEL 4 DEL vi exited started loglevel 3 nfiles 256 p3m received HANGUP for protocol way eart way eart way eart way eart way eart h h h h h 802b A wy Related Commands The following commands may be of particular interest when administering the LCS60 s PPP service e ping e netstat e ipxping e ipxnetstat e atping e atnetstat The manual pages for these commands are contained in Appendix E of this docu ment they are also available online Issue 3 4 21 Administration
74. address gt on his her data switch dial string that was not within the range of the IP network and subnetwork mask associated with the called IP Network Security Group i e the dkserver service name lt IP address gt is reserved The IP SLIP client requested an lt IP address gt on his her data switch dial string that has been reserved by the LCS60 administrator If a user wishes to request his her own reserved IP address then he she should omit the IP address from his her data switch dialstring slip is busy The SLIP service has reached its maximum allowed number of concurrent sessions or else the user s reserved IP address is in use by another session for the same user Try again later or else have the LCS60 administrator raise the limit lt IP address gt is busy The IP SLIP client requested an lt IP address gt on his her data switch dial string that has already been allocated to another user dkserver lt dkserver name gt does not have an IP network configured The IP SLIP client has called into the LCS60 using lt dkserver name gt as the data switch dialstring s local component However no IP Network Security Group and therefore no IP network is associated with that lt dkserver name gt This should not happen unless the LCS60 administrator has deleted an IP Network Security Group the ipas daemon terminates and is restarted and dkhost is not restarted network is down The SLIP service has been taken ou
75. and destination address fields match the addresses specified within either an IP IPX or DDP datagram The source and destination addresses for IP datagrams can be specified in either dotted IP notation or as symbolic host names For AppleTalk addresses the format is network node e g 2001 147 For IPX addresses the format is network node socket e g 53 0000a200443d or 53 0000a200443d ncp The socket portion of the IPX address is optional However either symbolic names or hexadecimal values can be used to specify the socket field of an IPX address Acceptible symbolic IPX socket names are ncp sap rip netbios diagnostic and nlsp The sport and dport key words are only supported for IP datagrams Any IP i e TCP or UDP packet that contains a source port or destination port number that matches the sport and dport keywords will be captured All other packets will be captured but discarded when displayed p iftrace is a tool to allow the tracing of packets at the interface level By default it does not capture packets from the media that are not addressed to the interface The normal method for capture is to use the g option to capture into a file and then use the p option to display the captured packets This allows for the fastest capture with a minimum of lost packets If fast capture is not required the g and p options may be combined to display packets as they are captured SEE ALSO BUGS Issue 3 hosts 4 ip 7P tcp
76. atmgr process by entering the lcsadm c start atalk command from the LCS60 system console If the problem occurs again use the cd etc shutdown y g0 i6 command to reboot the system Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists L600725 Process snmpd is down Description The snmpd process is not executing Action Restart the snmpd process by executing lcsadm c start snmp from the LCS60 system console Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists B 8 Issue 3 L600730 Process ipxd is down Description The ipxd process is not executing Action Restart the ipxd process by executing lcsadm c stop ipx followed by Icsadm c start ipx from the LCS60 system console Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists L600735 Process sapd is down Description The sapd process is not executing Action Restart the sapd process by executing lcsadm c stop ipx followed by Icsadm c start ipx from the LCS60 system console Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists Issue 3 B 9 Alarms to StarKeeper II NMS 9 2 A D D ke 2 Z z op Alarms to StarKeeper II NMS ie Z D Q D D xX S 09 B 10 Issue 3 User Error Messages Issue 3 Cable Error Message C 1 Outgoing Call Error Messages C 1 Incoming Error Messages C 9 SLIP Sessions C 10 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 Cable Error Message If the cable is d
77. basic LCS60 operation as shown in Figure 3 2 A sample initsetup session is presented on the following screen gt Top gt Config gt init S n f 09 a LCS60 Initial Setup and Configuration Procedure The initsetup procedure leads you through the steps to initially set up this LCS60 by entering the node name time and date and the software key x This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to set the node name x x This is the name by which other hosts know this LCS60 The LCS60 is currently called sysV68 gt Do you want to change it y n q Y Enter the new node name for this LCS60 for help q to quit gt morse This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to set the timezone date and x time of the LCS60 system clock Current time and time zone is 13 33 EST gt Change the time zone y n ql n Current date and time Mon 08 17 95 13 33 gt Change the date and time y n q n Me wy 3 6 Issue 3 Initial Setup g 5 This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to enter the software key for this x LCS60 in order to activate the appropriate software features SOFTWARE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Display LCS60 Machine ID 2 Enter Software Certificate and Software Key 3 Display Software Certificate and Software Key Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1 LCS60 ID XXXXXXXX SO
78. but can carry multiple protocols simultaneously Issue 3 Glossary RIP Routing information protocol A configurable lcsadm process for routing IP packets RFC Request for comments document of the IETF routed A service which uses RIP to maintain the IP route table A confi gurable lcsadm process for routing IP packets router A device that routes information between networks SLIP Serial Line IP Protocol An internet protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol socket ser This service is used to allow LAN connected hosts to initiate vice uucp connections to data switch connected hosts The LCS60 terminates the uucp TCP datastream and retransmits it using 8 bit virtual circuits over the data switch network to remote asyn chronous endpoints subnetwork In TCP IP Protocol a logical subsection of a single internet net work e g dock net is divided into subnets m net0 and b net telnet service The telnet service provides telnet network virtual terminal emu lation to a data switch connected device zone A collection of networks on an AppleTalk internet AppleTalk uses zones to group resources logically across LANs indepen dent of device location that is zones do not have to be physi cally contiguous Zones allow users to find devices easily Parameters The following parameters are used in configuring the LCS60 The parameters are listed alphabetically according to the service being configured AppleTal
79. class have been saved in var sadm pkg FH4042XX1 save root verifying class lt replace gt z D 5 2 o9 5 D O 4 Installation of lt FH4042XX1 gt was successful Remove the tape once you have completed the installation Issue 3 ab 1 Cc Cc oD pr fam 9 Reload System Software inet Package Removal The LCS60 Application tape will initialize its own version of the inet package therefore it is essential that you remove the existing inet package Remove the inet package by conducting the dialogue shown Screen 9 3 Screen 9 3 inet Package Removal a N pkgrm inet The following package is currently installed inet Internet Utilities m88k FH40 42 IR03 111393 Do you want to remove this package y n q y Removing installed package instance lt inet gt Verifying package dependencies WARNING The lt Motif gt package depends on the package currently being removed WARNING The lt compat gt package depends on the package currently being removed WARNING The lt nfs gt package depends on the package currently being removed Dependency checking failed Do you want to continue with the removal of this package y n q y Processing package information Executing preremove script e Updating system information Removal of lt inet gt was successful Xe wh 9 8 Issue 3 Reload System Software LCS
80. command Request a list of the FTP protocol commands implemented by the remote server no arguments or an explanation of the specified protocol command rmdir directory name Delete a directory on the remote host rstatus file Show the status of the remote host or of the specified file on the remote host runique Toggle the creation of unique local file names for retrieval using get and meget If the destination file name already exists a numeric extension will be added to the name incrementing the number sequentially until a unique name is created For example if the target local file name is for tune and that file already exists the target name fortune 1 will be used If fortune 1 already exists the target name fortune 2 will be tried This will continue with extensions 1 through 99 if all versions of the file already exist the transfer will fail The unique file name will be displayed if the transfer succeeds By default receive unique is off send local file remote file A synonym for put sendport Toggle the use of the FTP protocol command PORT when establishing a data connection When enabled default ftp will use the PORT command to inform the server of the local port on which the client is listening for the data connection The server will then connect to that port When disabled ftp will listen for all data connections on the default port site arg Send the arguments verbatim to the remot
81. command resides etc opt dk dkhosts host control file for destination mapping SEE ALSO E 36 push 1C authorize 1M dkdial 3X maphost 3X dkhosts 4 srvtab A time 2 in the UNIX System V Programmer s Reference Manual Issue 3 PUSH PUSH 1C NAME push transfer files to another system SYNOPSIS push L destination filename directory push L destination directory lt file_list DESCRIPTION Issue 3 push establishes a data switch circuit to the target remote host named in destina tion and transfers files to that host The filenames are files or directories on the source local machine The filenames are placed in the directory on the target machine If the directory does not begin with a it is interpreted relative to the user s HOME directory on the target des tination The directory will be created if required before the files are transferred Specifying a directory as one of the filenames will transfer the entire directory tree beginning at the named point The second command format takes the list of files to transfer from the standard input It differs from the first format however in that the position of the files in input pathnames is preserved For example push lxho9 a b c a d e tmp one creates files tmp one b tmp one c and tmp one e while push lxho9 tmp two lt lt a b c a d e creates files tmp two a b tmp two c and tmp two a d e The second format is
82. commands The command interpreter prompt is ftp gt Ftp can also be run from a shell script taking its input from a file Several options may be specified on the ftp command line Most options correspond to an ftp command and are discussed in more detail in the description of the referenced command d enable debugging debug g disable file name globbing glob i turn off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers prompt n disable autologin upon initial connection t enable packet tracing trace v enable verbose mode verbose wwsize set the TCP window size If no host is specified on the command line ftp will enter its command interpreter and await further instructions from the user If a host is specified ftp will immedi ately attempt to establish a connection to an FTP server on that host Host can be either the host name or its Internet address If the host is followed by a port ftp will attempt to contact an FTP server at that port Port can be either the port number or the name of the service associated with that port see services 4 If autologin is enabled default ftp will check the netrc 4 file in the user s home directory for an entry describing an account on the remote host If such an entry exists ftp will automatically log in to that account If no entry is found ftp will use the local user name as the login on the remote host and prompt for a password and account to complete the l
83. config ured to be started at boot time through the Icsadm config protocol command start requires root permission dkhost indicates the CommKit Host Interface Software The start command may start more services protocols than specified on the command line due to the dependen cies of the protocols and services Table 8 1 shows the dependencies for the start and stop commands Name Synopsis Description 8 6 stop stop dkhost ipx tcpip atalk slip ppp snmp routed asytcp tcpasy arap all The stop command requires root permission stops the named service or protocol Services protocols can be stopped individually or all at once all The all option will stop all protocols and services that are running when stop is executed This command may stop more services protocols than specified on the command line due to the dependencies of the protocols and services stop requires root permission Table 8 1 shows the depen dencies for the start and stop commands Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Table 8 1 Start stop Command Dependencies Command Entered Protocols Services Started start arap start asytcp start atalk start dkhost start ipx start ppp start routed start slip start snmp start tcpasy start tcpip arap tcpip asytcp atalk dkhost ipx tcpip PPP tcpip routed tcpip slip tcpip snmp tcpip tcpasy tcpip Command Entered Protocols Services Stopped st
84. count DESCRIPTION E 4 atping is intended for use in network testing measurement and management pri marily for manual fault isolation Tracking a single point hardware or software failure in an AppleTalk network can often be difficult atping uses the AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP Request packet to elicit an AEP Reply from a host or gateway equipped with an Echoer process attached to the statically assigned socket number 4 Because of the load it could impose on the network hosts and gateways atping should not be used during normal operations and it should not be used from automated scripts To use atping for fault isolation the AppleTalk address of the target node must be specified in net host format It is also possible to contact routers on networks OTHER THAN that to which the LCS60 is attached by specifying a zero node as in net 0 Refer to Inside AppleTalk p 4 7 It is not possible to contact the AppleTalk addresses that correspond to the LCS60 s virtual network port or to its Ethernet port By default atping sends an AppleTalk data packet that is 64 bytes long The first byte is always the AEP header this is followed by a time stamp The remainder of the packet is padded with additional bytes to fill out the packet The size of the packet in bytes may be changed by specifying an alternate packetsize on the com mand line By default atping sends one packet per second and prints one line of output showing the round
85. done when powering up Configuration of the Lucent Technologies Data Switch LCS60 Configuration of the CPM HS module in the data switch is done in the same way as a CPM HS module connected to a UNIX System host The number of chan nels should be the same as the number of channels with which the LCS60 is con figured 512 The first local address entered must match the first IP Network Security Group s name Subsequent local addresses should match the other IP Security Group names entered into the LCS60 configuration database The LCS60 supports up to four IP Network Security Groups The first local address should be the same as the node name of the LCS60 Additional information on creating the local address group and CPM HS entries can be found in the Lucent Technologies data switch documentation After the CPM HS module is plugged into the data switch the CPM HS module must be configured from the data switch console The Network Administrator enters the group name and local address for the LCS60 and configures the CPM HS module The following tasks are performed at the data switch console m Enter group name m Define the local address for the LCS60 m Configure the CPM HS module Sample dialogues see also Figure 3 1 for these tasks are described below Issue 3 2 21 Installing the LCS60 aJeMpJEH D 5 T Installing the LCS60 Dialogues Note Dialogues differ depending on the data switch an
86. earth morse slip m512 ql v16 mlkway earth morse slip D mlkway earth morse slip 154 12 23 10 The options for these dialstrings are described below mN qN D Issue 3 Specifies the maximum transmission unit MTU that the SLIP connection can transport The default SLIP MTU is 1006 the MTU value must satisfy 296 lt N lt 1006 Specifies whether priority queueing is enabled 1 or disabled 0 By default priority queueing is enabled In priority queue ing IP datagrams are marked as either interactive or non interactive interactive datagrams are always queued in front of non interactive datagrams The queue is located between the IP protocol and the data switch therefore priority queueing only affects datagrams flowing from the LCS60 to the data switch Specifies the number of Van Jacobson TCP IP header compres sion slots to use The default is 16 the number of slots must satisfy 3 lt N lt 64 Refer to the section Van Jacobson TCP IP Header Compression in Chapter 1 Specifies that the user be assigned an IP address dynamically rather than use his her reserved IP address provided a negoti able IP address has been administered in his her client software package Without the D option the reserved IP address for the user is assigned provided it exists and is not already in use 5 9 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service dS LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Servic
87. executed from the system console 8 14 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Name show Synopsis show Description The show command gives information about the LCS60 including details such as process ID start time location of log files log levels and number of software servers Name update Synopsis update Description The update command resets the LCS60 manager configuration In addition to the main directories Top Service Ports Session and Config a Server directory Screen 8 6 is available from the Manager directory Note The Server directory is a diagnostic tool for checking protocol service information and is not intended for normal administrative purposes Screen 8 6 Server Directory gt a 3 l D Q w 12 Top gt Manager gt server i i Top gt Manager gt Server gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config help log manager ports quit service session show top types The following commands are available from the Server directory Name log Synopsis log service type level Issue 3 8 15 Cc Q 5 O lt Icsadm Interface Description This command is used to change the log level of each protocol server for a service The higher the number given for the log level the more detailed the log file Valid log levels are arap 3 6 9 ppp 3 6 9 10 slip 3 6 asytcp 3 6 20 atmgr 3 9 tcpasy 3 6 20 lcm 3 6 20 Default
88. for instructions about configuring this feature LCS60 AND SERVICE SESSION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Add Change a Session Parameter 2 Delete a Session Parameter 3 Display all Session Parameters Enter Menu Selection a Issue 3 3 13 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup a Type q to QUIT or for HELP ASAE Enter session parameter maxsessions ppp slip arap asytep tcpasy Type q to QUIT or for HELP J gt slip Enter session parameter value Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 80 NOTICE Entering lt slip gt service with value of lt 80 gt Is this correct Enter y n gt y CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature LCS60 AND SERVICE SESSION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION MENU Add Change a Session Parameter 2 Delete a Session Parameter S 3 Display all Session Parameters Enter Menu Selection g Type q to QUIT or for HELP dp gt 1 Z Enter session parameter dp maxsessions ppp slip arap asytcp tcpasy Q Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt arap Enter session parameter value Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 60 NOTICE Entering lt arap gt service with value of lt 60 gt Is this correct Enter y n gt y CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature LCS60 AND SERVICE SESSION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION M
89. ipas Skip the steps that have been com pleted previously Note The user should familiarize him herself with all aspects of the LCS60 SLIP service For details including a description of Multiple IP Subnet works refer to Chapter 1 After configuring the LCS60 as described under Initial Setup in Chapter 3 per form the steps shown in Figure 5 2 to configure the LCS60 SLIP Service Issue 3 5 1 fa tS LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service Figure 5 2 Configuring SLIP Service a config protocol inIP CoE Jo gt tepip slip Fe rit maxsessions q A l ipas c etherif srvsetup v l Dia start all y configure client side of SLIP x service y 5 2 Obtain the Ethernet IP address for the LCS60 and obtain an IP network address for each IP network security group At least one IP address in addition to the Ethernet address is required for SLIP and PPP service in order to configure the physical connection used for SLIP PPP These IP network addresses must be different from the LCS60 s Ethernet internet address Enter the Icsadm interface Add the SLIP service m From Config gt enter protocol or config protocol from Top gt m Add tcpip as required m Add slip Define the SLIP service sessions maxsessions m From the Config directory enter max or enter config maxsessions at the Top directory Issue 3
90. is shown in bold italic typeface Use the atlog command to set display the atmgr log level Use the Manager directory log command to set display the lcm log level Name show Synopsis show service type Description This command gives information about the specified ser vice type Entering show without arguments will display statistics for all services Example An example of the show command is given in the section Typical Administrative Tasks later in this chapter Name types Synopsis types Description The types command lists the available service types Config Directory Commands The Config directory Screen 8 7 provides access to the configuration commands see Chapter 3 as well as a variety of administrative and maintenance com mands 8 16 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Screen 8 7 Config Directory C k Top gt config NOTICE config requires super user permission Password xxxx _ Top gt Config gt l Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are addhost addnet atalkas backup console datetime delhost delnet dftroute dns etherif help initsetup ipas ipx manager maxsessions nodename ports protocol quit service session snmp softwarekey srvports srvsetup subnet top upgrade viewhosts viewnets 5 e Pi Note The Config directory requires the root password If you have previously supplied the root password the system will not ask for it In addition to the commands de
91. m197_c0d0s2 25000 bfs usr m197_c0d0s3 360000 ufs 4K var m197_c0d0s4 120000 ufs 4K home m197_c0d0s5 100000 ufs 4K tftpboot m197_c0d0s6 22000 s5 2K 1 Proceed with installation using configuration shown 2 Change file system type and return to this screen 3 Change disk formatting and return to this screen 4 Change slice size and return to this screen a Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 3 Pas Final Verification of 1 disk installation BOOT COMMAND bo 0 0 Ko Device Disk description Format Space Left Cc m197_c0d0 see note below Yes 29520 D Partition Slice Size FS Block Size Q m197_c0d0s0 58000 ufs 4K lt swap m197_c0d0s1 300000 3 stand m197_c0d0s2 25000 bfs e asr m197_c0d0s3 360000 ufs 4K var m197_c0d0s4 120000 ufs 4K home m197_c0d0s5 100000 ufs 4K tftpboot m197_c0d0s6 22000 s5 2K 1 Proceed with installation using configuration shown 2 Change file system type and return to this screen 3 Change disk formatting and return to this screen 4 Change slice size and return to this screen Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 1 Pa Note The Disk Description field above varies depending on the type of drive 525MB SCSI FUJITSU M2624 or SEAGATE ST5660N 13 For both the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives The system will ask if you want to install Motif NCD and X11 package features Choose the defaults by entering _ Return D 6 Issue 3 UNIX System Software Install
92. may however have a different context in the target environment If the L option is used or the target machine does not support sym bolic links the source machine will follow symbolic links with the following behaviors The symbolic link will be treated as if it were the file type of the file pointed to If the file does not exist or the user does not have permission to access the file no transfer will take place and the source machine will issue a warning If in fol lowing a path that contains a symbolic link that points to a direc tory the source machine finds a directory that has already been transferred it will not transfer it a second time The source machine however will always transfer directories in a path that does not contain a symbolic link even if that directory has already been transferred while following a path that does contain a sym bolic link In both cases the source machine will warn the user for every affected directory The push and pull 1C commands invoke the pupu program opt dk bin pupu on the remote system to handle the remote end of all file transfers If the srvtab A4 file on the remote system invokes the pupu program with the r option file transfers will be restricted to from the home directory tree on the remote system by disallowing all paths that begin with a leading or that contain an embedded specification In this restricted mode only transfers containing PATHSs relative
93. nam ing conventions or practices 5 If runique or sunique is on a unique local or remote destination file name will be created by appending a unique numeric extension to the file name Ftp commands can be aborted using the terminal interrupt key typically the delete key or CTRL C Sending transfers for example put will abort immedi ately Receiving transfers for example get are aborted by sending the FIP proto col command ABOR to the remote server and discarding the remainder of the received data If the remote server does not support the ABOR protocol com mand it will continue to send the remainder of the data and the FTP client will wait until the transfer is completed before displaying the prompt COMMANDS E 10 The following commands are recognized by the ftp command interpreter They may be abbreviated so long as they remain unique Ftp will prompt for required arguments omitted from a command Command arguments that have embedded spaces should be enclosed in double quotation marks account passwd Specify the supplemental password required by the remote system for access to its resources allbinary Toggle the use of binary type for non file transfer operations for example ls Normally these operations are done in ascii mode regardless of the file transfer type If allbinary is on and the file transfer type is binary non file transfer operations will be done in binary mode append local file remote file
94. of software packages that may be used with the LCS60 This Appendix is by no means comprehensive In order to configure your client software for use with the LCS60 for ARAP PPP and or SLIP service you must refer to the documentation provided with that software This Appendix offers examples only Inclusion of various software packages in this Appendix is not an endorsement of any of these products If you encounter difficulty with your client software con figuration contact the manufacturer of the client software Lucent Technologies provides support for the LCS60 side of the configuration only Client Software Configuration To use the LCS60 as a server for ARAP PPP or SLIP service the remote user must have client software loaded on his or her PC or Macintosh that conforms to the ARAP PPP or SLIP protocol specifications These client packages provide scripts that can be tailored by the remote user to guide him or her through dial ing the modem NAC authentication if applicable and dialing the LCS60 for remote access service For information on configuring your client package refer to the documentation for that software To configure your software to use the LCS60 as the server m Set up the connection to ARAP PPP or SLIP to send the following All users Destination refer to the Service Connection Dialstrings section of the appropriate chapter for PPP Chapter 4 SLIP Chapter 5 or ARAP Chapter 6 Issue 3 F
95. opt dk is restored as part of a Server restore Config restores configuration files for the LCS60 The Config restore will fail unless TCP IP has been stopped Caution When performing a Server or COMPLETE restore the restored database will be the database of the last backup This means that any new clients or any client backups since the last database backup will be lost Similarly any clients or client backups deleted since the last backup will reappear After selecting a type of restore but before prompting the user for final authori zation to proceed with the restore the files and directories to be restored are displayed This gives the user an opportunity to verify that the correct type of restore has been selected To List the Contents of a Tape To display the contents of a backup tape select option 1 from Screen 8 10 and insert a backup tape into the tape drive when instructed to do so Because this function does not copy any files from the tape to the disk it will work with backup tapes that have not been created for the same machine Centralized Backup Restore Remote Mode Access the centralized backup and restore operations by selecting option 2 from the LCS60 Backup and Restore Configuration menu Screen 8 8 8 30 Issue 3 Backup and Restore Operations The centralized backup restore feature allows m An LCS60 configured as a server to copy to its hard disk variable confi guration files from multiple remote
96. remote executor d Used to get tracing and diagnostic output v Local environment variables may be passed from the calling host to the desti nation host by listing them in the local environment variable DKEXPORT such as DKEXPORT TERM LINES COLUMNS When using this option the destination should be appended by rl and vt flags such as dkcu v destination rl vt and the user should be authorized see authorize 1M on the destination host x Requests that XON XOFF output flow control be done locally otherwise XON XOFF characters are passed through to the destination After making the connection dkcu runs as two processes the transmit process reads data from standard input and except for lines beginning with passes it to the remote system The receive process accepts data from the remote system and except for lines beginning with passes it to standard output Lines beginning with have special meanings The transmit process interprets the following Terminate the conversation If the program on the remote host isn t reading input typing the QUIT character twice rapidly will break the connection K Escape to an interactive shell on the local system Icmd Run cmd on the local system via sh c cmd Run cmd locally and send its output as standard input to the remote system for execution take from to Copy file from on the remote system to file to
97. server table entry speci fies the initial fixed arguments for the invoked program The colon separated arguments from the server table will be passed to the invoked program starting as the zero argument If the flag is present in the server table entry additional arguments obtained from the incoming remote execution channel will follow the initial arguments when the program is invoked Initial arguments may consist of or be embedded with one or more tokens sometimes referred to as special codes that may be used to substitute information from the dialstring Each token is a two character string consisting of a percent sign followed by a single alphabetic character Invalid tokens are silently removed and are not expanded Table A 3 summarizes the values and descriptions of the allowed substitution tokens Since some older versions of the Datakit II VCS common controller do not support certain features the substitution string may turn out to be null Table A 3 Program Arguments Specification Specification Description b The baud rate of the calling terminal This token is not expanded if the incoming call did not originate from a port providing baud rate information For example hosts currently do not provide this c Originating channel number of the call being serviced d The dialed server name for example host This does not include the period or anything after it e The service field of
98. size for file transfers Wait for Enter the time in minutes in which the connection attempt will input be dropped if no input is received The default is a two minute timeout wait Subnetwork Configuration subnet address Subnetwork addresses are specified in Interface dotted notation For example 154 12 26 is a subnetwork of Class B network address 154 12 host If you know a host on the subnetwork you can enter h The host address entered in the next prompt will be used to calculate the subnet address host address The address of the host on this subnet The subnet address will be calculated from this host address Si ts110 9 Issue 3 G 7 Glossary interface Specify the internet address for the network named in the previ address ous prompt mask bits The subnetwork mask identifies the subnetwork field of a net work address The length of the subnetwork field is chosen by specifying the number of subnetwork bits that will be used to formulate the network mask for a subnetted network Enter only the number of bits in the host portion of the IP address The default number is set to zero The number of bits specified represents contiguous bits network Specify the name of the network up to 31 characters to which name this subnetwork is connected e g dock net Network names may contain letters numbers dashes and underscores subnetwork Identifies the subnetwork Subnetwork names cannot be more name than 31 c
99. size of each packet can shrink up to 34 bytes thereby giving your PPP session a significant performance boost sounjee4 AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol ARAP ARAP is used to obtain direct access to AppleTalk resources at remote locations The LCS60 uses ARAP to provide connection between the CommKit Host Inter face and Ethernet connected AppleTalk devices A remote user can dial into the LCS60 through the data switch request ARAP service and receive the AppleTalk network and node number automatically The remote user can access AppleShare and remote printer spooling services in various zones in the network Refer to Chapter 6 for configuration of the LCS60 for ARAP service Multiple IP Subnetworks IP Routing The LCS60 acts as an IP router with multiple IP network interfaces Figure 1 4 shows an example of how an LCS60 might be configured defining four virtual IP subnetworks Each interface has a unique IP subnetwork number that represents a LAN segment These numbers are allocated by the Network Administrator during configuration of the LCS60 Issue 3 1 13 wn o 0D LL Multiple IP Subnetworks Figure 1 4 IP Routing with the LCS60 LAN Segment Security Group Techs virtual LAN Segment 1564 12 25 Security Group Library virtual ee a eee 154 12 24 aa te lucent Data Switch N Ethernet LAN tcseo me O ka Network _ morse e0 i morse yk J physical SEAS A
100. that references a program that ends in the string sh and the basename of that program does not begin with the letter r restricted shells like bin rsh T Traps the call rejecting it with a NAK code obtained from the first argument of the program arguments field The remainder of the program argument field will be pro cessed for special code expansion and will then be logged to the server log file U Creates a USER_ PROCESS type utmp entry for the invoked program This style of accounting makes an entry in the system utmpx file that is displayed when using the default options of the who command It also makes an entry in the system wtmpx file that may be displayed using the command last If a flag is present the flags that follow it act as the default flag settings and the user supplied protocol field portion of the dialstring if any replaces the part after the This flag is invalid if the user supplied protocol field contains illegal flags or if it con tains an I L R T or U flag The flags for remote execution channels are often specified as vaex to indicate that the default is to honor arguments environment variables and to return an exit code User Field The user field user ID mapping of a server table entry determines the way in which the calling user ID is treated The user ID in the call request may be passed to the program unchanged translated mapped into a new user ID restricted to a
101. the end of the conduit nearest the curved sections m Freeing ducts or conduits of foreign obstructions before cable installation m Using approved polyvinylchloride PVC lubricants Approved lubricants are e Polywater A amp C Lubricant e Hydralube Blue Lubricant e Neutral soft soap e Talcum powder Installing the CPM HS Module and Optical Fiber Cable 1 Slide the I O distribution board paddleboard into one of the available backplane slots from the rear of the data switch cabinet 2 Connect the paddleboard to the chassis 3 Slide the CPM HS module into the same number slot as the paddleboard from the front of the data switch cabinet 4 Connect the optical fiber cable as follows Note The length of the optical fiber cable between the data switch and the LCS60 should not exceed 2 9 km m Remove the rubber caps from the optical fiber cable that runs from the transmitter side of the LCS60 and connect the optical fiber cable to the receiver side top connector of the CPM HS module in the data switch 2 20 Issue 3 m Remove the rubber caps from the optical fiber cable that runs from the receiver side of the LCS60 and connect the optical fiber cable to the transmitter side bottom connector of the CPM HS module in the data switch 5 Set the MODE toggle switch on the CPM HS faceplate to ENABLE 6 Set the Loopback switch on the CPM HS paddleboard to NORM Note If the cable is installed backwards no harm will be
102. the following files and directories etc TIMEZONE etc group etc passwd etc shadow a Issue 3 8 37 Backup and Restore Operations gt a 3 F D o w e Cc Q ca 5 LE O lt Backup and Restore Operations Creating a Tape If it is necessary to restore a client but it is impossible or inadvisable to do so remotely a server can copy a client s backup from disk to tape by selecting option 3 from Screen 8 11 rather than transmit the backup over the data switch network from its disk to the disk of its client This option displays the menu shown in Screen 8 16 Select option 1 to copy the backup Screen 8 16 Tape Backup Management Menu Server TAPE BACKUP MANAGEMENT MENU SERVER 1 Copy a clients remote backup to tape Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK gt 1 Tapes created in this way are indistinguishable from tapes created locally by a client using the copy all option 3 on Screen 8 9 Clients may therefore be restored by physically transporting a tape created from the Tape Backup Management Menu Server from the site of the server to the site of the client inserting the tape into the client s tape drive and then restoring the client by invoking the command selective copy option 2 from Screen 8 10 on the client Network Access Password Option The system administrator can require a password for
103. the section Reload System Software in Chapter 9 These tapes cannot be used to recover vari able files however because variable files are changed during system administra tion and configuration To define the networking parameters networks interfaces etc that are unique to each LCS60 the superuser invokes the LCS60 s administrative commands and functions to tailor the LCS60 to its networking environment The definitions which can be extremely complex are recorded in the LCS60 s variable files and so are not the same on every LCS60 8 26 Issue 3 Backup and Restore Operations Local and Remote Modes The LCS60 allows the backup and restore of variable files in either local or remote mode The local mode uses the LCS60 s tape drive to copy variable confi guration files from the hard disk to a removable tape and to restore configura tion files to the hard disk from a tape The LCS60 also provides a centralized backup restore capability Using this facility a single LCS60 configured as a backup restore server can copy back up to its hard disk the variable configuration files of multiple remote LCS60s and LCS50Es that are configured as backup restore clients The backup is done disk to disk over the data switch network The files that are copied to a server are the same as the files that would otherwise be copied to the local tape drive Backup Restore Tape Local Mode To Back Up to Tape The local backup
104. the telnet command When the option is set the user is prompted for a Network Access Password before the DESTINATION prompt appears The password is set by using the useradd com mand at the root prompt followed by the passwd command as shown below 8 38 Issue 3 Network Access Password Option useradd u444 nap passwd nap New password password Re enter new password password Note The password will not echo on the screen The Network Access Password user ID parameters e g group uid etc can be modified with the usermod command An example of the telnet command with the password option set is shown in Screen 8 17 Screen 8 17 TCP to Async Gateway with Network Access Password gt telnet 154 12 21 5 Trying 154 12 2165 2 4 Connected to 154 12 21 5 Character mode is enabled Escape character is gt a 3 D Q w e Notice from LCS60 morse The following editing characters are valid during input at prompts An ASCII backspace erases the last character typed An ASCII deletes the entire input line Network Access Password enter password Notice from LCS60 morse The following editing characters are valid during input at prompts An ASCII backspace erases the last character typed An ASCII deletes the entire input line morse LCS60 DESTINATION mlkway earth watson login Ra A Note The Networ
105. this option edit the etc opt dk srvtab telnet file for tenet and or the etc opt dk srvtab tcpsock file for tcpsock by adding the eoff option An example of editing the telnet file is shown below System Service Flag User Program Initial Parms telnet R root usr etc lcs ftslisten ftslisten v6 Stelnet I1 g f m c u u p eoff User Information The gateway services include m Asynchronous to TCP m TCP to Asynchronous m UUCP and are accessed by the telnet and or socket service 7 10 Issue 3 User Information Async to TCP Gateway Service A user on a terminal connected to the data switch network directly or through a modem can use the LCS60 connectivity to reach LAN connected hosts or works tations The preferred method is to enter lt cs60_call_address gt telnet at the DESTINA TION prompt This gives the telnet prompt to which the user supplies the host or workstation with the open command for telnet The next login prompt is from the host workstation on the LAN An example is shown in the screen below Aemaye y DESTINATION earth brown telnet telnet gt open 154 12 26 1 Login For each destination that an async to TCP gateway service user may wish to reach 1 The LCS60 must be configured to use a DNS server or 2 The name of that destination must be properly entered into the LCS60 s configuration database e g through the addhost command or 3 The user must reque
106. trip time for every packet sent The delay between packets in seconds can be changed by specifying the argument to the d option on the com mand line Since a packet for which no reply has been received by the time the next packet is sent is declared lost it may be necessary to use d to increase the inter packet delay to communicate with hosts over slow networks such as dial up connections over the virtual network By default atping continues to send packets until it is killed If count is specified on the command line atping will send the specified number of Echo Requests and then exit Summary round trip time and packet loss statistics are displayed just before atping exits Issue 3 ATPING ATPING 1M DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is zero for normal terminations a positive number for error termina tions FILES usr etc atping usr etc atlog usr etc atnetstat SEE ALSO Inside AppleTalk Second Edition Chapter 6 Issue 3 E 5 DKCU 1C DKCU NAME dkcu call another host SYNOPSIS dkcu s d v x destination DESCRIPTION dkcu dials another UNIX System a terminal or possibly a non UNIX System It manages an interactive conversation with possible transfers of ASCI files It places a call to the destination host or terminal on the data switch network Several options are supported by dkcu s Suppresses the Circuit Open and other non error messages f Forces a dkcu even if the user came in as a
107. user pull preserves the name type and contents of the files it moves with the following exceptions Long Names If the target file system does not support file names greater than 14 characters and the source machine transfers a file with a name greater then 14 characters the name will be truncated to 14 charac ters The local side will warn the user for each file name that is truncated Symbolic Links Files of type symbolic link will be preserved unless the L option is used A transferred symbolic link will be identical to the source file It may however have a different context in the target environment If the L option is used the source machine will be asked to follow symbolic links with the following behaviors the symbolic link will be treated as if it were the file type of the file pointed to If the file does not exist or the user does not have per mission to access the file no transfer will take place and the source machine will issue a warning If in following a path that contains a symbolic link that points to a directory the source machine finds a directory that has already been transferred it will not transfer it a second time The source however will always transfer directories in a path that does not contain a symbolic link even if that directory has already been transferred while following a path that does con tain a symbolic link In both cases the source machine will warn the user for every affected direct
108. user tried to alter an interface confi guration NOTES Trailers are not supported SEE ALSO netstat 1 inetinit cf 4 E 20 Issue 3 IFSTAT IFSTAT 1M NAME ifstat displays interface statistics SYNOPSIS ifstat adfstz 1 interval config file cntrlr num DESCRIPTION Issue 3 ifstat provides a common configurable platform for the display of driver specific interface statistics gathered by the supported drivers ifstat displays statistics to stdout in the format dictated by the configuration file config file see ifstat conf 4 The user may specify config file on the command line or let ifstat choose the confi guration file ifstat chooses a configuration file by requesting a list of supported interfaces from ip ifstat picks the first interface for which a configuration file exists in the directory etc ifstat conf The caller may specify config file as an abso lute path or a relative path If the path is relative does not start with a ifstat looks for config file relative to etc ifstat conf If not found ifstat next looks for con fig file relative to the current working directory ifstat fails if it cannot find a valid configuration file If config file is specified the caller may also issue a controller number cntrlr num on the command line The controller number defaults to 0 if unspecified The controller number is either appended to the special device file name found in con fig file or
109. using an 8 bit character set such as the Asian or European character set If this option is not used parity bits are stripped from the data Logging out of the shell on the remote host will terminate the telnet connection returning you to the local shell if the connection was opened from the telnet com mand line or to the telnet gt prompt if the connection was opened from command mode This can also be accomplished with the close command The quit com mand will terminate both the open connection and the telnet session always returning you to the local shell COMMANDS Issue 3 The following commands are recognized by the telnet command interpreter They may be abbreviated so long as they remain unique The normal terminal editing conventions are available in command mode close Close an open telnet connection returning to the telnet gt prompt command mode or to the local shell input mode crmod Toggle carriage return mode When disabled default no translation of carriage return characters takes place When enabled a carriage return received from the remote host will be mapped into a carriage return and a line feed This mode does not affect characters typed by the user only those received This mode is required by hosts that prefer the user to do local echoing E 43 TELNET 1 TELNET E 44 eight Toggle eight bit mode When disabled default the high order bit is stripped on each byte to ensure transmission of val
110. with the LCS60 through the client software package residing on the PC or Mac A remote user can dial into the LCS60 through the data switch request PPP service and receive an IP address IPX address and or AppleTalk network and node number automatically For TCP IP the IP address can be statically assigned if needed as it can be with SLIP and gives the remote user access to the TCP IP network via commands such as ftp telnet and ping For AppleTalk a virtual AppleTalk address is assigned enabling the remote user to access AppleShare and remote printer spooling services in various zones in the network For IPX a virtual IPX address is assigned The remote user is viewed as a Novell NetWare client and can therefore access file servers printer servers etc ina Novell network Refer to Chapter 4 for configuration of the LCS60 for PPP service Van Jacobson TCP IP Header Compression Negotiation of the TCP IP header compression option is defined in RFC1332 If your client package supports Van Jacobson Header Compression then configure this feature on your Mac or PC The size of each packet can shrink up to 35 bytes thereby giving your PPP session a significant performance boost 1 12 Issue 3 Remote Access Protocols Compressed IPX Header CIPX Negotiation of the IPX header compression option is defined in RFC1553 If your client package supports Compressed IPX Headers CIPX then configure this feature on your PC The
111. 0 for Ethernet is compatible with the StarKeeper IT NMS Releases 3 0 through 8 0 on the HP 720 730 platform and Release 3 0 and 4 2 on the 6386 plat form Note To verify the version of StarKeeper II NMS that you are running log on to the StarKeeper II NMS as cnmsadm To verify the version the output of help version should contain the following line StarKeeper R II NMS RX Y where X Y is the Release number Before the network administrator can use StarKeeper II NMS configuration com mands to configure the StarKeeper II NMS s database to allow it to monitor indi vidual LCS60s a software package must be installed on the StarKeeper IT NMS from a tape or floppy diskette After installing the software package and configuring the database all standard StarKeeper II NMS alarm features will be available for LCS60 alarms This includes all StarKeeper II NMS commands and utilities that access the alarm database and all dynamic and graphic displays of alarms The procedures for installing the software package and then configuring the database depend on the specific release of the StarKeeper II NMS Follow the appropriate procedures that follow Note If you are upgrading an LCS50 to an LCS60 you must first delete the LCS50 NIK entry on the StarKeeper II NMS and re enter the database record for the LCS60 Diskette or Tape Installation To install the software package 1 Log on to the StarKeeper II NMS console as cnmsadm 2 Stop the St
112. 1 G n oO 3 eo 3 fed Client Software Configuration Users with a NAC security server Destination as described above for All Users NAC User ID NAC Password m Enter any options directed by your package refer to the documentation for the package you are using m Specify parameters e g host name domain name etc as required Client Packages A variety of ARAP PPP and SLIP software packages are available Some exam ples are shown in this section This section is not comprehensive software pack ages that are not listed may also be used Mac Connection CCL Script You can use a Connection Control Language CCL script similar to the one shown in Screen F 1 in order to establish a PPP or ARAP connection After creat ing or editing the CCL Script refer to section PPP Service Examples or ARAP Ser vice Example Note The CCL documentation will indicate the supported baud rates Note Screen F 1 shows a CCL script for PPP Screen F 1 may be used for ARAP by substituting arap for ppp in the lines which include the string nj exch system ppp Cc Ao 5 90 E Z O 4 lt lt fod 72 mD F 2 Issue 3 Client Software Configuration Screen F 1 CCL Script Example C k ORIGINATE ANSWER 1 xxxxx note Communicating at 38400 bps 2 CommunicatingAt 38400 serreset 38400 3 8 1 note Dialing 1 3 write ATDT 1
113. 1 4 1 Installation Warning a E E gt CAUTION A new installation of the UNIX system will destroy RO all files currently on disks used for the installation Ze D If you have not made a backup and want to do so enter n o tna RR Oe els E L N se as Mier TEA DORADA x Q x lt The following packages are available for installation Those currently selected for installation are marked by C2sec ed mvme337 sds Motif els mvme 338 siff NCD enet1x7 mvme376 spell X11 envmon mvme37x sys Xllcontrb face mvme385 sysadm acct fsd nfs tarlist bnu gold nis tbx cdfs inet nsu terminf cds ipe ocscomp ufs compat Lae perf usrenv dfm man rfs xcp xGES mvme332xt rpe 1 Proceed to install packages as shown 2 View package descriptions and or change selection Enter option number of choice 1 2 1 Return Installation Disk Configuration 1 Automatic 1 disk installation Ni Issue 3 D 5 UNIX System Software Installation in 5 2 All automatic disk configuration options 3 Manual disk configuration 4 Read the disk configuration from the disk s Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 Return Final Verification of 1 disk installation BOOT COMMAND bo 0 0 Device Disk description Format Space Left m197_c0d0 see note below No 29520 Partition Slice Size FS Block Size m197_c0d0s0 58000 ufs 4K swap m197_c0d0s1 300000 5 stand
114. 10 1 Name morse Broadcast Supp none Ns P Issue 3 4 19 Administration a PEER Addr 2010 114 Class Zone Research Lab Imp ID Router 2010 1 Name Top gt Session gt show ppp 1 1 ip LCS60 Point to Point Session IP Configuration Peer Peer Peer Max Comp Sesid State Addr Slot Slot Loh opened Taas 1223 9 1 5 1 Aa Top gt Session gt W Feb 05 lt lt AT Comp none Route Proto none Broadcast Supp none 07 56 24 Local Local Local Addr 4 12 23 1 Max Comp Slot Slot Call Trace Example The following screen shows how to obtain call trace information for PPP 7 Top gt Session gt trace ppp LCS60 Point to Point Tracking Information Feb Sesid Name Remote User Chan Switch Address 14 3 p499 smccoy 499 yard gazebo 39 4 1 6 p496 hartnell 496 yard gazebo 39 7 1 8 p493 troughtn 493 yard gazebo 39 9 ig p492 jpertwee 492 yard gazebo 39 10 1 10 p491 tbaker 491 yard gazebo 39 11 1 11 p490 pdavison 490 yard gazebo 39 12 1 12 p489 cbaker 489 yard gazebo 39 13 Top gt Session gt gt 1 07 45 13 3 4 20 Issue 3 Log File Administration The log file ppp log is written to by the LCS60 PPP server and contains informa tion about incoming PPP call requests To display the contents of the log file use the page command as shown in the example below a Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Wed Wed Wed Wed Wed
115. 2 server 8 44 server log file 8 45 SLIP session C 10 Errors 5 14 Etc hosts 8 26 Etherif 4 11 5 7 Ethernet interface configuration parameters G 4 configure 4 11 5 7 Example ARAP service F 22 atalkas 6 3 autobaud 8 24 call trace 6 6 CCL script F 2 default route 8 23 define a client 8 34 dftroute 8 23 initsetup 3 6 IPX F 9 LCS60 dialup scr F 9 log level 8 23 network 3 1 PC TCP F 12 PPP service F 6 service ports 7 18 show 6 6 show ppp 8 9 show Server 8 23 show service 6 5 show session 4 18 8 22 SLIP service F 19 stop SLIP 5 13 TCP to async service 7 12 trace 4 20 6 6 trace tcp 7 19 uucp NCR 7 17 uucp SunOS 7 16 Index F Fail G 16 G 18 FCC regulations 2 5 Features 1 6 Fiber access 8 2 Fiber cable connection 2 4 2 19 to 2 20 routing 2 19 Fiber connection error messages 9 25 Fiber interface 1 18 2 19 diagnostics 9 26 Files 8 26 damage 8 25 generic 8 26 transfer 1 10 variable 8 26 Firmware update processor board 9 19 First time authentication 1 18 Flags field A 4 Flush 8 11 8 13 Foreign address G 14 frame type G 1 Ftp E 9 G Gateway async to TCP 7 11 references 1 3 Gateway service sessions define 7 3 Gateway services administration 7 18 configuration 7 1 configuring 3 10 dialstrings 7 8 error messages 7 19 log files 7 20 user information 7 10 Generic files 8 26 Glossary G 1 Grounding 2 25 H Ha
116. 3 srvtab Server Table System Field Service Field Flags Field User Field Program Field Initial Parms Field Server Table Scanning Rules m Modifications to the Server Table m Server Table Validation and Matching A 1 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 7 A 8 A 9 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 srvtab The granting and denial of access privileges by the CommKit Host Interface on a called LCS60 is controlled entirely by the server table on the called LCS60 An incorrect or incomplete server table can cause serious security problems by allowing unauthorized access to system files and resources This section describes the facilities available through the etc opt dk srvtab server table and provides the user with several suggestions to make the network connections more secure A high degree of security is ensured by editing server table files Caution The sample etc opt dk srvtab files distributed with the CommKit Software are not intended to be used as provided and do not pro vide the customer with a high degree of security as the default The customer must customize the example server table files to achieve the desired level of security Server Table The directory etc opt dk srvtab and associated files referred to as the server table are used to validate incoming call requests and map them into processes on the called host The server table can be tailored to restrict the types of calls permit ted All incoming call
117. 3 C 5 id Q O i dp O U Outgoing Call Error Messages C 6 Insufficient CIR at module The call could not be completed because the module receiving the call does not have sufficient resources to support the requested committed information rate CIR Invalid or missing phone number The user has neglected to type the phone number required to make a phone call as in dkcu dialer_name phone_number The phone_number is synonymous with the dialstring Mismatched GOS endpoints The call can not be completed because the originating and receiving end points of a call have the grade of service GOS configured differently Network congestion Call forward error Try again later The call cannot be completed due to a lack of resources needed by a trunk in the call path Try again Network congestion Call initiation failure Try again The call cannot be completed because a message usually sent between processes during call setup was not sent Wait a short time then call again Network congestion Call timeout Try again The call cannot be completed No response was received and the call attempt timed out Try again Network congestion Channel allocation error Try again later The call cannot be completed because there is no free channel in the data switch control computer database Wait a short time before trying to call again Network congestion Connection error Try again later The
118. 4 00 Device LUN 00 40 Controller LUN 00 Device LUN 40 Define memory blocks to be dumped File Number 1 5 E Starting Address 00000000 Return Ending Address 02000000 Return Define another memory block Y N n The following memory blocks have been defined File 1 Start 00000000 End 02000000 Insert tape Do you want to continue N Y z D 5 3 o gt 5 D O 4 Pi 8 Puta write enabled tape in the tape drive The tape may be formatted or blank this procedure will write over any existing information on the tape Enter y to dump the memory to tape 9 The system will respond as shown Issue 3 9 31 Memory Dump Rewind command executing Erase tape Y N n Retension tape Y N n Writing file 0 Writing file 1 Done with tape you may remove it followed by the Service Menu Screen 9 8 10 Reboot the LCS60 using the Reset button on the LCS60 After the Dump is Completed After dumping the memory and rebooting the LCS60 follow the procedures below to capture the information needed to understand the dump m Login as root m Putin another tape not the tape the dump is on in the tape drive m At the root prompt in the directory enter cd stand echo unix cpio oBc gt dev rmt ctape1 m At the root prompt remove the tape from tape drive 1 Cc Cc oD pr fam a 9 32 Issue 3 Originating Group Security Issue
119. 4 Define clients 8 34 example 8 34 Define servers 8 33 Define service sessions configuration parameters G 5 Delete hosts 3 28 networks 3 28 Department of Defense 1 6 DESTINATION return to 7 10 Destination address G 15 Dftroute 3 24 example 8 23 Diag cpm 9 27 Diagnostics fiber interface 2 28 MVME197 9 23 processor 9 23 VMEDKHS 9 25 Dialstring options telnet 7 8 Dialstrings ARAP 6 5 gateway services 7 8 PPP 4 13 SLIP 5 9 to 5 10 dialup scr example F 9 Directory G 17 service port 7 3 Directory service G 1 Directory structure lcsadm interface 8 4 Disable 8 10 8 12 Display host information 3 28 network information 3 28 Dkcu 8 3 9 28 to 9 29 E 6 Dkdaemon 8 41 Dkdiag 9 26 Issue 2 Dkmaint E 8 Dksrvlog 8 44 to 8 45 Dkuidtab 8 45 DNS 3 25 G 1 DNS configuration file 3 25 example 3 25 DNS Configuration menu 3 25 DNS resolver 1 6 configuration parameters G 5 DNS service 3 25 Do A 3 Documentation reference 1 2 Domain G 5 Domain name server see DNS Dynamic addressing 4 17 5 12 E Echo request 4 14 EMI considerations 2 5 Enable 8 10 8 12 2WAY G 6 SID G 6 Enable 8 bit character mode G 7 Env 9 21 Env command responses 9 19 Error messages 8 41 cable C 1 call 8 44 console 8 42 fiber connection 9 25 fiber interface 8 42 gateway services 7 19 hardware 8 42 incoming C 9 log files 8 47 outgoing call C 1 Issue
120. 60 Application Software Installation To install the LCS60 Application 1 Be sure the var file system has enough space approximately 60 000 blocks required then 2 Insert the LCS60 Application tape tape 3 of 3 in the tape drive and con duct the dialogue as root from the Console login shown in Screen 9 4 Note Package installation will be aborted if the inet package has not been removed use pkginfo l inet to check for the package or if a version of the LCS60 package is already installed use pkginfo 1 1cs60 and pkginfo 1 lcs60p to check for the LCS60 package and patch respectively Error information for inet was not found indicates that the inet package has already been removed Note In the pkgadd d dev rmt ctape1 command the last character is a one not the letter L similarly in pkginfo 1 the character is a one Screen 9 4 LCS60 Application Software Installation a N pkgadd d dev rmt ctapel Insert a cartridge tape into Cartridge Tape Drive Type go when ready or q to quit go Installation in progress The following packages are available 1 l1cs60 LCS60 Network Interface m88k R3 0 Bldxx z D 5 o9 5 D O 4 Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default all q Return Issue 3 9 9 Reload System Software Screen 9 4 continued a 5 Processing package instance lt lcs60 gt from
121. 60 system console use the following format dkcu lt lcs60name gt where lt lcs60name gt is the name of the LCS60 itself As an example refer to the network in Figure 9 2 In this example to verify the connection between the LCS60 morse and the data switch connection B enter dkcu mlkway earth morse You should get a login prompt from morse LCS60 to Local Ethernet Host Verification ping Use the ping command to verify the connectivity between a LCS60 and an Ether net host on the LAN attached to the LCS60 Log onto the LCS60 system console as user root Enter the following command ust etc ping lt Ethernethostname gt where the lt Ethernethostname gt is the internet IP address or host name of a speci fied host on the same LAN as the LCS60 As an example refer to the network in Figure 9 2 In this example to verify the connection between morse and topper connection C enter usr etc ping topper z D 5 o9 5 D O 4D Proper communication is verified by continuous messages displayed on the screen Issue 3 9 29 Memory Dump If the LCS60 hangs and a memory dump is required do the following 1 Log the console session on a PC if possible Information must be recorded to evaluate the dump and logging the session is therefore required 2 Display the debugger prompt by pressing the 197 board Abort button Refer to Figure 9 1 Caution Do not use the Reset button thi
122. A 154 12 21 Ss Commkit Host Interface LAN Segment Security Group morse Note The numbers shown are IP network numbers virtual The LCS60 reserves host address 1 for 135 12 23 each virtual LAN segment e g 154 12 24 1 LAN Segment Security Group Eng virtual 154 12 26 The LCS60 has a physical IP network number for its Ethernet interface e g 154 12 21 and can have a virtual IP network number for each defined security group e g Library morse Techs Eng up to a maximum of four such groups as shown in Figure 1 4 Note The Ethernet IP network number and the four virtual IP network numbers must be unique The LCS60 examines the destination address of every IP packet it receives over the Ethernet and CommKit Host interfaces and sends the packet on to the LAN segment it matches For this reason all network numbers must be unique For example for an IP packet with a destination address 154 12 24 50 the LCS60 morse would route the packet through LAN segment Library as shown in Figure 1 4 Issue 3 Multiple IP Subnetworks Security Groups The LCS60 provides a mechanism for allocating IP addresses from one or more pools of addresses Each address pool is associated with a unique IP network security group and is used to limit user access to the LAN This feature allows the LCS60 administrator to define up to four IP networks that an LCS60 user can select when dialing in for either SLIP service or IP over PPP s
123. ATEWAY SERVICE CONFIGURATION MENU Display Change the LCS60 call address prompt Add a service port Delete a service port Change modify a service port Op wWNEH Display service ports Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 2 Enter service port number Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 2511 Enter service type telnet socket or directory for port 2511 Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt directory Pi Screen 7 1 continued on next page Issue 3 7 5 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service Aemaye y LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service Screen 7 1 Continued a KKK NOTICE KKK Entering port lt 2511 gt to provide lt directory gt service Enter this service port Enter y n gt y Port lt 2511 gt has been added Press RETURN to continue gt Return TCP TO ASYNCHRONOUS GATEWAY SERVICE CONFIGURATION MENU Display Change the LCS60 call address prompt Add a service port Delete a service port Change modify a service port Display service ports Ow wWwner Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 2 Enter service port number Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1111 Enter service type telnet Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt socket socket or directory for port 1111 Enter Pre Defined call address or dash for no call address Type q to QUIT for HEL
124. Append local file to a file on the remote host If remote file is not specified the remote file will be named local file File transfer uses the current set tings for type format mode and structure Issue 3 FTP Issue 3 FTP 1 ascii Set the data representation type to ascii This is the default type bell Toggle a bell that sounds after each file transfer command is completed By default the bell is turned off binary Set the data representation type to binary bye Terminate the FTP session with the remote server and exit the ftp program case Toggle case mapping of remote file names during an mget command When case mapping is enabled uppercase letters in the remote file name are changed to lowercase letters in the local file name By default case mapping is turned off cd remote directory Change the working directory on the remote host to remote directory cdup Change the working directory on the remote host to the parent of the current working directory chmod mode remote file Change the permission mode on the remote file or directory to mode per the chmod 1 command close Terminate the FIP session with the remote server and return to the com mand interpreter cr Toggle carriage return stripping during ASCII file retrieval When enabled the carriage return is stripped from each carriage return linefeed record delimiter sequence encountered in the file leaving the linefeed record delimiter sequence reco
125. AppleTalk Top gt Session gt show ppp link ip ipx atalk Note Many of the report fields refer to features that are configured on the PPP host with the particular PPP package you are using Refer to the docu mentation for your particular PPP package for details Sesid Session ID number State The state of the session opened closed init starting etc Max Config The number of times the LCS60 will try to configure a connec tion before quitting Max Term The number of times the LCS60 will try to terminate the link to the PPP host gracefully before dropping the connection Timeout Secs The number of seconds the LCS60 will wait for a response to a configure or terminate request from the peer before timing out S Side of the PPP link p peer or 1 local MRU Maximum receive unit refer to the documentation for the PPP package you are using Aessojg Issue 3 G 11 gt 2 40 99 ip 2 Glossary ACCM Magic Proto Comp Addr Comp Peer Addr Peer Max Slot Peer Comp Slot Local Addr Local Max Slot Local Comp Slot Addr atalk Zone atalk Router atalk Server Info atalk Note Asynchronous control character mapping refer to the documen tation for the PPP package you are using The option that detects if there is a loopback situation in the con nection refer to the documentation for the PPP package you are using Protocol compression refer to the d
126. AppleTalk information Icm log Manager software IcsstatD log StarKeeper II NMS information ppp log PPP sessions slip log SLIP sessions slipdiallog SLIP calls tcpasy log TCP to Async sessions tcplisten log TCP to Async service 1 The tcpasy log file is located in the directory usr adm lcs tcpasy The asytcp log file is located in the directory usr adm cs asytcp Issue 3 8 47 gt a 3 l D Q w e 5 Error Messages Cc 2 oO 5 Li amp ze lt 8 48 Issue 3 Maintenance Issue 3 Reload System Software 9 1 UNIX System Software Installation 9 1 UFS Utility Fixes Tape Installation 9 7 inet Package Removal 9 8 LCS60 Application Software Installation 9 9 Removing the LCS60 Application Software 9 13 Upgrade 9 15 Remote Upgrade 9 16 Installing an Upgrade on a Remote Upgrade Client 9 16 Processor Board Firmware Update 9 19 Processor Diagnostics MVME197 9 23 Table of Contents VMEDKHS Diagnostics 9 25 Connection Verification 9 28 m LCS60 to Data Switch Connected Host Verification dkcu 9 28 m LCS60 to Data Switch Verification Loopback Test dkcu 9 29 m LCS60 to Local Ethernet Host Verification ping 9 29 Memory Dump 9 30 After the Dump is Completed 9 32 Issue 3 Reload System Software If the system crashes you may need to reload the system software 1 2 3 4 Install the UNIX System software Install
127. BLED Enable DNS y n y Your change will only become effective when you exit i e quit from this menu Warning to administrator To ensure your subsequent TCP IP commands will use DNS YOU SHOULD LOGOFF THEN RE LOGIN AFTER EXITING lcsadm Type RETURN to continue Return DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM DNS CONFIGURATION 1 Display Current Configuration 2 Modify Create DNS Resolver Configuration 3 Enable Disable DNS Enter Menu Selection a a Issue 3 3 25 Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP for help q to quit gt q Top gt Config gt Be sure to specify routed with the protocol command to start DNS service at boot time SNMP Manager snmp Use the snmp command to define the SNMP manager as shown in the example below a 5 Top gt Config gt snmp SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL SNMP CONFIGURATION 1 Display Current Configuration File 2 Modify Create Configuration File Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 2 o 02 o op Enter Network Administrator s Information q gt my name Enter Machine Location q gt my location Enter Community Name d q gt public IP address of SNMP manager for community public q gt 0 0 0 0 Access right for SNMP manager 0 0 0 0 r w q gt r Adding the following information to the configuration file community public 0 0 0 0 re
128. CS60 Administrative Command Interface Enter RETURN key for command list morse Top gt Note Remote access is impossible before the system is configured and the dkhost protocol has been started Icsadm Interface The lcsadm interface uses a hierarchical system of directories and commands as shown in Figure 8 1 The available directories Top Config Session Service Ports Manager and Manager Server and commands are described in the follow ing sections gt a 3 l D QD 0 12 You can obtain access to the lcsadm interface commands with one of the follow ing a N lcsadm Top gt lcsadm directory command Top gt directory gt lcsadm c directory command Se A The first method above takes you to the lcsadm interface s Top directory the second executes the command specified and takes you to the specified Ilcsadm interface directory the third method executes the command specified and returns you to the system prompt Issue 3 8 3 Cc BS 5 O lt Icsadm Interface Figure 8 1 Icsadm Interface Directory Structure start T stop balk M y v Config Session Service Ports Manager addhost ipas kill disable disable log addnet ipx show enable enable show atalkas maxsessions trace flush flush start backup nodename types show show stop c
129. Call System Administrator The call could not be accepted because the dkserver process could not communicate with the host device Either the incoming initialization or buffer size could not be set or the the receiving buffer size could not be returned in the answer You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 135 m Dkserver Call on a busy device or call collision try again The call could not be accepted because the host device is busy or because the incoming call collided with an outgoing call A busy device is one that is being cleaned up from a prior call or a device that is held open by some lingering process L 3 e z 4 n O A Q 4 n You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 136 m Endpoint hung up The endpoint hung up the call This is not an error m Facility not subscribed The facility on the SIM was not subscribed to Hop count exceeded The call could not be completed because the hop count configured for this node was exceeded m Host configuration mismatch Call Network Administrator The call was rejected because the host channel picked for the outgoing call is not configured on the network Contact the data switch Network Administrator Host protocol error The call could not be completed because of an error detected in the host protocol Issue
130. Control 1 0D 0D 9 20 Issue 3 Processor Board Firmware Update Master Enable 2 Y N N N Master Starting Address 2 00000000 0 Master Ending Address 2 00000000 0 Master Control 2 00 0 N 0 0 Master Enable 3 Y N N Master Starting Address 3 00000000 Master Ending Address 3 00000000 Master Control 3 00 00 Master Enable 4 Y N N N Master Starting Address 4 00000000 0 Master Ending Address 4 00000000 0 Master Address Translation Address 4 00000000 0 0 0 Y Master Address Translation Select 4 00000000 Master Control 4 00 Short I O VMEbus A16 Enable Y N Y Short I O VMEbus A16 Control 01 01 F Page VMEbus A24 Enable Y N Y Y F Page VMEbus A24 Control 02 02 ROM Speed Bank A Code 02 02 ROM Speed Bank B Code 02 02 PCC2 Vector Base 05 05 VMEC2 Vector Base 1 06 06 z VMEC2 Vector Base 2 07 07 VMEC2 GCSR Group Base Address D0 DO D VMEC2 GCSR Board Base Address 00 00 x VMEbus Global Time Out Code 01 01 3 Local Bus Time Out Code 01 01 OD VMEbus Access Time Out Code 02 02 Update Non Volatile RAM Y N Y Reset Local System CPU Y N Y 1 These prompts update the parameter values you enter and reboot the machine Issue 3 9 21 Processor Board Firmware Update Screen 9 6 set and env Commands a gt
131. DPOINT NUMBER OR RANGE 0000 9999 none none none CCO gt restore cpm 6 cco0 gt k a Conduct the dialogue as shown in the screen above address Check the data switch cabinet for the slot number of the CPM HS module to which the LCS60 is connected Enter the slot number of the CPM HS module In this example the CPM HS module is in slot 6 2 24 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 comment hardware type connect time number of channels connect time billing Single or multiple group Endpoint restore A description of the entry The fiber interface hardware for the LCS60 always con nects to the CPM HS Specifies if billing information is to be logged Enter 512 This is not used for the LCS60 Enter single Enter the group from the previous operation This is not used for the LCS60 The CPM HS module must be restored to service before it can be used oJeMpJeEH Power and Grounding Connect the AC power cord provided to a three wire grounded 110 VAC recep tacle and the LCS60 rear panel power receptacle as shown in Figure 2 7 Connect DC power as shown in Figure 2 7 Power Up Procedures Follow the steps below for LCS60 power up only after reading this section 1 Connect the LCS60 to the power source For the AC power unit the outlet should be on a dedicated circuit for the LCS60 2 Power up the system console Refer to the section Connecting the System Console If the system console i
132. ENU 1 Add Change a Session Parameter 2 Delete a Session Parameter 3 Display all Session Parameters Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt q NOTICE Session parameter changes have been made effective Ms 2 3 14 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup Note The following prompts ipas will be displayed only if SLIP or PPP is configured a 5 This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to configure the IP address server which is used by lt ppp slip gt for both the static and dynamic xx allocation of IP Addresses Since one or more of these services is currently configured IPAS must be configured CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Configure Display IP Network Security Groups 2 Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group Delete an IP Network Security Group 3 Edit an IP Network Security Group 4 Display all IP Network Security Groups Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 na ep D ie Q z o NOTICE The first IP Network Security Group is required to be named morse Enter an IP Network Security
133. EVEL network area exchange local speedcall local Delete CCO gt level Enter local type Enter mnemonic Issue 3 2 23 Installing the LCS60 address This is the IP network security group name The first address entered must be the the same as the node name that is assigned to the LCS60 when the LCS60 itself is subsequently configured from the LCS60 s system console Up to four security groups may be configured for the LCS60 therefore four corresponding local addresses may be defined PAD This is not used directory entry A 30 character description of the LCS60 in double quotes group Enter the group from the previous operation security pattern The originating group name security feature allows the Datakit II VCS to restrict calls for this host to a select group of Datakit II VCS originating groups Since the srvtab files see Appendix A may also be used to restrict incoming calls Return is used to disable this feature D L service state The local address must be in service for the LCS60 to originate and receive calls Configure the CPM HS Module b CC0 gt enter cpm MODULE ADDRESS 6 COMMENT up to 60 chars double quoted fiber interface to LCS60 HARDWARE TYPE 422 hs hs hs NUMBER OF CHANNELS 2 512 32 512 CONNECT TIME BILLING on off off off SINGLE OR MULTIPLE GROUP S single multiple single single GROUP up to 8 chars morse EN
134. Enter client name Type q to quit or for help gt q Ne P It is essential when entering the call address of a client that the originating group name of the client be identical to the data switch s local address of the client 8 34 Issue 3 Backup and Restore Operations Changing a Server to a Client To reconfigure a server as a client delete all of its clients option 2 on Screen 8 13 An LCS60 configured as a backup restore server will be re configured as a backup restore client as soon as it deletes all of its clients Backup or Restore Functions From a Client To initiate a backup or restore from a client log onto the client select option 2 Screen 8 9 see Table 8 2 for the tasks shown on Screen 8 14 Screen 8 14 Centralized Backup Operations Menu N CENTRALIZED BACKUP OPERATIONS MENU Select a server to back up this machine Select a server delete backups of this machine stored there Select a server list backups of this machine stored there a Select server to restore this machine nter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK gt De g A e UWUNEe gt a 3 l D o w e 3 Table 8 2 Backup Restore Functions Function From Option Screen Backup Client Server Option 1 Screens 8 14 and 15 Restore Client Server Option 4 Screens 8 14 and 15 List this client s backups stored o
135. FTWARE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Display LCS60 Machine ID 2 Enter Software Certificate and Software Key 3 Display Software Certificate and Software Key Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt 2 Ne P In order to complete the software key configuration you must ep D ie z o m Display the LCS60 machine ID as shown above and enter this number on your LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet Software Certificate m Call 1 800 WE2CARE for the software key you will need to supply the information requested on your LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet Software Certificate Note If you do not receive the software key immediately for example if you call the 800 number after hours you may enter a q on the screen above to continue with configuration You can enter the software key using the Icsadm config softwarekey command at any time however you must enter the software key before you can successfully activate the services you configure Refer to Chapter 8 for the softwarekey command Issue 3 Initial Setup m Enter 2 on the screen above and continue with initsetup as shown below Note If a software key already exists on the LCS60 you will receive a message asking if you want to retain it or delete it and enter a new one Ifa software key exists entry of a new one is not necessary unless you are upgrading to a new release that requires a different key
136. G KKKKKKKKKK The CommKit Server for morse is having problems Please get someone to attend to it The last error was May 16 07 49 20 273 O dkmgr Can t open dev dk dial0 KKK KKK KKK If you receive these error messages 1 Check the cabling m The newer CPM HS modules have a red LED on the paddleboard which indicates if the cable has not been installed correctly If this LED is lit check the cable connection If the connection is complete reverse the fiber cable connection on either the LCS60 or the CPM HS whichever is more convenient m If the error message is still displayed check the VMEDKHS board in the LCS60 z D 5 o gt 5 D O 4 Issue 3 9 25 VMEDKHS Diagnostics 2 Check the VMEDKHS board m Log into the system console and enter stop dkhost from the lcsadm interface m Quit the lcsadm interface and enter dkdiag a n5 i0 from the root prompt m Verify that the diagnostic is completed successfully m Ifa failure occurs reboot the system if the error message occurs again check the CPM HS board in the data switch node 3 Check the CPM HS board On the data switch console conduct the dialogue shown in Screen 9 7 Screen 9 7 Example diag cpm for CPM HS Module a k CC0 gt rem cpm 11 cCcC0 gt diag cpm MODULE ADDRESS 11 TEST TYPE command_logic module_reset local_loop remote_loop command_logic 90 08 18 13 46 56 NODE NODENAME M diagnose cpm 11 com
137. INATION jump 59 matchread 400 jump 59 LABEL 22 write nj exch system ppp arap note Sent nj exch system ppp arap a e Be sure you don t have conflicts with existing label numbers Modem The great majority of modems will work correctly right out of the box using the default settings For the few that do require some configuration m Make sure the serial speed setting for MSM TY on the data switch are set correctly Check your modem reference for the correct AT commands m Make sure the MSM TY data switch modem has answer mode set to pick up on a certain number of rings if the number of rings is set to zero it will not pick up Check your modem reference for the correct AT commands PPP Service Examples Windows 95 IPX over PPP Note Windows 95 is equipped with detailed on line help For any problems related to Windows 95 refer to the on line help or contact Microsoft F 6 Issue 3 PPP Service Examples PC Configuration Before you can make a PPP connection using IPX with Windows 95 you must configure your PC as follows m Install the following Client Adapter and Protocol software included with Windows 95 Client Software for NetWare Networks currently R3 X only Protocol Software for IPX and IP if desired Dial up Adapter Software To install the software select Control Panel then click on Network Click on the Add button to display the Select Network Component Typ
138. IPO SCRIPT DESTINATION c r n 5 TYPE SLIP SLIP1 SCRIPT USERID u r Password p r DESTINATION c r n 6 i TYPE SLIP Where for the ChameleonNFS software u p c r i n 1 9 Note Issue 3 sends the Chameleon user ID string as the NAC User ID sends the Chameleon password as the NAC password sends the Chameleon SLIP COMMAND as the data switch dialstring in the example in Figure F 12 mlkway earth morse slip sends a carriage return tells the script to capture the IP address tells the script not to expect an incoming string G n oO 3 eo 3 je e indicates the number of seconds to pause All of the variables for the scripting language file are described in detail in the software documentation for the package you are using F 21 Cc Q 5 90 E Z O fad ro fod 72 mD ARAP Service Example Note In order to edit the CCL script you should have the AppleTalk Remote Access Modem Script Workshop software contact your modem or client software vendor The CCL documentation will indicate the supported baud rates Connection via Modem To establish the ARAP connection perform the following steps 1 Note F 22 From the Network Control Panel of the Control Panels folder select Remote Only Refer to Figure F 13 Launch the Remote Access Client program and select Guest Refer to Figure F 14 Select Remote Ac
139. Icsadm Interface 8 3 Common Commands 8 4 Initial System Setup initsetup 8 5 Top Directory Commands 8 5 Session Directory Commands 8 7 Ports Directory Commands 8 10 Service Directory Commands 8 12 Manager Directory Commands 8 13 Config Directory Commands 8 16 Typical Administrative Tasks 8 21 Show Session Example 8 22 Log Level Example 8 23 Change the Default Route Example 8 23 Summary Output Examples 8 24 System Console Parameters Autobaud 8 24 Issue 3 Table of Contents Backup and Restore Operations 8 25 Generic vs Variable Files 8 26 Local and Remote Modes 8 27 Backup Restore Tape Local Mode 8 27 m To Back Up to Tape 8 27 m To Restore from Tape 8 29 m To List the Contents of a Tape 8 30 Centralized Backup Restore Remote Mode 8 30 m Security Authorizing Clients and Servers 8 31 Access to Backup Restore Functions Clients and Servers 8 32 m Defining Backup Restore Servers on a Client 8 33 m Defining Backup Restore Clients on the Server 8 34 m Backup or Restore Functions 8 35 m Creating a Tape 8 38 Network Access Password Option 8 38 Deleting the Network Access Password 8 40 Changing the Network Access Password 8 40 Status 8 40 Error Messages 8 41 Error Messages from the LCS60 Fiber Interface 8 42 m Console Error Messages 8 42 m Hardware Error Messages 8 42 m Server Error Messages 8 44 Call Error Messages 8 44 Lucent Technologies Data Switch Server Log File 8 45 Additional Log Files 8 46 Is
140. LCS60 FILES usr etc statlcs E 42 Issue 3 TELNET TELNET 1 NAME telnet log in to remote host SYNOPSIS telnet ec 8 host port DESCRIPTION Telnet is used to communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol When invoked without the host and port arguments telnet enters command mode as indicated by its prompt telnet gt In this mode it accepts and executes the com mands discussed below When invoked with a host and port telnet performs an open command with those arguments The host can be either the host name or its Internet address The port can be either the service number or its name see services 4 If port is not speci fied telnet will attempt to contact the server at the default port Once a connection has been opened telnet enters input mode In this mode all text entered from the keyboard is sent to the remote host for processing To enter command mode from input mode enter the telnet escape character To return to input mode enter a carriage return at the telnet gt prompt To execute a single command from input mode and return automatically to input mode enter the telnet command preceded by the escape character for example linemode The default escape character is the tilde Use the e command line option or the escape command to change the escape character for a telnet session The 8 option enables the transmission of 8 bit data to facilitate communication with hosts
141. LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service m Assign the number of sessions The total number of sessions through the LCS60 is 120 when SLIP is configured 5 Set up IP network security groups ipas m Enter ipas at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config ipas from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for configuring IP network security groups for the various workgroups required Refer to Screen 5 1 for an example Refer to the Multiple IP Subnetworks section of Chapter 1 for further information Note Do not use the IP addresses shown in the examples as they should follow your corporate IP address convention Screen 5 1 Configure IP Network Security Group Example z Top gt Config gt ipas CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Configure Display IP Network Security Groups 2 Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group 2 Delete an IP Network Security Group 3 Edit an IP Network Security Group 4 Display all IP Network Security Groups Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter an IP Network Security Group name q to quit for help Me ug
142. LCS60 to access a DNS Server for the translation of symbolic names into IP addresses This reduces the administration required for the LCS60 This feature provides a less cumbersome and more efficient mechanism for performing translations between symbolic host names and Internet addresses than checking the LCS60 database files The DNS function is a more manageable translation mechanism for large and interconnected networks It can connect to a name server which maintains the information database on another host on the local or remote network The LCS60 default operating environment is still the use of the local host file If dns service is selected the system will act as a resolver only Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMP software allows the LCS60 to report its TCP IP status to an SNMP Manager SNMP service can be started and stopped using the lcsadm interface of the LCS60 Implicit in the SNMP architectural model is a collection of network management stations and network elements Network management stations exe cute management applications which monitor and control network elements Network elements are devices such as hosts gateways terminal servers and the 1 6 Issue 3 LAN Protocols like which have management agents responsible for performing the functions requested by the network management stations SNMP is used to communicate management information between the network management stations and the agents in the n
143. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet R3 0 Installation and Administration Guide 255 111 107 Issue 3 July 1996 Copyright 1996 Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subject J or Part 15 of FCC rules Trademarks CommKit Datakit and StarKeeper are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies AppleTalk AppleShare EtherTalk Mac and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Company ChameleonNFS is a registered trademark of IBM Corp DECnet is a trademark of Digital Equipment Company HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Co Hydralube Blue is a registered trademark of Arnco Equipment Co InterPPP is a trademark of InterCon Systems Corp IPX is a registered trademark of Novell Inc NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc PC TCP is a registered trademark of FTP Software Inc Polywater is a registered trademark of Polywater Company Sun and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of Novell Inc in the United States a
144. Manager Directory m Server Directory G 1 G 1 G 3 G 4 G 5 G 5 G 5 G 7 G 8 G 16 G 17 G 19 G 19 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 Glossary This glossary is provided as an easy reference for terms and parameters used throughout this document General The following terms are used throughout this document AppleTalk A link independent protocol developed by Apple ARA Apple Remote Access An ARAP client package from Apple Computer Co ARAP AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol A set of protocols that allows a client computer to connect to an AppleTalk network via a serial connection call address The data switch address used to establish connectivity between destinations CCL Connection control language data switch Datakit II VCS BNS 1000 or BNS 2000 directory This service allows LAN hosts to query the LCS60 to obtain a service listing of all TCP to async port numbers associated PDDs and the service type of each port number Only one port may act as a directory port at a time DNS Domain Name Server ELAP EtherTalk Link Access Protocol EtherTalk is Apple s data link protocol that allows Ethernet cables to be used to connect an AppleTalk network frame type Indicates the Ethernet or Novell framing type host A workstation connected to a network or subnetwork host inter In TCP IP Protocol the name given to the interface A host can face name have more than one host interface name In Figure 3 1
145. Oo eo s 3 je e IP address 1 1 1 1 for a dynamic IP address Port e Modem e Dial e Login Figure F 12 User Name field NAC User ID User Password field NAC password Startup Command field SLIP dialstring Issue 3 F 19 Cc ao fr oO fan O 4 i ro fod 72 SLIP Service Examples Note NEWT will display the dynamic IP address your PC has been assigned Figure F 11 Custom Setup Window Custom C NETMANAG TCPIP CFG gt File Interface UE Services Connect Help Interface Address D0 baud Dial ions IP Address Host Name Subnet Mask Domain Name Host Name Domain Name Interface Name Route Entries Log Figure F 12 Login Settings Window Custom CANETMANAG TCPIP CFG File Interface Setup Services Connect Help Login Settings User Name smccoy User Password Startup Command _ mlkway earth morse slip The ID password and dialstring information provided in the Setup Window Figure F 12 is called in by the scripting language file in this example the F 20 Issue 3 SLIP Service Examples slip ini file refer to Screen F 3 for an example 3 After configuring slip ini select Connect for the SLIP connection Screen F 3 slip ini File Fragment a Me DEFAULT SCRIPT name u r word p r n 6 cSr i TYPE SLIP SL
146. P 6 5 gateway services 7 18 PPP 4 18 remote 1 19 8 2 SLIP 5 13 Administrative commands 3 29 8 18 Issue 2 Alarms StarKeeper II NMS B 6 Aliases G 4 Apple references 1 3 AppleTalk G 1 AppleTalk address 4 10 AppleTalk network number and zone assignment 1 8 6 4 AppleTalk network zone configuration 4 10 6 3 configuration parameters G 3 AppleTalk protocol 1 7 AppleTalk remote access protocol see ARAP AppleTalk screen F 15 AppleTalk Status Window F 18 AppleTalk virtual network configure 4 10 6 3 Application software installation 9 9 removal 9 13 ARA G 1 ARAP 1 13 G 1 administration 6 5 client software F 2 configuration 6 1 connection F 2 dialstring 6 5 miscellaneous administrative commands 6 7 service example F 22 arap log 6 7 8 47 Assembly 2 6 Asterisk service field A 3 Async to TCP inactivity timeout option 7 9 return to DESTINATION option 7 10 Index Async to TCP gateway service 1 6 7 11 asytcp log 7 20 8 47 AT Comp G 13 Atalkas 3 18 4 10 6 3 example 6 3 Atlog E 1 atmer log 8 47 Atnetstat E 2 Atping E 4 Authentication first time 1 18 Authorize A 3 Autobaud 8 24 Autoboot reset 9 21 B Backup 8 18 see Backup restore base level 3 27 from a server 8 36 to tape 8 27 Backup restore 1 19 8 25 access 8 32 centralized 8 31 client 8 27 from a server 8 36 from client 8 35 functions 8 35 local 8 27 remote 8 31
147. P or press RETURN for default of gt wimsey Enter TCP window size Type q to QUIT for HELP gt 8192 or press RETURN for default of 1024 Enable the LCS60 NOHUP Type q to quit for help Enter y n gt n no hangup feature for this port or press RETURN for default of n Enter Inactivity timeout minutes Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of gt 1 mgm k NOTICE e Screen 7 1 continued on next page 7 6 Issue 3 Screen 7 1 Continued ye Ne Entering port lt 1111 gt to provide lt socket gt service as follows gt Pre Defined call address gt gt wimsey TCP window SIS eataa Sed ae ees 8192 8 bit character mode Enabled Inactivity timeout minutes 1 Wait for Input timeout minutes 2 NORUP sisireresi et inier i ideki Disabled gt AWL naer RE EERE EAE A Disabled A S EUn ES AAA AEE EE etna EEA Disabled Enter this service port Enter y n gt y Port lt 1111 gt has been added Press RETURN to continue gt Return TCP TO ASYNCHRONOUS GATEWAY SERVICE CONFIGURATION MENU Display Change the LCS60 call address prompt Add a service port Delete a service port Change modify a service port Display service ports Ow wWwner Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt q Changes to TCP to Async gateway service to take effect immediately
148. P Service Reserved IP Address The user requests a reserved IP address by omitting the D option on his her data switch dialstring and by having a negotiable IP address administered in his her client software package The reserved IP address must be centrally administered by the LCS60 administrator prior to the user s call To find that user s reserved IP address the LCS60 searches its configuration database with both the IP network security group name and the user ID field The latter value is extracted from the u option appended to the data switch dialstring by the NAC In the absence of a NAC or an explicit u option the user ID defaults to the value guest If the LCS60 does not find a reserved IP address for the given combination of the IP network and user ID then the session start up request is assigned a dynamic IP address If the reserved IP address is allocated when a second session setup attempt is made for the same user ID the call is refused and an entry is placed in the ppp log file A given user ID can have multiple reserved IP addresses one for each of the IP network security groups that has been configured on the LCS60 Note Reserved IP addresses can only be allocated by the system administrator or someone with root permissions To reserve specific addresses for users m Use the ipas command Screen 4 2 m Select option 2 to display the RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES menu
149. Ports The following screens show a variety of port commands N Top gt ports Top gt Ports gt show LCS60 TCP Async Service Port Statistics Feb 2 07 44 34 Port Service State Total Busy Fail Reset 23 TELNET UP 6 0 0 0 1111 SOCKET UP 0 0 0 0 2222 SOCKET UP 0 0 0 0 2511 DIRECTORY UP 0 0 0 0 2999 TELNET DOWN 0 0 0 0 4000 TELNET UP 0 0 0 0 4419 TELNET UP 0 0 0 0 10283 TELNET UP 0 0 0 0 50000 SOCKET UP 0 0 0 0 Top gt Ports gt disable 4419 Top gt Ports gt show 4419 LCS60 TCP Async Service Port Statistics Feb 2 07 44 52 Port Service State Total Busy Fail Reset 4419 TELNET DOWN Top gt Ports gt show c LCS60 TCP Async Service Port Configuration Information Apr 5 10 32 15 Port Service Tcpws 8bit Nohup 2way SID Type Idle Wait Pre Defined Address 23 TELNET 1024 On 2 1111 SOCKET 8192 On a wimsey 7 18 Issue 3 Administration a 5 2222 SOCKET 2048 On On On other marina pier cove 2511 DIRECTORY 1024 2 2999 TELNET 1024 On brown 4000 TELNET 1024 On 2 triangle center 4419 TELNET 1024 On On On nac 2 mlkway earth yard 10283 TELNET 512 On S J 50000 SOCKET 8192 On On nac mlkway earth rocket Top gt Ports gt summary LCS60 TCP Async Service Port Summary Information Feb 07 12 00 55 Limit Cig Cap Use Directory 500 6 3 6 2511 Top gt Ports gt Trace TCP Async The following screen shows a typical trace
150. Recv Pkts CRC BadF Rej Top gt Session gt Xe Call Trace Example The following screen shows how to obtain call trace information for ARAP a Top gt Session gt trace arap LCS60 AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol Tracking Information Apr 20 09 22 30 St a a E Remote Addr Remote Sesid Name Zone Address User Chan Switch Address Lice a400 Research Lab 2010 114 cbaker 400 yard gazebo 39 4 1 2 a411 Research Lab 2010 103 smccoy 411 yard gazebo 39 7 t 6 a495 Research Lab 2010 19 troughtn 495 yard gazebo 39 9 Top gt Session gt 6 6 Issue 3 Administration Log File The log file arap log is written to by the LCS60 interface software and contains information about incoming ARAP call requests To display the contents of the arap log file use the page command as shown in the example below ee D pg usr adm lcs arap log Fri Jun 2 15 41 04 23961 3 arapl started loglevel 3 Fri Jun 2 15 41 04 23961 3 arapl nfiles 256 Tue Jun 20 13 15 55 2159 3 ARAPTOSS dk mlkway earth topper 36 20 uid 5126 arap is temporarily disabled Tue Jun 20 13 16 19 2188 3 arapl started loglevel 3 Tue Jun 20 13 16 20 2188 3 arapl nfiles 256 Tue Jun 20 13 16 29 2188 3 arapl NEW 1 1 dk mlkway earth topper 36 20 ch 510 uid 5126 Tue Jun 20 13 17 30 2188 3 arapl 1 1 Connect Failed r 4 Tue Jun 20 13 17 30 2188 3 arapl DEL 1 1 Wed Jun 21 08 15 01 2188 3 arapl exited e e Me A Rela
151. Reload System Software 5 the LCS60 and the individual protocols and or services you want to be up whenever the system is rebooted Before you run lcsadm you should read about LCS60 configuration in the LCS60 Network Interface Installation and Administration Guide and assemble the information required for configuration The system is ready morse Console Login A zy After the screen above is displayed complete the installation by 1 Logging on as root Note As shipped the root password is the Return key Change the root password as soon as you log on 2 Accessing the lcsadm Interface 3 Running initsetup and srvsetup as required as described in Chapter 3 Removing the LCS60 Application Software Before removing the LCS60 application software stop the configured protocols and services by entering Icsadm c stop all from the root prompt Remove the LCS60 application software by conducting the dialogue as root from the Con sole login shown in Screen 9 5 z D 5 5 D O 4D Issue 3 9 13 Removing the LCS60 Application Software Screen 9 5 LCS60 Application Software Removal R2 0 Example a gt pkgrm 1cs60 The following package is currently installed lcs60 LCS60 Network Interface m88k R2 0 Bldxx Do you want to remove this package y n q y Removing installed package instance lt lcs60 gt Verifying package dependencies Process
152. S well known services provided by the host no recurse Tell the name server to query other servers if it does not have the information The default is recurse retry x Set the number of retries to x the default is 2 This regulates the number of times a request is resent if a reply is not received within a certain amount of time changed with set timeout root host Change the name of the root server to host the default is nic ddn mil This affects the root command timeout x Change the time out interval for waiting for a reply to x seconds the default is 10 seconds nolve Always use a virtual circuit when sending requests to the server The default is nove view file Sort an ls output file and view it with more E 32 Issue 3 NSLOOKUP NSLOOKUP 1 DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination The diagnostic messages displayed for an unsuccessful search are Time out The server did not respond to a request after a certain amount of time changed with set timeout x and a certain number of retries changed with set retry x No information Depending on the query type set with the set query command no informa tion about the host was available though the host name is valid Nonexistent domain The host or domain name does not exist Connection refused Network is unreachable The connection to the name or finger server could not be made at the current time This e
153. S60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service Screen 5 2 Continued a gt Techs quit gt morse Selected IP Network Security Group morse Enter an Internet host address allocated from IP network 154 12 23 q to quit gt 154 12 23 7 Added reserved IP address 154 12 23 7 for tbaker within IP Network Security Group morse RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address Edit Reserved IP Address Display Reserved IP Address BwWDhN EE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 4 Enter User Login Id for help RETURN for user ids q for quit gt tbaker Reserved IP Address for User Login Id tbaker is morse 154212523 27 Enter User Login Id for help RETURN for user ids q for quit gt q RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address Edit Reserved IP Address Display Reserved IP Address BwWNE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q Top gt Config gt lt a we 5 6 Issue 3 Note Do not use the IP addresses shown in the example as they should follow your corporate IP address convention 7 Configure the Ethernet interface etherif m Enter etherif at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config etherif from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for config
154. S60 to Data Switch Verification Loopback Test dkcu 9 29 LCS60 to Local Ethernet Host Verification ping 9 29 Memory Dump 9 30 m After the Dump is Completed 9 32 A Originating Group Security srvtab A 1 m Server Table A 1 m System Field A 2 m Service Field A 3 m Flags Field A 4 m User Field A 5 m Program Field A 6 m Initial Parms Field A 7 m Server Table Scanning Rules A 8 Modifications to the Server Table A 9 Server Table Validation and Matching A 9 B StarKeeper II NMS Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS B 1 m Diskette or Tape Installation B 1 m StarKeeper II NMS Configuration Commands B 4 Alarms to StarKeeper IT NMS B 6 Issue 2 vii Table of Contents C User Error Messages viii Cable Error Message C 1 Outgoing Call Error Messages C 1 Incoming Error Messages C 9 m SLIP Sessions C 10 D Software Installation Fujitsu or Seagate ST5660N Drive Reload System Software D 1 UNIX System Software Installation D 1 E Manual Pages ATLOG E 1 ATNETSTAT E 2 ATPING E 4 DKCU E 6 DKMAINT E 8 FTP E 9 IFCONFIG E 19 IFSTAT E 21 IFTRACE E 24 IPXNETSTAT E 26 IPXPING E 27 NETSTAT E 28 NSLOOKUP E 30 PING E 34 PULL E 35 PUSH E 37 ROUTE E 40 STATLCS E 42 TELNET E 43 Issue 2 Table of Contents F User Information Introduction F 1 Client Software Configuration F 1 m Client Packages F 2 m Mac Connection CCL Script F 2 CCL and Modem Hints F 5 CCL F 5 Modem F 6 PPP Service Example
155. SLIP package you are using The number of Van Jacobson compression slots refer to the documentation for the SLIP package you are using Number of bytes transmitted Number of packets transmitted AS i ts110 9 G 9 gt 2 40 9p ip 2 Glossary Recv Bytes Number of bytes received Recv Pkts Number of packets received Show Async TCP Top gt Session gt show asy Top gt Session gt show tcp Sesid Session ID number Service The service type e g telnet for TCP and ASYNC sessions Char Mode Indicates the mode enabled for the port 8 bit 7 bit or binary Xmit Bytes Number of bytes transmitted Recv Bytes Number of bytes received Connect The time the TCP or ASYNC session was connected Time Idle Time The time in hours minutes format that the session has been idle Show PPP Top gt Session gt show ppp Sesid Session ID number Xmit Bytes Number of bytes transmitted Xmit Pkts Number of packets transmitted Recv Bytes Number of bytes received G 10 Issue 3 Glossary Recv Pkts Number of packets received Receive Errors Len Indicates the length of the PPP frame received was not valid CRC Indicates a checksum error for the PPP frame received State Indicates that the state of the PPP frame received was invalid for HDLC framing Alloc Indicates that the system was unable to allocate a buffer for the received frame Show PPP Link IP IPX
156. Software Key 3 Display Software Certificate and Software Key Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt q Top gt Config gt Me x 8 20 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Name upgrade Synopsis upgrade Description This command generates a menu which allows you to per form a remote upgrade of the LCS60 Refer to the Chapter 9 for complete details of the remote upgrade feature Name viewhosts or viewnets Synopsis viewhosts or viewnets Description The viewhosts command displays the internet addresses and host names of all hosts on a specific network or on all networks that are currently in the network database as well as IP reserved addresses for SLIP and PPP viewnets displays all networks names numbers and aliases in the database configuration as found in the etc networks file gt a 3 l D o 0 e Typical Administrative Tasks This section gives a few examples of tasks the LCS60 Administrator may per form For LCS60 service specific tasks refer to the appropriate chapter PPP Chapter 4 SLIP Chapter 5 ARAP Chapter 6 gateway Chapter 7 Issue 3 8 21 Typical Administrative Tasks Show Session Example The following screen shows how to check the status of all sessions gt Top gt Session gt show LCS60 TCP to Async Gateway Session Statistics Apr 26 09 30 25 Char Total Total Idle Time Sesid Service Mode Xmit Bytes Recv Bytes Connec
157. Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK Jj gt 1 X e Once the proper authorizations have been made remote operations may be initiated either from a server or from a client 8 32 Issue 3 Defining Backup Restore Servers on a Client Servers are defined from the Backup Restore Menu Screen 8 9 To define which machines servers may back up a client enter option 1 on the Backup Restore menu Screen 8 9 This will display the menu shown in Screen 8 12 Screen 8 12 Centralized Backup Server Definition Menu d b CENTRALIZED BACKUP SERVER DEFINITION MENU Enter change a backup restore server Delete a backup restore server List backup restore servers BUNE Show machines backup restore status a client or a server Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK J gt Me x Choose option 1 to define a server The system will prompt for the client name and call address It is essential when entering the call address of a server that the originating group name of the server be identical to the data switch s local address of the server Servers cannot define other LCS60s to back them up however a server can specify itself as its own client by means of the Centralized Backup Restore Menu Server Screen 8 11 by choosing option 1 Changing a Client to a Server In the case in which you are reconfiguring a client to be a server you must first delete all s
158. VIRTUAL NETWORK ZONE NAME Research Lab Confirm Enter y n gt y The LCS60 virtual AppleTalk network is configured as follows VIRTUAL NETWORK NUMBER lt 2010 gt VIRTUAL NODE NUMBER lt 1 gt Pi Screen 6 1 continued on next page Issue 3 6 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for ARAP Service dVuVv LCS60 Configuration and Connection for ARAP Service Screen 6 1 Continued a gt VIRTUAL NETWORK ZONE NAME lt Research Lab gt NOTE Changes to the configuration of the LCS60 virtual AppleTalk network will not take effect until you Enter the lcsadm command and then type start atalk from the top command directory to start AppleTalk protocol CONFIGURE ADDRESS AND ZONE FOR APPLETALK VIRTUAL NETWORK 1 Configure Address and Zone Name 2 Display Address and Zone Name 3 Delete Address and Zone Name Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help J gt q Top gt Config gt NS a The virtual AppleTalk network address and the zone name must be defined they are used for the dynamic allocation of AppleTalk addresses for PPP and ARAP sessions Note Do not use the AppleTalk address shown in the example follow your corporate AppleTalk address convention 6 From the Top directory enter start all 7 Tocomplete ARAP configuration you must configure the client side of the service Refer to the documentation included with your client software examples
159. acing information on a per session basis The output includes connection state local address foreign address fiber channel number and data switch address The v flag gives a verbose output n displays the remote user IP address rather than the sym bolic name and w puts the command output in the named file filename The trace command requires the user to specify a service type Issue 3 8 9 Cc Q 5 Lt ze lt Icsadm Interface Name types Synopsis types Description This command lists the available LCS60 service types as shown below a 5 Top gt Session gt types Help for different types of services Service types may be abbreviated They are Types Description tcpasy TCP Async Service asytcp Async TCP Service slip Serial Line IP Service ppp Point to Point Service arap AppleTalk Remote Access Service Top gt Session gt Ne wf Ports Directory Commands Screen 8 3 Ports Directory Top gt Config gt ports Top gt Ports gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config disable enable flush help manager quit service session show summary top update i The Ports directory Screen 8 3 contains utilities for the TCP to async service The following commands are available from the Ports directory 8 10 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Name disable or enable Synopsis disable port port 2 Description These commands are used w
160. ad only Confirm y nl y Enter Community Name d q gt traps x a 3 26 Issue 3 Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP a 5 IP address of SNMP manager for community traps q gt 154 12 21 2 Access right for SNMP manager 154 12 21 2 r w t q gt t Adding the following information to the configuration file community traps 154 12 21 2 traps Confirm y n y Enter Community Name q gt q Top gt Config gt Ne 2 Note Supported traps are listed in Chapter 1 Refer to RFC1213 for supported MIBs Be sure to specify routed and snmp with the protocol command to start SNMP service at boot time op D o ie o z S o Starting the LCS60 After configuring the LCS60 you must start the protocols and services you have configured using the start all command from the Top directory of Ilcsadm Base Level Backup Once the LCS60 is installed and configured the administrator should make a complete set of backup tapes of the LCS60 variable files to preserve the confi guration information These tapes can be labeled day 0 backups and can be used to restore the LCS60 quickly to a working state if necessary Use the com mand Icsadm c config backup as described in Chapter 8 Issue 3 3 27 L f n o op zi Configuration Changes A variety of commands are available to review the configuration Commands such as viewnets and
161. ade server All other LCS60s in a network are remote upgrade clients and can be upgraded remotely over the data switch from the server Installation and removal of releases of the LCS60 require access to the system console To obtain the full benefit of the remote upgrade feature the system con sole of the remote upgrade clients should be remotely accessible Any of the sys tem console connections described in Chapter 2 except for direct connection to the LCS60 provide remote console access Note The remote upgrade feature does not apply to R1 0 systems Installing an Upgrade on a Remote Upgrade Client To install an upgrade remotely on a client 1 Log on to the client from the system console as root 9 16 Issue 3 Remote Upgrade 2 Access the Remote Upgrade Installation Menu using lcsadm c config upgrade or a 5 lcsadm Top gt config Top gt Config gt upgrade REMOTE UPGRADE INSTALLATION MENU CLIENT Procedures 1 Enable a client to receive a generic download 2 Remove from client the previously installed generic 3 Install on a client the downloaded generic 4 Disable a client from receiving a generic download SERVER Procedures 5 Copy from Tape a generic onto this server 6 Send a generic from this server to a client 7 Remove a spooled generic from this server Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 3 You are on the client Select item 1 and enter the server
162. administered IP address enter it in the Local IP Address field on the screen above otherwise the LCS60 will dynamically assign an IP address when a negotiable IP address has been administered in the client software package Cc 2 D a gt 2 a 3 fed me 2 Issue 3 F 17 PPP Service Examples Figure F 8 PPP Connection Screen Untitled Connect using No Authentication Status oO Authenticated User Connected Phone 5551214 El Remind me of connection every minutes Connect Figure F 9 AppleTalk Status Window Research Lab AppleTalk Cc 2 oO Network Address E 2010 122 Q Cc Zone Name _ lt b wn Server Name morse F 18 Issue 3 SLIP Service Examples ChameleonNFS 4 0 Note ChameleonNFS 4 5 is different from ChameleonNFS 4 0 Refer to the user documentation for specific details Before you can make a SLIP connection using ChameleonNFS you must config ure the SLIP interface through Windows Figures F 10 F12 show an example configuration for dynamic IP address acquisition 1 Under the Custom window select Interface and add a SLIP interface Figure F 10 Custom Interface Window Custom C NETMANAG TCPIP CFG nae File BUGLE Services Help Subnet Mask Host Name Domain Name 2 Under the Custom Setup window Figure F 11 configure the following n
163. alidation of a server line three comparisons are made with the call request information 1 The requested service is compared to the service specified in the server table entry If the services do not match the scan moves on to the next line of the server table 2 The originating group for the call is then compared against the originating group pattern in the server table entry according to the rules specified in the System Field section If the originating group fails the check the scan moves on to the next line 3 Finally the originating user ID contained in the call request information is processed by the method specified in the user field of the server table entry If the user ID processing results in an invalid user ID on the called host the scan moves on to the next line The first server table line that passes all the specified tests is considered a match When a match occurs the call is accepted and the program specified in the server table entry is invoked with the appropriate arguments according to the server table flags gt xe O D 2 x gt Issue 3 A 9 srvtab lt Ra O Cc Q Q Q lt A 10 Issue 3 StarKeeper II NMS Configuration of the StarKeeper Il NMS Issue 3 B 1 Diskette or Tape Installation B 1 StarKeeper II NMS Configuration Commands B 4 Alarms to StarKeeper II NMS B 6 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS The LCS6
164. all could not be completed because an error occurred opening the channel m Please supply a valid phone number The user has neglected to type the phone number required to make a phone call as in dkcu dialer name phone number The phone number is synonymous with the dialstring Issue 3 C 7 dp Q O i dp O U Outgoing Call Error Messages C 8 Receive window too small The call could not be completed because the receive window size is too small Remote node not answering A connection cannot be completed because a data switch trunk or com mon data switch control computer database somewhere in the network path is inoperable Server already exists This host attempted to set up a CommKit Host Interface server but the data switch control computer database already knows a server by that name Server not answering The requested server name is not in service No interface hardware is assigned to the requested name The interface hardware assigned to the requested name is not in service or is not operational The remote server may not answer for reasons of its own Service mismatch The service on the SIM did not match the request SIM all channels busy All assigned ports channels on the SIM are in use SIM bad contact The call could not be completed due to SIM resource congestion SIM no access The call was denied by the remote side SIM no contact The SIM rejected the call Spli
165. ample The following screen shows the user setting the log level for PPP Top gt Manager gt Server gt log ppp 3 Top gt Manager gt Server gt Change the Default Route Example i To select a function enter the corresponding number Top gt Config gt dftroute oN CURRENT default route is 154 12 21 3 3 DEFAULT ROUTE FUNCTIONS 5 n 1 Define the default route 2 Delete the default route fab ot e Type q to quit or for help gt 1 CAUTION The default route defined here will be overridden if a router is advertising a default route in the network Enter default router name alias or internet address Type q to quit or for help J gt 154 12 21 86 Trying to reach host 154 12 21 86 OK CURRENT default route is holmes NEW default route will be 154 12 21 86 Enter y to confirm NEW default route 154 12 21 86 Enter n to reject NEW default route 154 12 21 86 gt y T An example of changing the default route from holmes 154 12 21 3 to 154 12 21 86 is shown above Issue 3 8 23 Cc 2 a 5 O lt Typical Administrative Tasks Summary Output Examples The following screen illustrates the summary commands A gt Top gt Service gt summary LCS60 Gateway Service Summary Mar 1 08 05 38 Service Name Cig Use Max State tcpasy 120 0 0 Disabled Not Enabled slip 120 31 90 Enabled ppp 120 4 120 Ena
166. and 254 and must conform to the Internet network numbering conventions m priq lt priority queue level gt must be 0 or 1 The IP SLIP client gave an invalid value for the lt priority queue level gt on the data switch dialstring m vjslots lt of vjslots gt must satisfy 3 lt vjslots lt 64 The IP SLIP client specified an out of bounds number on the data switch dialstring for the number of Van Jacobsen compression slots Issue 3 C 11 Incoming Error Messages m mtu lt MTU size gt must satisfy 296 lt mtu lt 1006 The IP SLIP client specified an out of bounds number on the data switch dialstring for the SLIP Maximum Transmission Unit MTU size m cannot request both dynamic IP address and IP address lt IP address gt The user specified both the D option and a privately administered IP address in his her dialstring Only one of these may be entered dp Q O i dp O LU C 12 Issue 3 Software Installation Fujitsu or Seagate ST5660N Drive Reload System Software D 1 Issue 3 UNIX System Software Installation D 1 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 Reload System Software Note This appendix applies to the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N disk drives which were used in Release 1 0 and 2 0 of the LCS60 Release 3 0 is equipped with a Seagate ST11200N disk drive procedures for the R3 0 drive are given in Chapter 9 If the system crashes it may be nece
167. and prefix use uppercase characters To operate a modem which supports the Hayes Command Set with command extensions Leave first pause time at 1 second minimum time possible Pause to confirm that the physical layer is open For most situations an 8 sec pause should suffice for the remote system to respond with a login prompt Change if necessary ZY Screen F 2 continued on next page F 10 Issue 3 PPP Service Examples Screen F 2 Continued pause 2000 comment comment Send r to get DESTINATION prompt send pause 1000 comment Send dialstring for morse send mlkway earth morse ppp cr comment pause 4000 comment comment Switch the packet driver from character mode to packet mode comment changemode packet comment comment Send a request to open the LCP layer comment Pause to confirm that the lcp and ipcp layers are open comment poll lcp open poll ipcp open S y Note The above dialup script uses the script language slang WIN PC TCP can also use a script language comscrpt for additional information contact Apple Computer Co PPP Connection After completing the client configuration procedures described above establish the PPP connection as described in this section am 12 D
168. and return to this screen 3 Select vt100 cursor addressing 4 Select wyse50 cursor addressing 5 Select unknown cursor addressing Enter option number of choice 1 5 1 1 UNIX SYSTEM V 88 Release 4 Upgrade Installation You have the following options 1 Full installation 2 Upgrade an existing R40V2 or later system 3 Exit without doing anything reboot 4 Enter maintenance mode Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 Installation Warning CAUTION A new installation of the UNIX system will destroy all files currently on disks used for the installation If you have not made a backup and want to do so enter n Do you want to continue yn y Package Selection Confirmation The following packages are available for installation Those currently selected for installation are marked by C2sec ed mvme337 sds Motif els mvme 338 VALTE rat NCD enet1x7 mvme376 spell X11 envmon mvme37x sys gt Xlicontrb face mvme385 sysadm 4 acct fsd nfs tarlist bnu gold nis tbx cdfs inet nsu terminf O cds pS ocscomp ufs 4 compat lp perf usrenv dfim man rfis xXCp rare mvme332xt rpc 1 Proceed to install packages as shown 2 View package descriptions and or change selection Enter option number of choice 1 2 1 Return Installation Disk Configuration Ws 2 Issue 3 9 3 Reload System Software in D 1 Automatic 1 disk installat
169. annot be one of the IP addresses that has been reserved for other users or is in use Dynamically Assigned IP Address The LCS60 will assign a random IP address dynamically from the IP network range associated with the called IP Network Security Group To do so the ses sion start up request must meet one of the following conditions m The user has included the D option on his her data switch dialstring and has a negotiable IP address administered in his her client software pack age m The D option has been omitted from the dialstring and the user does not have a reserved IP address administered in the LCS60 configuration data base For the user to always obtain a dynamic address from the PC the dialstring is 5 12 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service DESTINATION area exch 60name slip D If the D option is omitted then the user s reserved IP address is assigned if it is available i e it exists and is not busy In the following example the user ID defaults to a guest user ID If a reserved IP address has been allocated for the guest user ID that is the address assigned if no reserved IP address is set aside for the guest user ID then a dynamic address is assigned DESTINATION mlkway earth morse slip Administration Routine administration of the LCS60 includes SLIP tasks such as starting or stop ping SLIP and generating SLIP specific reports This section gives some e
170. arKeeper II NMS installation will abort if it is running a Atthe SK prompt enter SKsh this displays the main menu Issue 3 B 1 9 2 A D D ke 2 Z z op Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS b Choose SYSADM this displays the Sysadm menu c Choose SHUTSK select y to continue with shutdown Enter Return when you see the shutdown completed message d Exit the SKsh program by pressing Return and then y at the Exit the Menu Program prompt 2 Z D Q eb oO x w 3 At the SK prompt enter the su command with no arguments to change your user id to root 4 Confirm that the StarKeeper II NMS Support for LCS60 for Ethernet package has not been previously installed on this StarKeeper II NMS At the prompt enter the usr bin displaypkg command 6386 or the cat s INPUT L60 name command HP 720 730 If the output of the com mand entered does not contain a line that begins with SK II NMS L60 Utility R3 0 proceed to Step 5 If the command output does contain the above line then the StarKeeper II NMS Support for LCS60 for Ethernet package installed on this StarKeeper II NMS must be removed before the new package can be installed Note If you have a version of the StarKeeper II NMS Support for LCS60 for Ethernet package currently installed you must remove it now To remove it a Have on hand the diskette or tape that was originally used to install the current package b F
171. ateway the metric will be greater than zero Netmask can be used when installing network routes Value can be represented in any of the normal forms associated with network masks The netmask is applied to the destination address when IP is looking for network routes Mtu and it s value allow the route to have a maximum transmission unit MTU associated with the route to destination Value must be less than or equal to the MTU associated with the network interface used to get to gateway see netstat 1 i If the mtu option is not given when installing a route IP will default the route MTU to the network interface MTU used to get to gateway The route MTU is given to TCP when TCP asks IP for the Maximum Segment Size MSS it should use when communicating with destination Only the superuser can modify the routing tables The command netstat r will display the current routing tables Issue 3 ROUTE ROUTE 1M DIAGNOSTICS NOTES Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination add host destination gateway gateway add network destination gateway gateway The specified route was successfully added to the route table del host destination gateway gateway del network destination gateway gatewa The specified route was successfully deleted from the route table destination gateway done This message is displayed for each route deleted by the flush command not in table A delete operation wa
172. ation 14 For the both Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives Continue with the dialo gue as shown in the screen below 5 bnu Package Query 1 Please enter the node name to call this machine it must be 8 or less alphanumeric characters unix morse inet Package Query 1 You can enter the value of the IP address now if you know it otherwise you can just press RETURN to continue If you do not enter a value now the IP address must be initialized later using the instructions found in the Initial System Setup booklet in order to use the Internet functionality Internet Address Return lp Package Query Enter the name of the OLD spooling directory i just press lt return gt if this is a new installation usr spool lp Return lp Package Query 2 Should the disable enable commands be available to ALL users yn n Return lp Package Query 3 Will you be attaching a PostScript printer to this system yn y Return nsu Package Query 1 Enter the number of pseudo terminal devices to configure on your system 0 1024 256 Return gt xe D 2 x w Ready to Start Installation At this point the installation should continue without interruption until finished You will only need to check occasionally for error messages which require a response If the installation media contains multiple tapes you may be asked to insert them as necessary 1 Continue with U
173. ators Table 2 1 lists the LCS60 controls and indicators Issue 3 2 1 D 5 I Introduction Table 2 1 Controls and Indicators Controls Location Switch Function Rear Panel Power Power ON OFF SYSTEM RESET Processor and VME bus reset MVME197 ABORT Aborts program returns to debugger RESET Processor and VME bus reset Indicators Board Indicator Function MVME197 FAIL Hardware failure SCON Indicates 197 board is VME bus controller RUN Processor run state LAN LAN status VME VME status SCSI SCSI status MVME712M ETHERNET XCVR Ethernet Transceiver PWR STATUS power status amber SCSI TERM SCSI terminator PWR STATUS power status green Can be seen by means of the rear panel cutout labeled SCSI INTERFACE Site Preparation LCS60 specifications for the power interface and operating requirements as well as the other pertinent interface specifications are listed in Table 2 2 2 2 Issue 3 Site Preparation Table 2 2 Specifications LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet Power Requirements Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Humidity 90 to 132 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 5 Amps 180 to 250 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 2 5 Amps 41 to 60 VDC 8 Amps 10 to 45 C 40 to 54 C Long Term 20 to 55 Short Term 20 to 80 10 to 95 Fiber Interface Fiber Core Size 62 5 micr
174. binary trace Toggle packet tracing Packet tracing is turned off by default type type name Display the data representation type of the file to be transfered no argu ments or set it to type name Valid types are ascii default binary ebcdic image and tenex local byte size The binary and image types are identical The ebcdic type is not currently supported The tenex type in which the logical byte size is 8 is virtually the same as binary umask mask Display no arguments or set the umask on the remote host per the umask 1 command user login password account Log in to the remote FTP server as login Ftp will prompt for the password and account if they are required and not specified verbose Toggle verbose mode When enabled all responses from the FTP server are displayed to the user as well as statistics regarding the efficiency of each file transfer By default verbose is enabled for an interactive session and disabled for a background or batch session command A synonym for help mname arg Invoke the macro mname with the specified arguments command Invoke a shell on the local host To return to ftp exit from the shell with CTRL D If an argument is specified that command is executed and the shell will exit automatically DIAGNOSTICS Issue 3 Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination FTP 1 FTP FILES netrc 4 services 4 NOTES Note t
175. bled ip 4 ipx 5 atalk 0 arap 120 0 0 Disabled Not Enabled Totals 32 Top gt Service gt port Top gt Ports gt summary LCS60 TCP Async Service Port Summary Information Mar 1 08 05 42 Limit Cfg Cap Use Directory 500 8 4 8 2001 System Console Parameters Autobaud The following screen shows an example of the autobaud feature being disabled Top gt Config gt console SYSTEM CONSOLE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Disable Enable Autobaud Feature Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1 8 24 Issue 3 Typical Administrative Tasks d 5 NOTICE KKK x The system console autobaud feature is currently enabled KKK gt Do you want to disable it y n y The system console autobaud feature is now disabled You must first log off the system console in order for this change to take effect SYSTEM CONSOLE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Disable Enable Autobaud Feature Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt q Top gt Config gt Ww J Backup and Restore Operations gt a 3 l D o w e The LCS60 backup and restore capabilities have been provided to help protect the substantial investment in time and effort that may have been required to work out the necessary networking definitions administer them using LCS60 commands and functions and then verify that they are correct The backup restore facil
176. call cannot be completed because a connection cannot be made Wait a short time before trying to call again Network congestion Trunk call collision Try again The call cannot be completed because of a call collision in the trunk Wait a short time and try the call again Issue 3 Outgoing Call Error Messages m Network hung up The network hung up the call m Network routing error Due to a network configuration error the call is being sent and received over the same trunk m No answer from dialed number The call was dialed successfully but the autodialer did not get an answer m No carrier tone was detected The call was dialed successfully and answered however no carrier tone was detected by the autodialer L 3 s z 4 n a A Q 4 n m No diagnostic channel The call could not be completed because a diagnostic channel is not avail able m No initial dial tone detected The autodialer on the called port may have a bad telephone line The port has been marked as bad and removed from the autodialer hunt group m No response from autodialer Try again The autodialer on the called port failed to respond to the data switch node The port has been marked as bad and removed from the autodialer hunt group m No secondary dial tone detected The autodialer was signaled to wait for a secondary dial tone in the dial ing sequence and no such dial tone was detected m Open channel error The c
177. ce completed The connection endpoints were successfully spliced together Issue 3 Outgoing Call Error Messages m Splice failed The connection endpoints could not be successfully spliced together m Transmit window too big The call could not be completed because the transmit window size is too big m Trunk busy The call could not be completed because a trunk in the call path is busy m Trunk configuration mismatch Call Network Administrator The call was rejected because a trunk in the call path is not properly con figured Contact the data switch Network Administrator L 3 z 9D n O A Co 4 n m Trunk not answering The call could not be completed because a trunk in the call path is not in service m Unsupported baud rate The requested baud rate is not supported by the autodialer m Urp error The call could not be completed because of an internal protocol error m Vip to dial error The call could not be completed because an error occurred converting vlp format into a dialstring Incoming Error Messages The following error messages may be seen on the user s PC when he she attempts to start up a SLIP session and the session is refused Issue 3 C 9 dp Q O i dp O LU Incoming Error Messages SLIP Sessions The LCS60 may send the following messages to the SLIP user lt IP address gt is out of range The IP SLIP client requested an lt IP
178. ce port If no service port is configured enter the call address of the data switch connected host Log on in the usual manner An example is given below A service port may also be configured with a PDD connecting the user to the destination host with a telnet command as shown in the second example in the following screen In this example service port 2222 has been configured as a tel net port with a PDD of mlkway earth watson 7 12 Issue 3 User Information k telnet brown Trying 15E L2 26E 0 3 Connected to 154 12 26 6 Character mode is enabled Escape character is Notice from LCS60 brown The following editing characters are valid during input at prompts An ASCII backspace erases the last character typed An ASCII deletes the entire input line brown LCS60 DESTINATION telnet brown 2222 Trying 154 12 26 6 Port 2222 Connected to brown lab att com Character mode is enabled Escape character is Notice from LCS60 brown Connected to Data Switch Address mlkway earth watson login UUCP Feature Data Switch to LCS60 to LAN To transfer files using uucp between a host attached to a CommKit Host Inter face and an Ethernet host on the LCS60 the usr lib uucp Systems file must be modified on the host that is connected to the CommKit Host Interface The host originating the uucp connection must be attached to the CommKit Host Interface For Ethern
179. ces and protocols You must perform this step before continuing on to step 9 After this step has been completed do not quit or exit from the lesadm command or you will have to manually complete the process as follows m From the root login prompt on the client execute the following pkgadd d var spool pkg m Continue with step 10 below On the client select menu item 3 This will install the downloaded LCS60 software generic After this step has been completed successfully you may exit or quit from the lcsadm command Reboot the client LCS60 using etc shutdown g0 y i6 On the client login as root and perform the initsetup procedures as described in Chapter 3 On the client configure all required protocols and services using the Icsadm commands and enter start all from the Icsadm interface s Top directory On the client select item 4 from the Remote Upgrade Installation Menu to disable the client from receiving a generic download Exit lesadm On the server remove the LCS60 Software Installation tape and store it in a safe place Exit lcsadm If the LCS60 software generic is no longer needed remove it from the server by selecting item 7 under the SERVER Procedures from the Remote Upgrade Installation Menu Issue 3 Processor Board Firmware Update If the MVME197E processor board has been replaced the set and env must be executed to reset the time and date and autoboot functions After replacing the board
180. cess Setup under Setup on the Control Bar Figure F 15 Choose Modem select your CCL Script Choose Port select modem port Use the defaults for all other fields From the Main Screen Figure F 14 Enter the phone number Use the defaults for all other fields Under File select Save As to save the setup to a file name for example lcs60 This will allow you to launch Ics60 the next time you want to establish the ARAP connection rather than repeating this procedure From the Main Screen Figure F 14 select Connect to connect and display the Remote Access Status window Figure F 16 Under Windows select Activity Log to see log entries for the connec tion Issue 3 ARAP Service Example Figure F 13 ARAP Remote Connection Example AppleTalk Connection E LocalTalk Remote Only Buit In Current Zone lt No tones available gt AppleTalk Version 56 1 Remote Only Version 2 0 Figure F 14 ARAP Remote Access Setup Connection Screen io UNTITLED Conmect Ax OyRogktered Leer FB Guest OF ez o gt gt je q 3 fas y oO ree E TE sFH Wtr S5 1234 LJ Ube taal Avant Issue 3 F 23 ARAP Service Example Caution You must connect as Guest You will receive the following error message if you attempt to connect as Registered User The connection attempt hes Toiled The user pame yeu
181. cessor The LCS60 offers the enhanced Motorola MVME197 processor rated at 100 MIPS With this processor the LCS60 can sustain a higher number of sessions at a greater aggregate throughput than its LCS50E predecessor Issue 3 1 17 sounjee4 wn oD 0b LL Hardware Features Fiber Interface The LCS60 supports a single multiplexed fiber interface to the data switch CPM HS module This is a distinct advantage in terms of cable management and effi ciency over traditional terminal servers which require separate asynchronous connections Network Security Complete network security is achieved through the Lucent Technologies Net work Access Control NAC System When a data switch connected modem accepts a call from a remote user a PDD can force that user to authenticate through a NAC Once authenticated the user can request a TCP gateway session or a remote access session such as ARAP PPP or SLIP with an LCS60 by means of a simple dialstring From the LAN all sessions bound for the data switch net work can be forced to be authenticated by means of the TCP service port feature Additionally the LCS60 supports a first time authentication option with the NAC This option requires the LAN users to authenticate only once with the NAC as long as the TCP Async session remains open with the LCS60 The actual duration time of an authenticated session is a NAC dependent variable Therefore consult the NAC d
182. ch Lab o Confirm D Enter y n gt y ep The LCS60 virtual AppleTalk network is configured as follows 9 VIRTUAL NETWORK NUMBER lt 2010 gt VIRTUAL NODE NUMBER lt 1 gt S VIRTUAL NETWORK ZONE NAME lt Research Lab gt NOTE Changes to the configuration of the LCS60 virtual AppleTalk network will not take effect until you Enter the lcsadm command and then type start atalk from the top command directory to start AppleTalk protocol CONFIGURE ADDRESS AND ZONE FOR APPLETALK VIRTUAL NETWORK 1 Configure Address and Zone Name 2 Display Address and Zone Name 3 Delete Address and Zone Name Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt q This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to configure the Ethernet x interface for TCP IP on this LCS60 This must be configured for TCP x Gateway PPP and SLIP services TCP IP ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION MENU a Issue 3 3 19 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup D 1 Configure an Ethernet Interface 2 Delete an Ethernet Interface 3 Display all Interfaces that are configured Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu WARNING This option will automatically delete each interface that was previously configured It reconstructs the Ethernet interface database from scratch and requires the user to reconfigure each interface again Do you want to continue y n y En
183. chstr 1 20 Match incoming characters The 20 in this line is a label matchread 400 Reads input from the serial driver and compares the input to the current match string F 4 Issue 3 Client Software Configuration USERID Password Your user ID password and DESTINATION DESTINATION nj exch system ppp Your LCS60 dialstring for PPP use the ARAP dialstring nj exch system arap for ARAP exit 0 Terminates execution of the script in this example 0 is defined as a good return exit 6019 Terminates execution of the script in this example 6019 is defined as a bad return HANGUP Marks the point in the script where execution begins to hang up Note Refer also to the software documentation CCL and Modem Hints The following are suggestions designed to eliminate problems when setting up your modem and editing or creating your CCL script For complete details on your modem contact your modem vendor CCL Use a generic CCL script or one specific to your type of modem and add a LABEL 19 write 13 matchstr 1 20 USERID matchread 400 jump 59 LABEL 20 note Got USERID ask 1 Enter USERID write 13 matchstr 1 21 Password matchread 400 UONEWOJU JOS Issue 3 F 5 Cc Ro 5 90 E fan O fad ro fod 72 mD Client Software Configuration a 5 LABEL 21 note Got Password ask 1 Enter Password write 13 matchstr 1 22 DEST
184. close several comma separated strings for each of which a match is sought Globbing is always on with reference to remote files it is on by default with reference to local files hash Toggle hash mark printing for each data block transferred The size of a data block is 4096 bytes By default hash mark printing is off help command Display a list of the ftp commands no argument or an informative mes sage about the specified command idle seconds Display the current inactivity timer on the remote host or set it to seconds image A synonym for binary Icd directory Change the working directory on the local host to the user s home direc tory no arguments or to the specified directory Is lt l remote directory gt local file A synonym for dir macdef mname Define a macro that will be invoked by using the name mname Subse quent lines will be stored as the macro definition A null line consecutive newlines or carriage returns will end the macro definition Within the macro definition a dollar sign is used to specify substitution of arguments from the macro invocation line The sequence n where n is a number will be replaced by the nth argument for example 1 is the first argu ment The sequence i will cause the macro to loop automatically execut ing once with each argument Escape the dollar sign with a backslash to prevent this special treatment The maximum number of macros is 16
185. complete network management from one central ized location for both the data switch and the LCS60 The StarKeeper II NMS can be located anywhere on the data switch network and can contact many LCS60 gateways 1 20 Issue 3 Manual Pages The LCS60 is provided with a set of online manual pages Some commands that may be of particular help to the system administrator are listed in Table 1 1 and are included in Appendix E Table 1 1 Online Manual Pages Protocol Commands Path General dkcu opt dk bin dkcu dkmaint opt dk sbin dkmaint ifstat usr bin ifstat iftrace usr etc iftrace push usr bin push pull usr bin pull statlcs usr etc statlcs TCP IP ftp usr etc ftp ifconfig usr etc ifconfig netstat usr etc netstat nslookup usr etc nslookup ping usr etc ping route usr etc route telnet usr etc telnet AppleTalk atlog usr etc atlog atping usr etc atping atnetstat usr etc atnetstat IPX ipxping usr etc ipxping ipxnetstat usr etc ipxnetstat The commands dkmaint and ifconfig are not used in normal LCS60 operations and should only be used by expert users and system administrators These com mands are not recommended except for troubleshooting purposes Access online man pages by executing the command Issue 3 sounjee on o oO LL Manual Pages man command where command is the name of the command Customer Assistance Technical support is a
186. configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q This completes your configuration of protocols and services on this LCS60 then from the top command directory type start all Top gt Config gt S To start ALL configured protocols and services enter the command lcsadm and e P ep D ie Q z S o Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP The following optional commands allow you to m Define a default route m Define the Domain Name Server m Define an SNMP manager Issue 3 3 23 f 09 o op Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP Default Route dftroute Use the dftroute command to define the default route as shown in the example below The default route may be entered either as a host name or as a TCP IP dotted numerical address e g holmes or 154 12 21 3 The host name entered as the default router must exist in the LCS60 configuration database use the addhost command to add the host as necessary jn A Top gt Config gt dftroute CURRENT default route is None DEFAULT ROUTE FUNCTIONS 1 Define the default route 2 Delete the default route To select a function enter the corresponding number Type q to quit or for help gt 1 CAUTION The default route defined here will be overridden if a router is advertising a defa
187. ct of making a route less favorable metrics are counted as additional hops to the destination network or host The rout ing metric is used by the routing protocol routed 1M mtu mtu Set the Maximum Transmission Unit of the interface to mtu the default metric is the value that was returned by the interface when the network was started netmask mask up DIAGNOSTICS Internet Address family only Identify the portions of the Internet address to be used for the network and subnetwork specification the remainder is used as the host specification It is strongly recommended that the subnetwork field be contiguous with the network portion The 32 bit address mask contains 1 s for the bit positions in the network and subnet parts and 0 s for the host part The mask can be specified as a sin gle hexadecimal number for example Oxffffff00 with a dot notation Internet address for example 255 255 255 0 or with a pseudo network name listed in the network table networks 4 Mark an interface as being UP This is used to re enable an interface after an marking it down An interface is automatically marked up when its address is first set If the interface was reset when previously marked down the hardware will be re initialized Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination Messages may indicate the specified interface does not exist the requested address is unknown or that a nonprivileged
188. ction is required for an AC powered unit An AC outlet must be within 6 feet of the LCS60 the use of extension cords should be avoided 5 ADC power connection is required for DC powered units The customer must make this connection with wire no larger than 6 AWG and no smaller than 18 AWG Cautions Do not run signal cables next to or parallel with AC power cables Do not run signal cables near radio transmitters or any equipment that generates radio frequencies Do not run signal cables near electric motors power supplies power line regulators or relays Do not run signal cables near equipment that generates power line noise such as air conditioners copy machines and water coolers Use power outlets with adequate protective grounding 2 4 Issue 3 EMI Considerations Site Preparation The LCS60 can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in accordance with instructions may cause interference to radio communications This equip ment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A comput ing device pursuant to Part 15 Subpart J of FCC Regulations which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operating in a commercial environment Operation in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user must take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Required Equipment The LCS60 is shipped in the hardware c
189. ctivate the dialup script by selecting Start Script As the connection progresses a Progress Monitor screen will show dialup script activity to the LCS60 Once the IPCP is highlighted the PPP connection is established Issue 3 F 13 Cc Q 5 90 E Z O fad ro fod 72 mD PPP Service Examples Note Be aware that baud rates are dictated by the application serial drivers installed and the version of the PC UART InterPPP Note InterPPP Il is different from InterPPP Refer to the user documentation for specific details The InterPPP software requires minimal Mac configuration for AppleTalk or IP over PPP Note Make sure MacTCP is installed in the Control Panels folder MacTCP should come with the InterPPP package TCP IP should be selected under the MacTCP for the initial connection Note Remember to reselect PPP for the next PPP session Connection To establish the PPP connection perform the following steps 1 From the Network Control Panel of the Control Panels folder select the AppleTalk PPP icon Refer to Figure F 5 This tells the AppleTalk software to use the serial port instead of the built in LAN port 2 Launch the InterPPP application 3 Under File choose New or Open CCL Script create edit and save the script 4 Under Configure select Modem refer to Figure F 6 Choose Port select Modem Port Choose Modem select your CCL script Choose After Connect
190. d PPP services ipas Chap 4 and 5 Configure virtual AppleTalk atalkas srvsetup network zone for PPP and ARAP services Chap 4 and 6 Configure TCP to Async gateway service ports srvports Chap 7 Issue 3 3 9 ep D ie o z S o o n o io a Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup After executing the initial setup procedures above configure the protocols and gateway services using the srvsetup command Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 srvsetup srvsetup gt configure protocols services select protocols and services protocol asytcp tcpasy etc assign the maximum maxsessions number of sessions to AVES EW op We E il each protocol and service i ipx l i ipas atalkas f IERES herif configure the ethernet etheri interface Note The configuration activities in the srvsetup command protocol maxsessions ipas ipx atalkas etherif can also be accessed individually Refer to Chapters 4 5 6 and 7 for examples of individual commands Perform the following steps to configure the protocols and gateway services for your LCS60 You should have already done an initsetup as described previously Step 1 Enter srvsetup at the Top gt Config gt prompt to start the protocol service setup routine Step 2 Follow the menus in the srvsetup they will guide you through the items ess
191. d release Enter Group Name a A CC0 gt enter group GROUP up to 8 chars morse TYPE local trunk local local DIRECTION originate receive 2way 2way DEVICE OR HOST up to 8 chars morse PASSWORD up to 8 chars none none none ROUND ROBIN SERVICE per_port per_module none none none GROUP up to 8 chars Delete CCO gt of Conduct the appropriate dialogue as shown in screen above Enter _ Delete to end the session The entries are described below group Defines the group name by which the data switch knows the LCS60 This is morse in the example This must be the same as the LCS60 node name type The LCS60 is a local connection to the data switch the CPM HS module resides in this data switch direction The fiber interface may be used to originate and receive calls through the CPM HS module therefore it is 2way device host We recommend the name be the same as the name of the LCS60 password Passwords are not used with the CPM HS module round robin Choose the default of none Define the Local Address for the LCS60 Note You must enter an address for each IP Network Security group on the node with a group name of the default node Conduct the appropriate dialogue as shown in the screen below 2 22 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 a 5 CCO gt enter address LEVEL local area exchange local speedcall local local TYPE x121 mnemonic both mnem
192. d to specify whether CIPX header compression is to be used Con default specifies that header compression will be used Coff specifies it will not Privately Administered Static IP Address In this case the user s IP address is locally administered by the user on his her client software package For PPP users this IP address is embedded in their IPCP configuration request packet The LCS60 grants the user s request for the proposed IP address if the IP address is m A valid IP address allocated from within the IP network range associated with the IP network security group name that he she has called The IP network security group name matches the local address component of the LCS60 s data switch dialstring mnemonic address m Not already in use by another user The LCS60 may have already assigned the requested IP address to another IP session m Nota match to any reserved IP address that has been allocated by the LCS60 administrator except for a reserved IP address set aside for that user s user id To obtain a specific static address that has not been reserved for the client set your IP address on the PPP client package This IP address will be negotiated with the LCS60 If that address is available your session will acquire that IP address If the requested IP address is reserved or busy then the connection will not be successful Refer to RFC 1553 Issue 3 4 15 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PP
193. de name you configure for your LCS60 after you exit and then re enter the Icsadm interface in the example that follows the prompt would become morse Top gt The screen displays in this document however omit the machine name to avoid confusion Note The directories are followed by a slash in the screen display Step 8 To navigate through the directories enter the name of the directory you wish to access top session ports service manager config To see the contents of a directory use the ls command or the Return key Step 9 Enter the Config directory by typing config at the Top gt prompt Note Command and directory names can be abbreviated by typing a unique string of the beginning characters of the command e g the command backup can be accessed by typing b at the Top gt Config gt prompt Issue 3 3 5 Initial Setup ia 5 Top gt config Top gt Config gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are addhost addnet atalkas backup console datetime delhost delnet dftroute dns etherif help initsetup ipas ipx manager maxsessions nodename ports protocol quit service session snmp softwarekey srvports srvsetup subnet top upgrade viewhosts viewnets x Top gt Config gt init w A Step 10 Enter init at Top gt Config gt to start the initsetup routine Step 11 Follow the menus in the initsetup they will guide you through the essential items that must be configured for
194. ded ipx is added tcpip is added slip is added ppp is added arap is added asytcp is added tcpasy is added routed is added PROTOCOL SERVICES TO BE STARTED WHEN BOOTING 1 Add Protocol Service to Configuration 2 Delete Protocol Service from Configuration 3 Display Current Protocol Service Configuration Ne y Issue 3 3 11 f n f op J Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup a D Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q x This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to define the maximum number of sessions for each configured service CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature LCS60 AND SERVICE SESSION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Add Change a Session Parameter 2 Delete a Session Parameter 3 Display all Session Parameters Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1 Enter session parameter maxsessions ppp slip arap asytcp tcpasy Type q to QUIT or for HELP J gt tcpasy P If you enter a value greater than 180 for maxsessions the CPM HS module must be configured for 512 channels refer to page 2 25 ae Enter session parameter value Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 120 NOTICE Entering lt tcpasy gt service with value of lt 120 gt Is this correct Enter y n
195. e u Identifies the user either user name or numeric ID for whom the IP address is requested This is not required when a NAC is used 154 12 23 10 Specifies a privately administered IP address in dotted IP address format If this option is included on the dialstring the SLIP server will assign this address only if the address is m Within the IP address range assigned to the LCS60 and m Not reserved for any user and m Not currently in use If this option is not included on the dialstring then the server assigns either a dynamic or a reserved IP address to the connec tion Note When a SLIP host is dialed e g mlkway earth morse slip the LCS60 attaches the incoming call to the SLIP server When the SLIP server is ready to exchange IP datagrams the server writes SLIP ipaddr A B C D to the peer Privately Administered IP Address In this case the user s IP address is locally administered by the user on his her PC software package When calling into the LCS60 SLIP service this requested IP address is presented as part of the data switch dialstring The LCS60 grants the user s request for the proposed IP address if the IP address is m A valid IP address allocated from within the IP network range associated with the IP network security group name that he she has called The IP network security group name matches the local address component of the LCS60 s data switch dialstring mnemonic address m Not already in u
196. e Select Client Adapter and Protocol in turn to add the software needed m Once this software has been installed you must configure the properties for your particular configuration To do so click on Properties in the Net work window Refer to the Windows 95 on line help screens for details m Establish the PPP connection as follows refer to Figures F 1 and F 2 1 Click on the Dial Up Networking icon Figure F 1 left to display the Dial Up Networking window Figure F 1 right 2 From this window select the Make New Connection icon to enter the connection parameters Once you have entered the connection parameters the system will save them with a name you select and place an icon with that name in the Dial Up Networking window The next time you want to make the same connection you need only click on that icon Note When defining the connection parameters for your system select Display Terminal Window after dialup G 2 io s 5 oO in 3 o O 3 Once you have entered the connection parameters a Connect to window will be displayed Enter the appropriate information This will open a Terminal Window in which you can authenticate and enter the data switch dialstring for the LCS60 Issue 3 F 7 PPP Service Examples Figure F 1 Windows 95 IPX Over PPP Example Screens 3 ga lojx Fie Een View Hep Eile Edit Wew Cormectone Help 4 a Fe 3H Floppy Ac Meade Be E Audio CD ID Mak
197. e Display the last modification time of the remote file mput local file Transfer multiple files from the current local working directory to the current working directory on the remote host newer remote file Get the specified remote file if a local file of that name does not exist or if the remote file has a later modification date than the local file of the same name nlist rfile Ifile options rfile Ifile List the name s of the files in the current working directory or the speci fied rfile file or directory on the remote host Specified options are sup plied to the remote list command for example the UNIX Is command or the VMS dir command The list can be displayed on the standard output device or placed in the specified Jfile local file E 13 FTP 1 FTP nmap inpattern outpattern Unset no arguments or set the file name mapping mechanism File name mapping is used to automatically derive a destination file name from the source file name during get mget mput and put commands This is of particular interest when connecting to a non UNIX remote host with dif ferent file naming conventions or practices The input pattern consists of the variables 1 through 9 and literals and is matched against a source file name to extract the portions of interest The input pattern cannot contain spaces The output pattern specifies the manner in which the variables derived by the input pattern should be used to creat
198. e 3 PPP Service Examples Figure F 4 PC TCP Session Configuration Screen Example Session configuration mt60 Serial configuration a Port COM2 Speed 14400 X Hardware flow control X Software flow PPP only Cancei r Link configuration Use defauts IP address 154 12 22 81 J compression Advanced gt Off Password Automatic Set the port and baud rate to the ones you are using with your modem Enable hardware flow control To have the LCS60 assign your client software an IP address dynamically leave the IP address as zeroes and add the D option to your data switch dialstring For a privately administered address enter the IP address your LCS60 administrator assigned to your client software To request your reserved IP address leave the IP address as zeroes and omit the D dialstring option Leave the login and pass word fields blank the client software will not be using PPP authentication but the NAC instead by means of the dialup script Leave the VJ settings as the defaults Note Negotiation of the TCP IP header compression option is defined in RFC1332 If your client package supports Van Jacobson Header Compression then configure this feature on your Mac or PC The size of each packet can shrink up to 35 bytes thereby giving your PPP session a significant performance boost am 12 D a gt 2 a 3 fed me 2 A
199. e Config and Manager directories require root per mission and will initially prompt the administrator for the root pass word The symbol will appear at the end of the prompt e g Top gt Config gt once the administrator has root permission Note root can only log on at the system console The system can be admin istered remotely however as long as the administrator has the root password and the Icsadm remote administration feature has been enabled Issue 3 8 1 Cc Q ca 5 O lt Logging On System Console Log on at the system console and enter Icsadm at the root prompt to obtain access to all LCS60 administrative operations Remote Administration The LCS60 is provided with a remote access feature which is delivered in the dis abled state The system administrator can enable this feature 1 Go to the srvtab directory cd etc opt dk srvtab 2 Edit the file Icsadm 3 Delete the sign from the line lesadm t bin bin lcsadm lcsadm r p Once enabled system administration can be performed by accessing the lcsadm Interface from a remote terminal To log on remotely use one of the strings shown below for the LCS60 morse DESTINATION mlkway earth morse 1lcsadm Circuit Open LCS60 Administrative Command Interface Enter RETURN key for command list morse Top gt 8 2 Issue 3 Logging On dkcu mlkway earth morse 1lcsadm Circuit Open L
200. e New opps Conrection Contiol Pare Frima Lsa Lig Networking 1 obije eal ected 1 obiectis selected Figure F 2 Windows 95 IPX Over PPP Connect To Example Screen z Connect To f User name baker Password F Sava passwad Phone numbes 85554234 Diaingrom ATT O Propertios Cancel A far oO Z O 4 i ro 0b 72 F 8 Issue 3 PPP Service Examples Note In the previous screen Password is not used PPP Connection After completing the client configuration procedures described above establish the PPP connection as follows m Enter the connection dialstring in the Terminal Window as shown in the example below Be sure to enter _F7 after entering the dialstring DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp Note Windows 95 can also use a customized dial up script Refer to the Win dows 95 on line help for details on scripts WIN PC TCP 3 0 Note WIN PC TCP 3 1 is different from 3 0 Refer to the user documentation for specific details PC Configuration Before you can make a PPP connection using PC TCP you must configure your PC as follows m Define anew session for the LCS60 server Cc a D 2 3 o 3 D re m Modify the existing dialup and hangup scripts Procedures for these tasks are given in the Using PC TCP in Windows manual provided with the PC TCP software The dialup script initializes and dials the modem handles lo
201. e next display iteration See stty 1 for a discussion on setting the interrupt intr and quit quit control characters E 21 IFSTAT 1M IFSTAT FILES s Show interfaces Display the ip interfaces that ifstat supports ifstat does not display interfaces not currently configured under ip For example for the two MVME376 boards in a system if only the first board is configured under ip ifstat displays the first board and not the second Examine the con figuration files under etc ifstat conf to learn all the possible interfaces ifstat can support t Terminfo unsupported Used with terminals that do not have terminfo 4 entries or do not support curses 3X commands z Zero statistics Zeroes ifstat s version of the statistics When used with the f option causes cumulative statistics to begin at 0 Certain tagged statistics in the config file are unaffected by this option i e they are not counters and therefore always show the same non zeroed value NOTE this command does not actually zero the statistics kept in the driver only the version ifstat keeps l interval Display interval The number of seconds to wait before gathering and displaying another set of statistics This option is useful only in conjunction with f ifstat treats this value as an unsigned integer ifstat prints a standard header before displaying any statistics The header con sists of the name of the device the ifstat is requesting statistics fro
202. e server via the FTP protocol command SITE SITE commands are non standard or environment specific functions implemented by a particular server the list of supported SITE commands can be obtained with the command site help size remote file Display the size of the remote file status Show the current status of ftp struct struct name Set the structure of the file to be transferred to struct name Valid formats are file default page and record Only the file structure is currently supported sunique Toggle the creation of unique remote file names for sending files using put and mput If the destination file name already exists a numeric extension will be added to the name incrementing the number sequentially until a unique name is created For example if the target remote file name is Issue 3 FTP FTP 1 fortune and that file already exists the target name fortune 1 will be used If fortune 1 already exists the target name fortune 2 will be tried This will continue with extensions 1 through 99 if all versions of the file already exist the transfer will fail The unique file name will be displayed if the transfer succeeds By default sunique is off system Show the type of operating system running on the remote host tenex Set the data representation type to tenex This corresponds to the local or logical byte size type The only byte size currently supported is 8 making this type virtually the same as
203. e the destination file name The variables 1 through 9 are replaced by their values The variable 0 is replaced by the original source file name The pattern str1 str2 is replaced by str1 if str1 is not a null string or by str2 if str1 is a null string All other spaces and characters are treated as literals For example the mapping nmap 1 2 1 2 can be used to create a UNIX equivalent of the VMS version number extension by replacing the semicolon with a period ntrans inchars outchars Unset no arguments or set the file name character translation mechanism Character translation is used to automatically derive a destination file name from the source file name during get mget mput and put commands This is of particular interest when connecting to a non UNIX remote host with different file naming conventions or practices If a character in the source file name matches the nth character in inchars it will be replaced by the corresponding character from outchars to create the destination file name If the inchars string is longer than the outchars string the characters without a corresponding output character will be ignored in the source file name For example the translation ntrans will translate semicolons to periods wherever they appear and ignore all dollar signs hyphens and percent signs open host port Establish a connection to the FTP server on the specified remote host Port is used to spec
204. e used as an IPX router connecting the Ethernet LAN to a virtual IPX network via PPP The virtual IPX network created by the LCS60 permits as many as 120 remote end hosts to dial in over the data switch and connect to the Novell network The virtual network on the LCS60 supports a single network number IPX Virtual Network Assignment The LCS60 supports dynamic address assignment within a virtual network of IPX over PPP clients Refer to Figure 1 3 Upon dialing into the LCS60 the PPP client is assigned an available IPX address automatically The client then becomes part of the virtual IPX network configured on the LCS60 no special dialstring options are used Figure 1 3 IPX Virtual Network m EA Virtual IPX Address 57 1FE ae bs NyA Lucent Data Switch y F 1C560 Se Network _ 7 one 7 Nak A IPX Address m er Sa 1562 8003E224056 57 1F0 Issue 3 1 9 wn oD oO LL Remote Access Protocols TCP Async Gateway Service The LCS60 provides a gateway service such that a terminal user connected to the data switch network either directly or through a modem can reach LAN connected hosts workstations this is the async to TCP gateway service The LCS60 provides communication in the other direction from the LAN host to the data switch with the TCP to async gateway service This connectivity is accomplished through the telnet and tepsock commands which all
205. eboot the LCS60 as shown below 5 etc shutdown g0 y i6 Shutdown started Mon Apr 10 16 43 19 EDT 1996 Broadcast Message from root console on morse Mon Apr 10 16 43 21 THE SYSTEM IS BEING SHUT DOWN NOW Log off now or risk your files being damaged hanging to init state 6 please wait Cc INIT New run level 6 The system is coming down Please wait System services are now being stopped F he LCS60 Software is being terminated Print services stopped Stopping process accounting The system is down The system is being restarted NOTICE System Reboot Requested Copyright Motorola Inc 1988 1994 All Rights Reserved MVME197 Debugger Diagnostics Release Version 1 1 06 17 94 06_17 14 COLD Start Local Memory Found 02000000 amp 33554432 MPU Clock Speed 50Mhz Idle MPU s NONE Autoboot in progress To abort hit lt BREAK gt Booting from VME197 Controller 0 Drive 0 Loading Operating System Volume 00000000 IPL loaded at 00FC0000 SVR4 Disk Boot Loader 930913 z D 5 2 o9 5 D O 4 Boot system file more recent than unix Probing for devices A E R Ske Probe for DKHS 0 0xF0E90000 successful Boot Using EDT built by probe programs Boot hardware change detected Boot reconfiguring kernel Ns y Issue 3 9 11 ab 1 Cc Cc oD a Reload System Software F Multiprocessor Kernel Debugge
206. ed IP addresses ipas for those users who require them Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Enter ipas at the Top gt Config gt prompt or config ipas at Top gt Follow the on screen instructions for adding a reserved IP address Reserved IP addresses are useful in cases in which a user s security privileges are dependent on his her source IP address In other computing environments a reserved IP address could be used to assure that a well known permanent IP address is set aside for server applications residing on a user s client machine When a Network Access Controller NAC is used the remote user s NAC ID is used in the ipas script to reserve an IP address for that user Therefore when the script prompts for User login Id it is referring to the user s NAC ID NAC user IDs are alphanumeric symbols up to nine character long A user NAC ID can be allocated a unique reserved IP address for each of the IP network security groups A sample session is shown in Screen 4 2 Refer also to the IP Address Assignment by the LCS60 section in Chapter 1 Screen 4 2 Configure Reserved IP Address Example r CAUTI 2 gt Me Top gt Config gt ipas ON about configuring this feature IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Configure Display IP Network Security Groups Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit
207. een F 3 slip ini File Fragment F 21 xvi Issue 2 Feature Description Document Organization Issue 3 Reference Documentation 1 2 Apple References 1 3 Gateway References 1 3 PPP References 1 4 SLIP Reference 1 4 Other References 1 4 Overview 1 4 Benefits 1 5 LAN Protocols 1 6 TCP IP 1 6 m Domain Name Server DNS Resolver 1 6 m Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 1 6 m Routing Information Protocol RIP 1 7 AppleTalk Protocol 1 7 m AppleTalk Network Number and Zone Assignment 1 8 IPX Protocol 1 9 m IPX Virtual Network Assignment 1 9 Table of Contents Remote Access Protocols 1 10 TCP Async Gateway Service 1 10 m TCP Service Ports 1 11 Serial Line IP SLIP 1 11 Point to Point Protocol PPP 1 12 m Van Jacobson TCP IP Header Compression 1 12 m Compressed IPX Header CIPX 1 13 AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol ARAP 1 13 Multiple IP Subnetworks 1 13 IP Routing 1 13 Security Groups 1 15 IP Address Assignment by the LCS60 1 17 Hardware Features 1 17 Enhanced Processor 1 17 Fiber Interface 1 18 Network Security 1 18 Copy Protection 1 19 Issue 3 Table of Contents Issue 3 Administration 1 19 Backup Restore 1 19 R3 0 Upgrade 1 20 Remote Upgrade 1 20 Centralized Network Management 1 20 Manual Pages 1 21 Customer Assistance 1 22 Table of Contents iv Issue 3 Document Organization This installation and administration guide is arranged as foll
208. en 4 2 continued on next page 4 6 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 2 Continued a k Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address Edit Reserved IP Address Display Reserved IP Address PUNE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q Top gt Config gt S 7 9 Configure the IPX network number and node address ipx m Enter ipx at Top gt Config gt or config ipx from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for assigning the IPX configuration parameters Refer to the example in Screen 4 3 Screen 4 3 Configure IPX Parameters Example Top gt Config gt ipx CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Se wf Issue 3 4 7 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 3 Continued a ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Configure Display Network Address 2 Configure Display Framing Type Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Current Ethernet Network Number lt Undefined gt Enter an IPX Network Number Type q to quit or
209. end files over port 2981 to host watson T b lcsadm Top gt config srvports Aemaye y TCP TO ASYNCHRONOUS GATEWAY SERVICE CONFIGURATION MENU Display Change the LCS60 call address prompt Add a service port Delete a service port Change modify a service port Ow wWwne Display service ports Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 2 Enter service port number Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 2981 Enter service type telnet socket or directory for port 2981 Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt socket Enter Pre Defined call address or dash for no call address Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of gt mlkway earth watson Enter TCP window size Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of 1024 gt 8192 Enable the LCS60 NOHUP no hangup feature for this port Ne y Issue 3 7 15 User Information k Type q to quit for help or press RETURN for default of n J Enter y n gt n Enter Inactivity timeout minutes Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of n gt Return KKK NOTICE KKK Entering port lt 2981 gt to provide lt socket gt service as follows gt Pre Defined call address gt gt watson TCP WindOw SIZE ici shear sed a ee beak eS 8192 8 bit character mode Enabled Inactivity timeout minutes
210. ential for your configuration refer to Figure 3 3 A sample srvsetup session is presented in the screens that follow Note Refer to the Glossary at the end of this document for definitions of parameter values 3 10 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup a 5 Top gt Config gt srvset LCS60 Protocols and Services Configuration Procedure The srvsetup procedure leads you through the steps to configure the LCS60 protocols and services Before you run srvsetup you should read about LCS60 configuration in the LCS60 Network Interface Installation and Administration Guide and assemble the information required for configuration qa to quit RETURN to continue gt Return x This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to define which services will x be activated on this LCS60 whenever the system is rebooted PROTOCOL SERVICES TO BE STARTED WHEN BOOTING 1 Add Protocol Service to Configuration 2 Delete Protocol Service from Configuration 3 Display Current Protocol Service Configuration Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Please choose from the following protocols services that you want to add gt arap asytcp atalk ipx ppp routed slip snmp tcpasy tcpip lt Enter the protocol service name s to be added for help q for MENU gt atalk ipx tcpip slip ppp arap asytcp tcpasy routed ep D ie o z S o atalk is ad
211. erating hosts This option is usually used when either uucp or kermit like file transfer facilities are used When selected this option automatically disables the local escape key and negotiates binary mode with the remote host Is the remote IP dotted host address or a DNS hostname Allows the user to specify a terminal type e g vt100 that will be negotiated if requested by the LAN host during initial handshake with the LAN host A default terminal type of unknown is used if a terminal type is not specified Allows the user to specify a TCP window size that will override the default 2K for each session This option allows more data throughput therefore a session will be blocked during data transfer operations The recommended values are 1K 1024 2K 2048 4K 4096 8K 8192 16K 16384 Issue 3 port Is an optional TCP port number to which the user wants to con nect on the remote host For example to connect to a remote host s daytime TCP service the user would specify port 23 An example is shown in the following screen 5 DESTINATION mlkway earth brown telnet eoff 8 D Ctrl C moon Circuit Open Trying to connect to 154 12 26 1 Connected to 154 12 26 1 8 bit character mode is enabled Local Escape character CTRL is disabled Local Interrupt Key is CTRL C Local BREAK Key is enabled UNIX System V Release 4 0 Version 2 1 moon login N es Inactivity T
212. eric mnemonic both mnemonic Return MNEMONIC ADDRESS up to 8 chars morscon PAD SUPPORT yes no no Return DIRECTORY ENTRY up to 30 chars double quoted none none console to morse GROUP S up to 4 groups separated by commas none none gmorscon ORIGINATING GROUP NAME SECURITY PATTERN S g R comma separated pattern list same_as none none Return INITIAL SERVICE STATE in out out in LEVEL network area exchange local speedcall local Delete CCO gt restore msm COMPONENT module port p MODULE ADDRESS 18 PORT NUMBER 1 12 1 12 11 CCO gt a Issue 3 2 15 Installing the LCS60 Note 5 D 5 L 6 7 8 There are small variations in system prompts and responses depending on the release of the Lucent Technologies data switch Datakit II VCS or BNS Power up the system console terminal or PC and set the options as directed in Table 2 4 Connect an asynchronous terminal or PC to an asynchronous port on the data switch using a null modem connection D8AG connector A gender changer may be required depending on the type of RS 232 connector available on the terminal device Configure the asynchronous port according to Table 2 4 as an originating group Refer to the appropriate Lucent Technologies data switch Node Reference Guide for complete instructions Restore both asynchronous ports and name to serv
213. erver starts with a log level of n is always of the form shown in the example above where morse is the name of the data switch interface server gt started srvtab is the name of the data switch interface server table dkuidtab is the Q name of the data switch interface dkuidtab and n 6 in the example is the level 3 at which the server activity is logged o lam pg var opt dk log dksrvlog morse oe Jun 27 09 50 43 274 0 000 SERVER morse is INITING files etc opt dk 5 srvtab etc opt dk dkuidtab loglvl 6 Jun 27 09 50 53 274 0 000 ERROR dkmgr Can t open dev dk dial0d Jun 27 09 50 53 274 0 000 dkmgr SERVER morse is ACTIVE and SERVING Jun 27 09 51 11 274 0 139 REQUEST s pupu u 45003 lcsadm r earth mlkway brown Jun 27 09 51 11 315 0 139 Send ioctl init 3 Jun 27 09 51 11 315 0 139 ORIGIN h TOOLBOX 52 3 c opt dk bin pupu e e A e Note morse is the network security group name More information is given depending on the following log levels Log Level1 Each incoming call is logged with the service requested the user id and the dial string of the remote system from which the call ori ginated The entry will also show whether the call was accepted with the token REQUEST or rejected with the token DENIED Issue 3 8 45 Cc BS 5 Li O lt Error Messages Log Level 2 Log Level 3 Log Level 4 Log Level 5 Log Level 6 Log Level 7 Log Level
214. ervers previously defined for the LCS60 Select option 2 on Screen 8 12 to delete the servers This is required because a backup restore server may not define other servers You can convert a client to a server only if any existing server has been deleted You can then add the server by selecting option 1 on Screen 8 12 Issue 3 8 33 Backup and Restore Operations gt a 3 D QD w e Backup and Restore Operations Defining Backup Restore Clients on the Server To define which machines may be backed up by a server select option 1 from Screen 8 11 to obtain the menu shown in Screen 8 13 Screen 8 13 Centralized Backup Client Definition Menu N CENTRALIZED BACKUP CLIENT DEFINITION MENU Enter change a backup restore client Delete a backup restore client List backup restore clients Show backup restore status a client or a server BwWN Ee Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK Jj gt 1 E P Select option 1 to begin the dialogue to add the client See the example below A Enter the names and data switch call addresses of clients that are Cc Q 5 LE ze lt to be backed up by this server Enter client name Type q to quit or for help gt brown Enter Data Switch call address of client brown Type q to quit or for help gt mlkway earth brown Entered NEW brown mlkway earth brown
215. ervice Each IP network is associated one for one with a dkserver service name This name must be entered in the following databases m LCS60 in which the dkserver name is referred to as an IP network security group One of these IP network security groups is required to match the UNIX node uname value m Data switch controller database as a local CPM host address all associated with the same CPM group m Network Access Controller NAC as a host name if security is required The NAC database is used to authorize members of a particular user group to create calls to the LCS60 host name represented by the IP network security group name Generally all those users who share common IP network access privileges are assigned to a NAC user group the NAC is set up to present the group members a menu of LCS60 hosts they are permitted to call The IP routers connected to the same Ethernet LAN as an LCS60 are configured to filter secure IP traffic flow on the basis of an arriving packet s source IP net work address A user s source IP address is assigned by the LCS60 or subject to verification it can be nominated by the user when the SLIP or PPP session is started An LCS60 is required to have an IP network security group whose name matches the LCS60 s UNIX node name this is referred to as the uname IP network secu rity group As a consequence the ipas script requests that you configure the uname security group s IP network address be
216. ervice Directory Show Top gt Service gt show Serv The type of service tcpasy asytcp slip ppp arap Name Issue 3 G 17 esso Glossary Cfg The total number of sessions that have been configured for the ser vice listed determined from maxsessions Use The number of sessions currently in use Cap The percent of the maximum number of sessions currently in use Max The maximum number of sessions in use at one time Total The number of times the session has been accessed Busy The number of times the session has been busy when access has been attempted Fail The number of times access has been tried and has failed State The state of the service enabled or disabled Summary Top gt Service gt summary Service The name of the service type e g asytcp tcpasy slip ppp or Name arap For PPP a breakdown of the number of sessions currently using each protocol IP IPX AppleTalk is displayed Only the number of PPP sessions in use is included in the total at the bot tom of the report Cfg The total number of sessions that have been configured for the service listed determined from maxsessions Use The number of sessions currently in use for the service listed Max The maximum number of sessions in use for the service listed at one time State The state of the service enabled or disabled gt 2 40 9p 9 2 G 18 Issue 3 Manager Directory Show Glossary
217. ess the Return key to continue the shutdown and allow the host to reboot Do not enter bo 0 0 At the nnn Diag gt or nnn Bug gt prompt enter bo 0 0 Press lt RETURN gt to begin the system shutdown 12 At the Console prompt login as root to continue with the UFS Utility Fixes Tape installation Issue 3 Reload System Software UFS Utility Fixes Tape Installation Install the UFS Utility Fixes tape tape 2 of 3 by inserting the UFS Utility tape in the tape drive and conducting the dialogue shown in Screen 9 2 Note In the pkgadd d dev rmt ctape1 command the last character is a one not the letter L Screen 9 2 UFS Utility Fixes Maintenance Tape Installation gt A pkgadd d dev rmt ctapel Installation in progress The following packages are available 1 FH4042xxX1 Post IR ufs utility fixes m88k IRO3 Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default all q Return Processing package instance lt FH4042XX1 gt from lt dev rmt ctapel gt Post IR ufs utility fixes Version IRO3 m88k Processing package information Processing system information 7 package pathnames are already properly installed Verifying package dependencies Verifying disk space requirements Installing Post IR ufs utility fixes as lt FH4042XxX1 gt verifying class lt none gt Installing part 1 of 1 Files overwritten by this package
218. et Protocol Control Protocol IPCP RFC 1552 The PPP Internetwork Packet Control Protocol IPXCP RFC 1553 Compressing IPX Headers over WAN Media CIPX SLIP Reference RFC 1055 Nonstandard for Transmission of IP Datagrams over Serial Lines SLIP Other References RFC 1213 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP based internets MIB II Overview The LCS60 supports the following protocols e TCP IP e AppleTalk e Serial Line IP SLIP AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol ARAP e Point to Point PPP e IPX LAN to data switch connectivity between the resources of Ethernet LANs and the data switch network is accomplished using the LCS60 refer to Figure 3 1 for an example of a data switch network 1 4 Issue 3 Overview The LCS60 provides the required hardware and software for the interface between LAN and data switch network resources The LCS60 provides high speed connectivity between Ethernet networks and the Lucent Technologies family of data switches Datakit II VCS 2 1 or greater BNS 1000 and BNS 2000 Each LCS60 has the following components sounjeo4 m A CPU board to run the LCS60 software and to provide one Ethernet LAN interface m A VMEDKHS board to provide a fiber interface to the data switch CPM HS trunk board Communication between boards within the LCS60 is handled over a VME bus Benefits The LCS60 expands the connectivity and enhances the functionality of the Luce
219. et connected hosts that cannot initiate uucp connections to CommkKit Host Interface connected hosts by means of the LCS60 configure CommkKit Host Interface connected hosts to regularly poll Ethernet connected hosts for uucp traffic There are two ways to set up the uucp feature for data switch to LCS60 to LAN file transfer Issue 3 7 13 Aemaye y User Information 1 For telnet add the following entry to the usr lib uucp Systems file on the originating CommkKit Host Interface connected host e host Any DK g 0 area exch 60name telnet M uucp e host in in nuucp 012 word password 012 Note M raw may be entered instead of M uucp in the line above 2 Async to TCP also offers the TCP socket service tcpsock which provides a higher speed transfer pipe for uucp service For tepsock the administrator should add the following line to the usr lib uucp Systems file e host Any DK g 0 area exch 60name t cpsock e host 540 in in nuucp word password However tepsock can only be used if the LAN host supports the UUCP service over the TCP IP protocol specified as 540 in the etc Services file on the host Otherwise the telnet method should be used e_ host is the host name of the Ethernet connected host which must be entered into the LCS60 configuration database using the addhost command if the LCS60 has not been configured to use a DNS server area and exch represent the area and exchange of the data switch to which the
220. eturn B 4 Issue 3 Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 The next field is optional At Location enter the location of the LCS60 entered in Step 5 e g room number followed by a Return or just enter Return At Time zone enter the applicable time zone for the LCS60 entered in Step 5 followed by a Return refer to the StarKeeper II NMS documentation for format details 9 2 A D D ke 2 Z z 09 The next field is optional At Comment enter a comment or nothing and press Ctrl g At Console press _ Return At Alarms enter y Ctrl t to indicate that the LCS60 uses an Alarms type connection At Status enter a followed by Return if you are ready for StarKeeper II NMS to begin monitoring this LCS60 If you are not ready for StarKeeper II NMS to begin monitoring this LCS60 for example you are populating the database in anticipation of deploying an LCS60 enter i Return At Method enter _h followed by Return to indicate that StarKeeper II NMS should use its host fiber interface to monitor the LCS60 At Dial string enter the area exchange name of the LCS60 entered in Step 5 followed by a carriage return e g mlkway earth morse Return that is the data switch call address that StarKeeper II NMS should use to mon itor the LCS60 At Password enter Return to use the default password
221. etwork elements sounjee4 The LCS60 supports the standard SNMP management information base MIB II Refer to RFC 1213 Supported Traps and MIBs The generic traps that are supported are 0 cold start 3 link up 2 link down 4 authentication failure Routing Information Protocol RIP The LCS60 supports RIP processing i e handling IP routing information through the use of routed routed maintains the route table used by IP to deter mine the interface through which to send packets The LCS60 enables the administrator to start and stop routed service separately using the lcsadm interface In addition the administrator can configure this ser vice to be started at boot time AppleTalk Protocol The AppleTalk network system was developed to provide a link independent architecture to connect Apple and non Apple network devices AppleTalk pro vides a simple peer to peer protocol which allows any network device to com municate with any other network device running AppleTalk software The LCS60 can be used as an AppleTalk router connecting the Ethernet LAN to a virtual AppleTalk network The virtual AppleTalk network created by the LCS60 permits as many as 120 remote AppleTalk devices to dial in over the data switch and connect to the AppleTalk internet The virtual network on the LCS60 supports a single network number and zone name Issue 3 1 7 LAN Protocols Figure 1 1 LCS60 as an AppleTalk Router on o
222. ferring to Figure 7 1 the string would be watson Any TCP g 2981 morse in nuucp word nuucpl123 Example UUCP Service Using NCR 4 0 To use socket service to initiate a uucp connection to a data switch connected host from an NCR on the LAN perform the following steps on the LAN connected NCR computer Aemaye y 1 Add the following entry to the etc uucp Systems file on the originating LAN connected NCR host host_name Any LCST g area exch host_name in nuucp word password host_name is the host name of the data switch connected host area and exch represent the area and exchange of the data switch to which host_name is connected 2 Add the following entry to the etc uucp Devices file on the originating LAN connected NCR host LCST tcp TLI x0002YYYY2ZZ22222Z lcst D YYYY is the port defined for socket service on the LCS60 in hex ZZZZZZZZ is the IP address of the LCS60 in hex and can be obtained by executing usr etc rfsaddr h 60name on the LCS60 At the prompt enter the IP address will be the eight rightmost hex digits 3 Add the following entry to the etc uucp Dialers file on the originating LAN connected NCR host lest d TION TION D Issue 3 7 17 Administration Routine administration of the LCS60 includes a variety of tasks related to the gateway services This section gives some examples of these tasks Refer to Chapter 8 for complete LCS60 administration Service
223. fferent from the LCS60 AppleTalk Network and zone via the Ethernet 3 If you will be using IPX obtain the IPX virtual network number Ethernet frame type and Ethernet network number The virtual network number must be different from the LCS60 IPX network via the Ethernet 4 2 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Enter the Icsadm interface Add the PPP service m Enter protocol from Config gt or config protocol from Top gt m Add tcpip Add atalk and ipx as required m Add ppp Define the PPP service sessions maxsessions m From the Config directory enter max or enter config maxsessions at the Top directory m Assign the number of sessions The total number of sessions through the LCS60 is 120 when PPP is configured Set up IP network security groups ipas Enter ipas at the Top gt Config gt prompt or config ipas at Top gt and follow the on screen instructions for configuring IP network security groups for the various workgroups required Refer to Screen 4 1 for an example Refer also to the Multiple IP Subnetworks section of Chapter 1 Screen 4 1 Configure IP Network Security Group Example 5 Nec Top gt Config gt ipas S CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES 1 Configure Display IP Network Security Groups 2 Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses
224. fies the request and the results as shown Request loglevel ReportOnly tracing e Results loglevel 3 TRACING ECHO The above display is generated in response to the command line atlog te Omitting both the d and t options reports the current specification for atlog FILES usr etc lcs atmgr usr etc atlog ust adm cs atmgr log the log file for the atlog requests SEE ALSO atping 1M Issue 3 E 1 ATNETSTAT 1M NAME ATNETSTAT atnetstat show AppleTalk network status SYNOPSIS atnetstat lt i r z gt nv one of i r or z is required DESCRIPTION The atnetstat command displays the contents of AppleTalk network related data structures to show the status of configured interfaces and routing tables known to the kernel level Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP routing module and of zone lists known to the atmgr process The interface i option displays the status of the configured network interfaces and remote virtual connections The configured network interfaces are of the type ETHERNET configured automatically by the atalkif process and of the type VIR TUAL configured by the atmgr process using the data provided by the atalkas command Remote virtual connections are of the type PPP and ARAP and use the VIRTUAL AppleTalk network The i option displays address range interface type Ipkts Opkts the address of the interface expressed as the network number and node net node the range of
225. fore you are allowed to add any other IP network security group When editing the uname IP network security group the ipas script prevents you from altering its name if you want to edit this attribute use the nodename script Any change in the UNIX node name is automatically applied to the uname IP network security group name and any of its associated reserved IP addresses You are not allowed to delete the uname IP network security group because other LCS60 services depend on its dkserver process being present Issue 3 1 15 sounjeo4 Multiple IP Subnetworks Figure 1 5 on o oO LL TAN A i Ny Incoming Call P addres ye privately administered on PC _ Was user Y lt ID specified on gt dialstring lt N Set user id to guest hee _ D option on dialstring pe Y IP Address Assignment A lt ls this gt lt IP address out gt Y gt of range See N Error IP address Nis not correct_ TS this ie K Ea SSi Error IP address lt IPaddress gt Se ee is not available N Y Error IP address N is reserved_ p Ts this N lt IP address reserved lt q z Grant gt requested IP SE _ address z SK J Search for reserved IP address with IP Network security group name and user ID name eS _7 Fida reserved IP gt N
226. g to the data switch network through the CPM HS This condition should be detected as a TX HANG error unless the administrator has dis abled stall detection by modifying dkhs tunable parameters Try manually restarting the interface gt a 3 l D o w e dkhs0 Interface Restarted This message indicates the interface has automatically restarted after a previ ously detected error NOTICE dkhs0 Hardware Reset Failed This message indicates that an attempt to reset the board by means of the dkmaint command has failed If an error message is received the administrator should check the CPM HS module hardware and fiber link connections and execute the dkmaint com mand to reset the interface Issue 3 8 43 Cc BS 5 O lt Error Messages Server Error Messages When communications between the LCS60 and the data switch are interrupted the server detects the problem and prints the following error message on the host console e E a E BE The Server for servername is having problems Please get someone to attend to it The last error was date dkmgr Unable to contact CommKit for Server servername 2 eke ee awe F F F t F F F BE m servername is the name of the server reporting the problem The server name must be defined in the data switch node database m date is the date time process ID and channel number of the problem This has the fo
227. gin authentication such as login password prompts from the NAC and sends the LCS60 dialstring in response to the Lucent Technologies data switch DESTINATION prompt The hangup script will terminate the PPP connection and hang up the modem Tem plates for these scripts are supplied with the package a sample is shown in Screen F 2 Issue 3 F 9 PPP Service Examples Screen F 2 Sample LCS60 dialup scr a comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment comment Me send send AT amp F amp C0O cr pause 1000 send send AT amp Q5N1DT 5551212 cr pause 10000 poll physical open pause 14000 comment Cc send janedoe cr 2 comment 90 comment For most situations a 4 second pause should suffice for the remote E comment system to respond with a password prompt Change if necessary pause 1000 re define temp receive 3000 Password oO has temp Password 5 send output password please input cr comment comment For most situations a 2 second pause should suffice for the remote comment system to respond to your password Change if necessary comment You must change the phone number username and password If you change a modem comm
228. gned in the same manner The following parameters can be set with ifconfig broadcast addr Internet Address family only Identify the address to be used for broad casts to the network The default broadcast address is the interface address with a host part as identified by the subnet mask of all 1 s This setting affects only the broadcast address for transmitted packets addresses of all 0 s and all 1 s are both recognized as broadcasts on incom ing packets down Mark an interface as being down No messages will be transmitted through an interface that is down If possible the interface will be reset to disable reception as well This action does not automatically disable routes using the interface hostgroups Display the multicast host groups to which the interface currently belongs join addr Join a multicast host group Packets to the multicast address addr will be accepted by the interface Joining any individual multicast host group will also automatically join the all hosts multicast group with address 244 0 0 1 leave addr Leave a multicast host group Packets to the multicast address addr will no longer be accepted by the interface Leaving all other individual multicast host groups will also automatically leave the all hosts multicast group with address 244 0 0 1 E 19 IFCONFIG 1M IFCONFIG metric n Set the routing metric of the interface to n the default metric is zero Higher metrics have the effe
229. gnized by UNIX By default carriage return stripping is on debug Toggle debug mode When debug mode is on each FIP protocol com mand sent to the remote server will be displayed preceded by the string gt By default debug mode is off delete remote file Delete the file remote file on the remote host dir rfile Ifile options rfile Ifile List the current working directory or the specified rfile file or directory on the remote host Specified options are supplied to the remote list command for example the UNIX Is command or the VMS dir command The list can be displayed on the standard output device or placed in the specified Ifile local file disconnect A synonym for close FTP 1 FTP form format Set the vertical format control for ASCII and EBCDIC file transfers to for mat Valid formats are carriage control non print default and telnet Only the non print format is currently supported get remote file local file Retrieve the specified remote file and store it on the local host If local file is not specified the local file will be named remote file File transfer uses the current settings for type format mode and structure glob Toggle local file name globbing With globbing disabled all local files and pathnames are treated literally With file name globbing enabled each local file or pathname is processed for the sh 1 metacharacters An additional pair of metacharacters may en
230. gt prompt to run the self test firmware diagnostics This will list all tests and status e g PASSED as it runs A partial example is shown below Oo Wa k ra Cc 197 Diag gt st Ke ECDM REGS Register CHECKS 053 wets alacant ve ceices Stee eS eee Running gt PASSED E ECDM CHKGEN Checkbit Generation Running PASSED Fas ECDM CHKRAM Checkbit DRAM Test Running gt PASSED S ECDM SBEC SPE GCOnbrol OPTIONS veu aE ak wh Running gt PASSED ECDM SBEP SBE Permutations ss rrasa ala aioe a E Running BYPASS ECDM DBEG DBE Control Optlons ec s ccate a acess spe ape eee Running gt PASSED ECDM DBE DBE Permubat Tons kose ktu lay ae eevee Wee Ya ae Running gt BYPASS ECDM INLTCK INIT Function CHECK y seve eects eaves weane e Running gt PASSED ECDM 12C I2C Bus Interface Check os s4cccs ed aes Running gt PASSED BSW REGS Register CHECKS crecer riknir aoe es Running gt PASSED BSW TMRIAs Timer T COUNnCeGR oie s ix cs dea gets is dues AA Running gt PASSED i ff Use the sd command to return to the debugger prompt and then reboot as shown 9 24 Issue 3 Processor Diagnostics MVME197 197 Diag gt sd 197 Bug gt bo 0 0 VMEDKHS Diagnostics After configuring the CPM HS module if a connection problem is encountered the screen below will be displayed NOTICE DKHSO Interface is down TX HAN
231. haracters They may contain letters numbers dashes and underscores Report Fields The following report fields are found in the LCS60 reports generated by the status commands e g show trace etc The report fields are listed according to the directory in which they are generated Session Directory Show ARAP Top gt Session gt show arap Sesid Session ID number Xmit Bytes Number of bytes transmitted gt 2 40 9p i 2 G 8 Issue 3 Glossary Xmit Pkts Recv Bytes Recv Pkts Recv Errs CRC BadF Rej ReXmts Show SLIP Number of packets transmitted Number of bytes received Number of packets received Indicates a checksum error for the received PPP frame Indicates the number of invalid frames received Indicates the number of duplicate or out of sequence frames rejected Number of re transmissions this is seen with the v option When the connection is idle this represents the continual keep alive signals therefore it is not ordinarily displayed Top gt Session gt show slip Sesid Name Mtu PriQ Vjslots Xmit Bytes Xmit Pkts Issue 3 Session ID number The name of the session This name will be the letter s followed by the data switch channel number The maximum transmit unit refer to the documentation for the SLIP package you are using Indicates if priority queuing is on YES or off NO refer to the documentation for the
232. haracters are ignored Enter the LCSADM system administration interface by entering Icsadm at the root prompt Figure 3 2 initsetup initsetup gt new installation or reinstallion nodename assign a name to the LCS60 i datetime set date timezone and time set software key to activate moftwarekey LCS60 services Caution 3 4 Only one system administrator at a time should be using Icsadm to configure the LCS60 Use the csadm interface for all system administration do not attempt to adjust individual configuration database files in any other way If you attempt to execute any of the configuration commands while another administrator is executing Config commands the following message will be displayed Issue 3 Initial Setup WARNING lcsadm configuration is already in progress Continuing can cause catastrophic results Do you want to continue y n Step 7 The Icsadm interface takes you into a hierarchical system of directories and commands For example Screen 3 1 Screen 3 1 LCS60 Top Directory sysV68 Top gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config help manager ports quit service session start stop A na ep D ie o z S o Note The machine name shown in Screen 3 1 as sys V68 appears at the beginning of the Top gt prompt The sysV68 will be replaced by the no
233. hat a command works only if the FTP server on the remote host supports it Use rhelp to see which requests the remote server recognizes The mget and mdelete commands should be used with caution Specifying a directory where a plain file name is expected could produce unex pected results For example the ftp command Is l file will put a long directory listing of the current working directory into file instead of returning a long listing of that file SEE ALSO chmod 1 umask 1 E 18 Issue 3 IFCONFIG IFCONFIG 1M NAME ifconfig configure interface parameters SYNOPSIS ifconfig interface address_family address dest_address parameters DESCRIPTION Issue 3 The ifconfig command is used to display and modify the configuration of a net work interface Only the superuser can modify an interface configuration Interface is the name assigned to the interface in the network configuration file inetinit cf 4 When no other parameters are supplied ifconfig displays the current configuration of the specified network interface The only address family currently supported is the DARPA Internet family inet The interface address is initially set to the Internet address of the host name assigned to the interface in the inetinit cf 4 file It can be changed by specifying either a host name see named 1M or hosts 4 or an Internet address see inet 3 The destination address for a point to point interface can be assi
234. he com mand output in the named file filename The statistics can be generated for all occurrences of the named service type or individually by session ID sesid Service types are tcpasy TCP to async asytcp async to TCP slip ppp and arap Arguments other than service type are optional Entering show without arguments will display statistics for all sessions When specifying ppp as the service type the ip link atalk ipx and all options are available to show IP link 8 8 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface AppleTalk or IPX configuration information or all for the specified session ID When ppp is specified without a session ID the ip atalk link and ipx options are available to show IP AppleTalk link or IPX configuration informa tion for all sessions Example The following shows AppleTalk data for a PPP session a b Top gt Session gt show ppp 1 1 atalk LCS60 Point to Point Session ATALK Configuration Feb 6 14 04 45 Sesid State Server Info k BAM 3 opened LOCAL Addr 2010 1 Class 1 AT Comp none Zone Research Lab Imp ID V1 1 Route Proto none Router 2010 1 Name morse Broadcast Supp none PEER Addr 2010 118 Class 0 AT Comp none Z Zone Research Lab Imp ID Route Proto none 3 Router 2010 1 Name Broadcast Supp none e Top gt Session gt Re J E a ped ot e Name trace Synopsis trace nv w filename service type sesid Description The trace command gives tr
235. hernet by another router and will dynamically acquire a unique AppleTalk node address within the assigned network number range a gt x This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to configure the virtual AppleTalk network and zone which are used by lt ppp arap gt for dynamic allocation of x AppleTalk Addresses Since one or more of these services is currently configured ATALKAS must be configured CONFIGURE ADDRESS AND ZONE FOR APPLETALK VIRTUAL NETWORK 1 Configure Address and Zone Name 2 Display Address and Zone Name 3 Delete Address and Zone Name NS x 3 18 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup 5 Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt 1 x The AppleTalk virtual network has not yet been configured Enter the network number for the LCS60 interface to the AppleTalk network This must be a number between 1 and 65279 and must NOT be equal to any other network number in use in the AppleTalk network and must not be contained within any other network number range in use in the AppleTalk network Type q to quit gt 2010 Enter the zone name to be used by AppleTalk nodes that use the virtual network The name may contain no more than 32 characters Type q to quit or for help gt Research Lab You have entered VIRTUAL NETWORK NUMBER 2010 VIRTUAL NODE NUMBER 1 pe VIRTUAL NETWORK ZONE NAME Resear
236. host network packets SYNOPSIS iftrace gdpbhrtn f diskfile i count keywords DESCRIPTION iftrace allows the super user to trace packets at the interface level The traced packets may be those received sent or both A filtering facility is provided to dis card broadcast packets b to select received r and or transmitted t packets as well as to filter packets based upon keywords Packets may be captured to a disk file or displayed as captured The default display decodes as much of the datagram s protocol as possible Currently only DOD IP and AppleTalk datagram protocols are supported in this manner All other datagram types are captured and displayed in a hexadecimal dump format The options have the following meaning g Get packets This option primes the driver for packet capture The r t b options specify the capture filter p Print packets This option displays the captured packets If used with the g option the packets are displayed as they are captured Without g the display comes from the disk file r Set capture filter to receive This option is only valid with g get pack ets The default is to capture transmit and receive packets Specifica tion of either r or t will reset default filter t Set capture filter to transmit This option is only valid with g get packets The default is to capture transmit and receive packets Specifi cation of either r or t will reset defa
237. hosts 4 networks 4 protocols 4 services 4 SEE ALSO Issue 3 named 1M route 1M routed 1M E 29 NSLOOKUP 1 NSLOOKUP NAME nslookup query name servers SYNOPSIS nslookup host server nslookup server DESCRIPTION Nslookup is a program that queries DARPA Internet domain name servers If called with a host name or address as the first argument nslookup will print the name and Internet address of that host If called with no arguments or a hyphen as the first argument nslookup will enter interactive mode enabling the user to query the name server for information about various hosts and domains The optional second argument specifies the name or address of a specific name server to be used for the search COMMANDS E 30 The following commands are available when nslookup is run in interactive mode Commands may be interrupted at any time using the terminal interrupt character Commands must contain fewer than 80 characters NOTE Unrecognized commands are interpreted as a host name host server Request information about host using the current default server or using server server if it is specified The type of information returned is identi fied by the query command the default type returned is the host s name and address exit Terminate interactive mode and return to the shell finger user gt l gt gt file Connect with the finger server on the current host see finger 1 The f
238. iber cables are not intended for use in air handling ceiling areas unless installed in approved conduit When installing the cable avoid tight pulls or tugs against sharp corners of framework If cables are to be installed around sharp edges of cabinetry or framework cover the edges with split tubing or similar material Observe the minimum bending radius and maximum pulling tension specifications when routing the dual optical fiber cables When lacing or securing the cable use flat lacing twine or cable ties and do not tie the cable too tightly or microbending losses may occur Bundles of cables should not hang or protrude into the work space Wrap the cables in loops not less than 6 inches in diameter The optical fiber cable is not designed for conduit installation but can be installed in conduit if Issue 3 2 19 Installing the LCS60 m Cables are placed in a single conduit having not less than 34 inch inner diameter m The pull force on an optical fiber cable does not exceed 50 pounds per cable Optical fiber cables should not be pulled through more than four 90 degree bends if more than four such bends are required provide intermediate help points The minimum recommended conduit bend radius is 4 inches Under no circumstances should the cable be pulled around a sharp corner such as a junction box connection Pulling tension during conduit installation can be minimized by D 5 L m Having the cable enter
239. ice In response to the DESTINATION prompt on the terminal device enter the name created for the LCS60 console This step can be done from any ter minal displaying a DESTINATION prompt Maintain proper security pre cautions to guard against unauthorized or accidental usage Continue with the Connecting Fiber Interface section Figure 2 4 System Console Connections through a Data Switch Asynchronous Terminal Data Switch DCE Console Port Asynchronous LGU Port 2 16 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Connection through Modems To connect an asynchronous terminal or PC to the LCS60 for use as a system con sole by means of modems refer to Figure 2 5 and follow the steps below 1 Option Serial Port 1 to emulate DTE operation Refer to the section Serial Port Optioning earlier in this chapter 2 Connect the LCS60 rear panel connector labeled Serial Port 1 to an asyn chronous terminal by means of modems using straight through RS 232 cabling Modems must operate asynchronously at 9600 bps 3 Power up the system console and set options as directed in Table 2 4 4 Continue with the Connecting Fiber Interface section Figure 2 5 System Console Connections through Modems Asynchronous Terminal Modem Modem
240. id seven bit characters When enabled telnet will not strip the high order bit facilitating communi cation with hosts using an 8 bit character set such as the European or Asian character set The 8 command line option also enables 8 bit mode escape c Change the telnet escape character to the given c The default escape char acter is the tilde Control characters should be specified as followed by a single letter for example control X is X The e command line option also changes the escape character help command command Display a list of telnet commands no arguments or a description of the specified command linemode Toggle line mode When disabled default each character is transmitted as it is entered When enabled the local host will buffer all characters until a carriage return line feed sequence is entered at which time the entire line is transmitted localecho Toggle the local echo mode When disabled default the remote TELNET server echoes input When enabled the local tty driver echoes characters as they are input negotiate command option Negotiate TELNET options over an open connection The options negotia tions follow the loop preventing rules defined in the RFC 854 specifica tions For a detailed description of the options see the TELNET specifica tions RFC 854 861 When command and option are specified telnet will negotiate that option and return to the command or input mode prompt
241. ify an alternate FTP server it can be the actual port number or the service name If autologin is enabled default ftp will also attempt to automatically log the user in prompt Toggle interactive prompting Interactive prompting occurs during multi ple file transfers to allow the user to selectively retrieve or store files it is turned on by default If prompting is turned off any mget or mput will transfer all specified files E 14 Issue 3 FTP FTP 1 proxy ftp cmd Execute an FTP command on a secondary control connection This com mand enables you to open simultaneous connections to two FIP servers and transfer files between them instead of between the local client and a server The original FTP connection is called the primary control connec tion the connection made through the proxy command is called the secon dary control connection The server on the secondary connection must support the FTP protocol command PASV The first proxy command should be open to establish the secondary connection The proxy command will display the list of commands that can be used on the secondary connection The following FTP commands behave differently when executed as proxy commands the open command will not define new macros dur ing auto login the close command will not erase existing macro definitions the get and mget commands will transfer files from the primary server to the secondary server the put mput and append commands will tra
242. ignored depending on the action specified in config file see ifstat conf A For instance the config file m376 tells ifstat to append the controller number to the device name A user issuing the command ifstat m376 would by default get statistics from the MVME376 driver for controller 0 The command ifstat m376 1 would get statistics from controller 1 The maximum length of the config file parameter is 128 characters The maximum length of the cntrlr num parameter is 8 characters The caller may issue the following options on the ifstat command line a All statistics Display all possible statistics for the requested driver ifstat simply looks for the all version of the config file specified on the command line or the config file ifstat found if none are specified The resulting display typically exceeds the screen length so this option should not normally be used with the f option d Difference counts Display the differences between the current stats and the previous stats during each display iteration This option is used in conjunc tion with f Certain tagged statistics in the config file are unaffected by this option i e they are not counters and therefore always show the same value f Forever option Cumulative statistics displayed every five seconds until the user sends an interrupt signal to the program If the screen becomes garbled the user may send a quit signal to the program and ifstat will clear the screen on th
243. imeout Option An inactivity timeout option can be enabled for Async to TCP telnet and tcpsock services This option allows the administrator to place constraints on user ses sions that remain inactive for long periods of time When enabled this option will terminate all sessions that meet or exceed the inactivity timeout value The value is the number of consecutive minutes i e 1 1440 1 day that elapse without any activity This option applies to all users requesting this service To enable this option edit the etc opt dk srvtab telnet file for telnet and or the etc opt dk srvtab tcpsock file for tcpsock by adding the Iminutes option An exam ple of editing the telnet file to set a 60 minute timeout 160 is shown below System Service Flag User Program Initial Parms k telnet R root usr etc lcs ftslisten ftslisten v6 Stelnet I60 g f m c u u p Issue 3 7 9 Access to Gateway Services Dialstrings Aemaye y Access to Gateway Services Dialstrings Return to DESTINATION Option The LCS60 can be configured to drop the telnet connection if the host to which the user is trying to telnet is unavailable Without this feature trying to reach an unavailable host would result in putting the user at the telnet gt prompt and could possibly allow unauthorized connection to other LAN hosts With this feature enabled the connection is taken down completely if the host is unavail able To enable
244. ing package information Executing preremove script Updating etc ttysrch Saving usr etc default route usr etc inetinit cf usr etc snmpd cf usr etc pppd conft usr etc tlid conft etc lcs lcm_sess cf etc lcs tcpags cf etc lcs ipas cf etc lcs bootptab etc lcs atalkas cf etc networks etc netmasks etc lescfg boot etc hosts etc opt dk directory Removing pathnames in lt none gt class e Updating system information o Oo Cc Cc oD pr Cc Removal of lt lcs60 gt was successful x x IMPORTANT NOTICE If removal of all desired packages is complete the machine should be rebooted in order to ensure sane operation Execute the shutdown command with the appropriate options and wait for the Console Login prompt S p 9 14 Issue 3 Removing the LCS60 Application Software Note Although the file usr etc pppd conf is saved when an R1 0 or R2 0 package is removed it is not needed for R3 0 and will not be reloaded when you load R3 0 Upgrade To upgrade an existing R1 0 or R2 0 LCS60 to R3 0 you will need an LCS60 R3 0 Application Tape tape 3 of 3 To perform the upgrade 1 As root from the Console login stop all services lcsadm stop all 2 Determine if you have any patches on R1 0 or R2 0 by executing the pkginfo command as shown in the example below C gt pkginfo 1 lcs60p PKGINST lcs60p NAME LCS60 R1 0 Official Maintenance Patch 2 Cu
245. inger command must be preceded by a successful host address query see set query A The output can be redirected to a file in the usual manner with gt and gt gt help Print a brief summary of commands Is al h domain gt gt gt file List the name and address of each host in the specified domain The a option lists the name and alias of each host in the domain The h option lists the name CPU and operating system of each host in the domain The output can be redirected in the usual manner with gt and gt gt If redirection is used a hash mark is printed for every 50 records received from the server Issue 3 NSLOOKUP Issue 3 NSLOOKUP 1 quit Terminate interactive mode and return to the shell Quit is an alias for exit root Change the default server to the server for the root of the domain name space The default root server is nic ddn mil Root is a synonym for the command Iserver nic ddn mil The name of the root server can be changed with the set root command server host Iserver host Change the default server to host The Iserver command uses the initial server to look up information about host while the server command uses the current default server If an authoritative answer cannot be found the names of servers that might have the answer are returned set keyword value This command is used to change state information that affects the searches The keywords can be abbreviated as long a
246. ion 2 All automatic disk configuration options 3 Manual disk configuration 4 Read the disk configuration from the disk s Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 Return Final Verification of 1 disk installation BOOT COMMAND bo 0 0 Device Disk description Format Space Left m197_c0d0 1GB SCSI SEAGATE No 1073402 Partition Slice Size FS Block Size m197_c0d0s0 58000 ufs 4K swap m197_c0d0s1 300000 stand m197_c0d0s2 25000 bfs asr m197_c0d0s3 360000 ufs 4K var m197_c0d0s4 120000 ufs 4K home m197_c0d0s5 100000 ufs 4K tftpboot m197_c0d0s6 22000 5 2K 1 Proceed with installation using configuration shown 2 Change file system type and return to this screen 3 Change disk formatting and return to this screen 4 Change slice size and return to this screen Enter option number of choice 1 4 1 3 Final Verification of 1 disk installation BOOT COMMAND bo 0 0 Device Disk description Format Space Left m197_c0d0 1GB SCSI SEAGATE Yes 1073402 Partition Slice Size FS Block Size m197_c0d0s0 58000 ufs 4K swap m197_c0d0s1 300000 B stand m197_c0d0s2 25000 bfs usr m197_c0d0s3 360000 ufs 4K var m197_c0d0s4 120000 ufs 4K home m197_c0d0s5 100000 ufs 4K tftpboot m197_c0d0s6 22000 s5 2K 1 Proceed with installation using configuration shown 2 Change file system type and return to this screen 3 Change disk formatting and return to this screen 4 Change slice size and return to this screen
247. ion can be used to ping a local host through an interface that has no route for example after the interface was dropped by routed 1M The v option causes ping to display a message any time an ICMP packet other than an ECHO_RESPONSE is received DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination SEE ALSO E 34 netstat 1 ifconfig 1M Issue 3 PULL PULL 1C NAME pull transfer files from another system SYNOPSIS pull L destination filename directory DESCRIPTION pull establishes a data switch circuit to a source remote host named in destination and transfers files from that host The filenames are files or directories on the source machine and are interpreted relative to the user s HOME directory on the source destination if they do not begin with a The filenames are placed in the directory on the target local machine If the directory does not begin with a it is interpreted relative to the current direc tory The directory will be created if required before the files are transferred Specifying a directory as one of the filenames will transfer the entire directory tree beginning at the named point pull preserves the file modes and modification times of the files it moves The ori ginal file owner numeric user ID is preserved if the effective user ID of the pro cess on the local machine is root otherwise the files will be owned by the current
248. ions such as telnet rlogin etc and yields better response time The queue is located between the IP protocol and the data switch there fore priority queueing only affects datagrams flowing from the LCS60 to the data switch Specifies whether echo requests are disabled 0 and the time to discon nect N where N is a number greater than 3 By default the LCS60 will send out an echo request every 60 seconds over each PPP connection to check that each link is up After three minutes if there is no echo reply received from the client the LCS60 will hang up the connection The three minute wait is configurable by specifying the number of minutes desired In the screen above the e option has been used to specify a six minute wait before hang up Note Three minutes is the minimum allowed time to disconnect If you specify a time less than three minutes the system will main tain the three minute time to disconnect Specifies that the user be assigned an IP address dynamically rather than use a reserved IP address provided a negotiable IP address has been administered in the client software package Without the D option the reserved IP address for the user if any exist is assigned Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service u Identifies the user either user name or numeric ID for whom the IP address is requested This is not required when a NAC is used C When connecting using IPX the C option is use
249. ipas Skip the steps that have been completed pre viously Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Note The user should familiarize him herself with all aspects of the LCS60 PPP service For details including a description of Multiple IP Subnet works refer to Chapter 1 After configuring the LCS60 as described under Initial Setup in Chapter 3 per form the steps shown in Figure 4 2 to configure the LCS60 PPP Service Figure 4 2 Configuring PPP Service for IP IPX and AppleTalk For TCP IP config protocol obtain virtual gt tepip atalk NIP address y PPP ipx lt ForiPX N obtain virtual er ork number j For A pleTalie Seer sees maxsessions ipas m atalkas network number Nand Z ne name srvsetup etherif ipx ANN x configure clien start all side of PPP y N service 1 Obtain the Ethernet IP address for the LCS60 and an IP network address for each IP network security group At least one IP address in addition to the Ethernet address is required for SLIP and PPP service in order to configure the physical connection used for SLIP PPP These IP network addresses must be different from the LCS60 s Ethernet internet address 2 Ifyou will be using AppleTalk obtain the AppleTalk virtual network number and zone name The network number and zone must be di
250. isconnected the following error message will be displayed WARNING e1lx7 transmit packet dropped carrier sense loss on controller 0 TDR problem at 405 3 meters WARNING elx7 transmit problem found by TDR for on board ethernet controller 0 Outgoing Call Error Messages The following are error messages that may appear when placing an outgoing call through the CommKit Host Interface Error codes from the data switch node are interpreted by the CommKit Host Interface software and a descriptive message is printed at the terminal For example consider the following entry and error message dkcu mlkway earth morse dkdial Can t connect to mlkway earth morse rl vx dk_errno 4 Destination not recognized This indicates the destination does not exist or the network does not allow the host access to the destination The error messages are described below m Access denied The call was denied by the remote server or network security This error can also occur if this host attempted to set up a server but the data switch control computer database is not prepared to accept such a setup from this Issue 3 C 1 m 3 12 z D n n pad co D n dp Q oy i dp O LU Outgoing Call Error Messages C 2 host This can be caused by 1 The server name is not defined in the data switch control computer database 2 The name is not assigned to a group 3 The group i
251. isplay Software Certificate and Software Key Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt q g Issue 3 Note You must have the appropriate key to activate the features on your LCS60 The R1 key will activate gateway services and the IP protocol feature R2 activates the R1 features and the AppleTalk protocol feature and the R3 key will activate all R2 features and the IPX protocol After completing the steps in initsetup you must complete the configuration of your LCS60 by adding the protocols and services you will be using Refer to the sections Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup and Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP below to complete the configuration of your LCS60 The individual configuration commands are listed in Table 3 1 These com mands may be run individually from the Top gt Config gt prompt or as part of the srvsetup command as noted in Table 3 1 Initial Setup Table 3 1 Protocol and Services Commands Service Command Notes Define protocols services protocol srvsetup Configure the Ethernet Interface etherif srvsetup Set the default route dftroute dftroute Configure the Domain Name Resolver dns dns Configure the SNMP Agent snmp snmp Define the maximum LCS60 maxsessions srvsetup and gateway service sessions Configure IPX virtual and ethernet addresses for PPP sessions ipx srvsetup Chap 4 Configure virtual network for SLIP srvsetup an
252. ith a port number to temporarily disable a particular port from service or temporarily enable a particular port These commands require root permission More than one port number can be specified on the command line Name flush Synopsis flush port Description This command resets TCP service port statistics for the individual ports This command requires root permission gt Q 3 Name show Synopsis show c v w filename port A o Description The show command gives TCP service port statistics about a port state service type port resets Output canbe written to a file filename using the w option Port statistics can be shown individually by specifying a port number port The c option displays configuration statistics including service type nohup 2way SID status and PDDs The v flag gives a verbose output Entering show without arguments will display statistics for all ports Name summary Synopsis summary Description This command summarizes the service port information Issue 3 including number of ports configured and in use Icsadm Interface Name update Synopsis update Description This command updates the TCP service port configuration table This command requires root permission Service Directory Commands The Service directory Screen 8 4 provides a method for obtaining current status of configured services as well as enable disable commands Screen 8 4 Service Directory
253. ities even permit a brand new LCS60 to be substituted with no loss of functionality for one that has been catastrophically damaged see the section Reload System Software in Chapter 9 Note Release 1 or 2 backups cannot be used on Release 3 systems The backup and restore operations can be accessed as shown in Figure 8 8 or by entering backup from the Config directory Issue 3 8 25 Cc 2 5 O lt Backup and Restore Operations Screen 8 8 LCS60 Backup and Restore Configuration Menu a gt lcsadm config backup LCS60 BACKUP AND RESTORE CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Backup restore variable files locally or to a remote server 2 Backup restore server operations and administration Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for HELP gt Re ws Generic vs Variable Files To use the backup and restore capabilities of the LCS60 most effectively to pro tect your system against accidental damage or corruption depends on under standing the difference between generic and variable files The hard disk of each LCS60 stores both kinds of files Generic files are the same on every LCS60 and never change For example executable programs such as lesadm are generic files whereas the TCP IP configuration file etc hosts is a variable file In case of system damage or corruption generic files can be recovered by reins talling the three generic tapes that are delivered with each LCS60 see
254. ity Group Edit an IP Network Security Group Display all IP Network Security Groups BwWN Ee Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 Enter an IP Network Security Group name q to quit for help gt Techs Enter an Internet network address q to quit gt 154 12 25 gt Is 154 12 25 0 divided into subnets ly n y Enter number of mask bits for this subnet for help q for quit gt 8 x New IP Network Security Group Techs Configuration is Me ZH 3 16 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup d 5 KKK Class B IP Address 154 12 25 Network Mask 255 0255 255 0 Is this correct Enter y n gt y IP NETWORK SECURITY GROUP MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add an IP Network Security Group Delete an IP Network Security Group Edit an IP Network Security Group Display all IP Network Security Groups BwWNEeE Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Configure Display IP Network Security Groups 2 Configure Display Reserved IP Addresses Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 2 RESERVED IP ADDRESSES FOR SLIP AND PPP SERVICES Add Reserved IP Address Delete Reserved IP Address 3 Edit Reserved IP Address 4 Display Reserved IP Address ep D ie o z
255. k Access Password prompt appears only if the password option is set Echoing is turned off when the password is entered Issue 3 8 39 Cc BS ca 5 ze lt Network Access Password Option Deleting the Network Access Password Use the userdel at the root prompt to delete the network access password For example to delete the user id nap enter userdel nap Changing the Network Access Password To change an existing network access password use the passwd command at the root prompt and enter the new password as directed Refer to the screen below passwd nap New password password Re enter new password password Note The password will not echo on the screen The new password will become effective immediately Status The system administrator can query the LCS60 to obtain process fiber and Eth ernet interface status at any time using the command statlcs t An example is shown below 8 40 Issue 3 Status J k LCS60 STATUS REPORT Ethernet interface status Interface to en0 is UP Data Switch status Fiber Interface to data switch is UP Process status ipxd is UP sapd is UP routed is UP snmpd is UP tlid is UP inetinit is UP lcm is UP dkdaemon is UP morse is UP IP Network Security Group Techs is UP IP Network Security Group Library is UP IP Network Security Group atmgr is UP Ne P Note Ifdkdaemon is DOWN you must stop dkh
256. k Network Zone atalkas network This is a number between 1 and 65279 It must not be equal to any number other network number in use in the AppleTalk network and must not be contained within any other network number range in use in the AppleTalk network esso Issue 3 G 3 gt 2 99 i 2 Glossary zone name The name of the virtual AppleTalk network Although an AppleTalk zone name may contain any 8 bit character listed in Table D 1 of Inside AppleTalk Second Edition the only characters that may be entered as the zone name for the LCS60 virtual AppleTalk net work are the printable 7 bit ASCII characters The valid characters are the SPACE character all punctuation marks digits and upper case and lower case letters SPACE characters that precede the first non space character are ignored All other SPACE characters are retained Invalid characters include all control characters including the hor izontal TAB the DELETE character and all 8 bit ASCII characters Ethernet Interface etherif interface address interface alias interface name network aliases network name subnet ted net work G 4 Specify the internet address The interface must have a unique inter net address All hosts sharing the same network must have identical network portions in the internet addresses For example 154 12 21 5 is a valid host address on network 154 12 21 The internet address for the inte
257. ket loss and errored packets statistics are displayed just before ipxping exits DIAGNOSTICS FILES Exit status is zero for normal terminations a positive number for error termina tions usr etc ipxping usr etc ipxnetstat SEE ALSO Issue 3 Novell NetWare Link Services Protocol Specification Version 1 0 Chapter 2 E 27 NETSTAT 1 NETSTAT NAME netstat show network status SYNOPSIS netstat AainrsSv p protocol interval DESCRIPTION E 28 The netstat command symbolically displays the contents of network related data structures to show the status of active connections default configured interfaces routing tables network statistics STREAMS buffer allocation failures and packet traffic The effect of pertinent options will be described in the discussion of each type of status display Wherever they are included in a status display local and remote address formats are of the form host port or network port The latter format is used if a transport endpoint s address specifies a network but no specific host address The symbolic names of host network and port will be displayed wherever available from the name server named 1M and the network databases hosts 4 networks 4 and ser vices 4 The domain names will be stripped from the host and network names If the symbolic name for an address cannot be determined the address will be displayed in the Internet dot notation see inet 3 Where a
258. left end facing the assembly Secure the LCS60 to the assembly using the four M6 x 12mm screws included with the Wall Mount Assembly Table Top Mounting The handles for the LCS60 are shipped in a separate package within the main shipping box Attach the handles to the front frame with the handles pointing away from the LCS60 using the four flat head machine screws Install the LCS60 on a stable surface with the required clearance as described pre viously under Space Requirements 2 8 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Connecting the System Console WARNING Connect and disconnect cables ONLY when the power is off The LCS60 uses a system console to run diagnostics receive error messages and for administration Configure the console as shown in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 System Console and Port Configuration L Baud Rate 9600 bps Flow Control XON XOFF a Data Bits 8 no parity D Stop Bits 1 D LocalEcho None full duplex The LCS60 has four serial RS 232 ports which can emulate asynchronous DTE or DCE Serial Port 1 is used for the LCS60 system console and operates at 9600 bps Ports 2 3 and 4 can be used to interface asynchronous terminals to the LCS60 UNIX System with Ports 2 and 3 providing 9600 bps operation and Port 4 providing 1200 bps operation The system console must be an asynchronous ASCII terminal or PC with terminal emulator We recommend using a system console with scr
259. m etherif srvsetup telnet _ e socket lt _ srvports directory gt start all 1 Enter the lcsadm interface 2 Add the gateway service m From the Config directory enter protocol or enter config protocol at the Top directory m Add tcpip as required m Add tcpasy and or asytcp as required 3 Define the Gateway service sessions maxsessions 7 2 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service m From the Config directory enter max or enter config maxsessions at the Top directory m Assign the number of sessions of each type for the gateway service tcpasy and asytcp The total number of sessions for all services is 120 if PPP SLIP or ARAP is configured If these services are not configured the total number of sessions is 500 4 Configure TCP to asynchronous gateway service ports srvports Note Up to 500 TCP service ports can be configured if the LCS60 is used for gateway service only The ports are identified by a number and can be customized with pre defined destinations PDDs disconnect options inactivity timers and other options For a complete description of all of the parameters refer to the Glossary Aemaye y m Enter srvports at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config srvports at the Top directory m Select 2 Add a service port m Enter a number in the range 1024 65535 m Assign a type of service to the port telnet for remote
260. m Enter max from Config or config maxsessions from the Top directory m Assign the number of ARAP sessions The total number of sessions is 120 when ARAP is configured 6 2 Issue 3 5 Configure the AppleTalk network zone atalkas m Enter atalkas at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config atalkas from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for setting up the AppleTalk network number and zone name Refer to Screen 6 1 Screen 6 1 Configure AppleTalk Virtual Network Example Va Nes Top gt Config gt atalkas CONFIGURE ADDRESS AND ZONE FOR APPLETALK VIRTUAL NETWORK 1 Configure Address and Zone Name 2 Display Address and Zone Name 3 Delete Address and Zone Name Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help x The AppleTalk virtual network has not yet been configured Enter the network number for the LCS60 interface to the AppleTalk network This must be a number between 1 and 65279 and must NOT be equal to any other network number in use in the AppleTalk network and must not be contained within any other network number range in use in the AppleTalk network Type q to quit gt 2010 Enter the zone name to be used by AppleTalk nodes that use the virtual network The name may contain no more than 32 characters Type q to quit or for help J gt Research Lab You have entered VIRTUAL NETWORK NUMBER 2010 VIRTUAL NODE NUMBER 1
261. m a host or gateway Because of the load it could impose on the network it is unwise to use ping during normal operations or from automated scripts When using ping for fault isolation first ping the local host to verify that the local network interface is up and running Then ping hosts and gateways farther and farther away to determine where a fault occurs ECHO REQUEST datagrams pings consist of IP and ICMP headers followed by a struct timeval and an arbitrary number of bytes to fill out the packet The default packet size is 64 bytes this may be changed by specifying an alternate packetsize on the command line The maximum packet size can be calculated by subtracting 48 bytes for the UDP and IP headers with options from the value of the tuneable parameter SOMOD_MSGSZ Ping sends one datagram per second and prints one line of output showing the round trip time for every ECHO_RESPONSE returned No output is produced if there is no response By default ping continues to send packets until it is killed If count is specified on the command line ping will send the specified number of ECHO REQUESTS and exit when all responses have been either received or assumed lost Summary round trip time and packet loss statistics are displayed just before ping exits The r option causes ping to bypass the normal routing tables and send datagrams directly to a host An error will be returned if the host is not on a directly attached network This opt
262. m followed by the current time ifstat then prints a blank line followed by the actual statistics A user should examine the MACIOC GETSTATS ioctl description in a correspond ing driver man page to ascertain the exact meaning of the statistics displayed from its configuration file A driver man page that does not describe the MACIOC GETSTATS ioctl does not support ifstat Not all drivers corresponding to the sec tion 7 man pages in the SEE ALSO section support ifstat etc ifstat conf SEE ALSO stty 1 curses 3X ifstat conf 4 terminfo 4 dlce 7 e1x7 7 ip 7 lo 7 m385 7 ppp 7 slip 7 DIAGNOSTICS E 22 ifstat displays the requested statistics then exits with a 0 status If ifstat does not terminate normally it displays an error message to stderr and returns a non zero exit status as follows 1 Errors were found in the command line arguments 2 config file does not exist 3 Failed to open the ip device to get interfaces 4 SIOCGIFCONF get interfaces ioctl to ip failed Issue 3 IFSTAT IFSTAT 1M No ifstat supporting driver found via ip Failed to open config file Device line format bad in config file Action in device line of config file bad o ON DBD A Code format bad in config file 10 Failed to initialize terminal for curses 11 Failed to open device specified in config file 12 MACIOC GETSTATS get statistics ioctl to driver failed Issue 3 E 23 IFTRACE 1M IFTRACE NAME iftrace trace
263. mand_logic Command Logic Test Successful CCO gt diag cpm 11 TEST TYPE command_logic module_reset local_loop remote_loop module_reset 90 08 18 13 47 40 NODE NODENAME M diagnose cpm 11 module_reset Module Reset Test Successful o 1 Cc Cc oD pr fam a CCO gt diag cpm 11 TEST TYPE command_logic module_reset local_loop remote_loop local_loop Replace the fiber optic link connection on the paddle board with a loop around connector 9 26 Issue 3 VMEDKHS Diagnostics D This task must be performed within 60 seconds Type yes To Continue no To Stop Command CONTINUE TESTING yes no yes yes 90 08 18 13 47 57 NODE NODENAME M diagnose cpm 11 local_loop DIAGNOSTIC EXITS CCO gt diag cpm 11 TEST TYPE command_logic module_reset local_loop remote_loop remote_loop Ask the host computer administrator to replace the fiber optic link connection on the FIB paddle board with a loop around connector This task must be performed within 60 seconds Type yes To Continue no To Stop Command CONTINUE TESTING yes no yes yes 90 08 18 13 48 10 NODE NODENAME M diagnose cpm 11 remote_loop DIAGNOSTIC EXITS CCO gt res cpm 11 CCO gt display conn mod 11 y Note A message stating UNIX Server Dead may appear ignore this message and continue m Restore the CPM HS to service as shown in Screen 9 7 res cpm m Verify that the CPM HS is active as show
264. mulative CATEGORY system utilities ARCH m88k VERSION R1 0 Bld24 P2 VENDOR AT amp T LC PSTAMP R1 0 Bld24 P2 03 24 95 13 31 40 INSTDATE June 19 1995 03 55 STATUS completely installed FILES 15 installed pathnames 15 shared pathnames 10 executables 1 setuid setgid executables 7943 blocks used approx e Zs The line NAME on the screen above will indicate if there is a patch z D 5 o gt 5 D O 4 3 Ifyou have a patch remove it first by entering pkgrm Ics60p If no patch is installed you will received the following message Error information for lcs60p was not found Issue 3 9 15 Q 1 Cc Cc oD ca Upgrade 4 Remove the R1 0 or R2 0 LCS60 software as described in the section Removing the LCS60 Application Software earlier in this chapter page 9 13 Note The removal screen for the different releases will be similar but not identical to the screen shown in Figure 9 5 5 Install the R3 0 LCS60 application software as described in the section LCS60 Application Software Installation earlier in this chapter page 9 9 Note In order to activate R3 0 features you must have an R3 0 software key Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on the software key Remote Upgrade To upgrade many R2 0 or later LCS60s to release 3 0 or later the local tape drive need only be used to install the upgrade release on a single R2 0 or R3 0 LCS60 the remote upgr
265. n 2 27 Power up 2 25 Index PPP 1 12 G 2 administration 4 18 client software F 2 configuration 4 1 dialstrings 4 13 ready 4 15 references 1 4 screen F 16 service examples F 6 user information F 1 PPP connection 4 13 F 2 F 9 F 11 keepalive 4 14 screen F 17 PPP service configuration parameters G 5 miscellaneous administrative commands 4 21 PPP service field A 3 PPP service sessions define 4 3 ppp log 4 21 8 47 Pre defined address G 17 Predefined destination see PDD PriQ G 9 Privately administered static IP address 4 15 Processor 1 17 diagnostics 9 23 Processor board firmware update 9 19 Program arguments A 7 Program field A 6 Prompt 3 5 Proto comp G 12 Protocol commands 3 9 configuring 3 10 LAN 1 6 1 10 remote access 1 10 Psid G 19 Pull E 35 Pupu A 3 Push E 37 Q Question service field A 3 R Rack mounting 2 6 Re authorization bypass G 6 reboot 2 27 9 11 Receive errors G 11 Recv G 10 Recv errs G 9 Recv Bytes G 9 to G 10 Recv Pkts G 9 G 11 Reference documentation 1 2 References Apple 1 3 gateway 1 3 PPP 1 4 SLIP 1 4 Reinstall software 9 13 Rej G 9 Release installed determining 9 9 Remote access sessions 1 12 administration 1 19 8 2 upgrade 1 20 9 16 Remote access enable 8 2 Remote access protocols 1 10 Issue 2 Remote Addr Address G 13 Remote Addr Zone G 13 Remote Upgrade Installation Menu 9 17
266. n Chapter 9 to install the UFS Utility Fixes Tape remove the inet package and install the LCS60 application software D 8 Issue 3 E Manual Pages ATLOG E 1 ATNETSTAT E 2 ATPING E 4 DKCU E 6 DKMAINT E 8 FTP E 9 IFCONFIG E 19 IFSTAT Table of Contents E 21 Table of Contents IFTRACE E 24 IPXNETSTAT E 26 IPXPING E 27 NETSTAT E 28 NSLOOKUP E 30 PING E 34 PULL E 35 PUSH E 37 ROUTE E 40 Issue 3 Table of Contents STATLCS E 42 TELNET Table of Contents E 43 Table of Contents iv Issue 3 ATLOG ATLOG 1M NAME atlog AppleTalk manager log file SYNOPSIS atlog d loglevel t enprz0 DESCRIPTION This command is used to display or set the logging level d and the protocols for which the log information will be displayed t For the d option the larger numbers provide more detailed logging information The valid entries for the t option are e Specify e to trace ECHO n Specify n to trace NBP P Specify p to trace atping sessions r Specify r to trace RTMP Zz Specify z to trace ZIP 0 Specify 0 to turn off all protocol tracing More than one argument to the tracing t option may be provided e g ten requests both ECHO and NBP to be traced Whenever tracing t is specified specify a log level of 9 Valid log levels are 3 default and 9 The atlog command generates output which speci
267. n a server Client Option 3 Screen 8 14 List the client s backups this server has stored Server Option 3 Screen 8 15 Delete this client s backup stored on a server Client Option 2 Screen 8 14 Delete a client s backup stored on this server Server Option 2 Screen 8 15 Issue 3 8 35 Cc BS 5 xe lt Backup and Restore Operations From a Server To initiate a backup or a restore from a server log onto the server select option 2 from Screen 8 11 to obtain Screen 8 15 Screen 8 15 Centralized Backup Operations Menu Server 5 CENTRALIZED BACKUP OPERATIONS MENU SERVER Select a client to back up Select a client delete its backups Select a client list its backups Select a BwWwN Ee client to restore Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK gt lt a yh For the appropriate task see Table 8 2 An example of a backup from a server is shown below a b Back up a client s variable files Clients known by this server Enter client name Type q to quit or for help gt brown Type name of backup or press RETURN for default of 9401251342 Type q to quit gt backupl Creating backup named backup1 morse calling brown assemble backup data morse calling brown retrieve backup Storing backup on server morse morse calling brown clean up Backup complete
268. n in Screen 9 7 display conn mod 4 Restart the LCS60 software using the start dkhost command from the Icsadm interface z D 5 o9 5 D O 4D Issue 3 9 27 ab Oo Cc Cc oD pr Cc ca Connection Verification Verify the validity of all connections before considering the LCS60 ready to assume its role in the network Figure 9 2 Verifying Connections Example Network Ie Lucent Data Switch Remote Access na p Clients milkway earth p B s 4 Modem Pool 72 UG J topper LCS60 to Data Switch Connected Host Verification dkcu Use the dkcu command to verify the connectivity between the local LCS60 and a data switch connected host From the LCS60 system console use the following format dkcu lt call_address gt where lt call_address gt is the call address of a fiber connected host As an example refer to the network in Figure 9 2 In this example to verify the connection between the LCS60 morse and the data switch connected host watson connection A enter 9 28 Issue 3 Connection Verification dkcu mlkway earth watson You should get a login prompt from watson LCS60 to Data Switch Verification Loopback Test dkcu Use the dkcu command to verify the connectivity between the local LCS60 and a data switch From the LCS
269. nager directory either by entering or top Initial System Setup initsetup gt a 3 D o w e The system must be initialized before it can be used To initialize and configure the system before it is used the first time the system administrator must log on as root and run the initial setup procedures described in Chapter 3 Top Directory Commands Once you log onto the LCS60 the Top gt prompt is displayed This indicates you are in the LCS60 Top Directory To display the options available from this direc tory use the Return key as shown in Screen 8 1 Note The directories appear on the screens followed by a slash Top is the initial directory entered when the Icsadm program is invoked All other directories are accessible from the Top directory by entering the directory name In addition to the common commands described previously the following commands are available from the Top directory Issue 3 8 5 Cc 2 A 5 O lt Icsadm Interface Name Synopsis Description start start dkhost ipx tepip atalk slip ppp snmp routed asytcp tcpasy arap all The start service protocol command starts the named service or protocol When invoked without options start will list the services protocols that are running Services and pro tocols can be started individually or all at once using the all option all will start all protocols and services
270. nattended Portion of Installation 2 Review Package Questions and Answers Enter option number of choice 1 2 1 1 Ready to begin Formatting The following disks will now be formatted m197_c0d0 You can safely ignore error messages such as Non Motorola volume id read on unit xx or Invalid VTOC read on unit xx Press lt RETURN gt to continue with formatting or interrupt CTRL c to abort Return Slicing Installation Disk s Activating Swapping To Disk a Issue 3 D 7 UNIX System Software Installation Making File Systems Installing Boot Block Mounting Installation Partitions Switching to Installation Partitions Installing Package s Installation in progress 15 For both the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives Installation messages will continue to scroll as the UNIX System software is installed This pro cedure will continue for approximately 49 60 minutes 16 For both the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives When the following message appears hit the Return key to continue the shutdown and allow the host to reboot Do not enter bo 0 0 At the nnn Diag gt or nnn Bug gt prompt enter bo 0 0 Press lt RETURN gt to begin the system shutdown m kay O Cc Q Q Q lt 17 For both the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives At the Console prompt login as root to continue 18 For both the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives Continue with the pro cedures described i
271. nd other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation WINS is a trademark of Wollongong Group Inc XNS is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp Ordering Information Additional copies of this document can be ordered by calling U S A 1 800 432 6600 Canada 1 800 255 1242 Other Areas 1 317 352 8557 or by writing to Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center Attn Customer Service Representative P O Box 19901 Indianapolis IN 46219 Issue 2 1 1 Table of Contents Trademarks Issue 2 Feature Description Document Organization Reference Documentation m Apple References m Gateway References m PPP References m SLIP Reference m Other References Overview Benefits LAN Protocols m TCP IP Domain Name Server DNS Resolver Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Routing Information Protocol RIP m AppleTalk Protocol AppleTalk Network Number and Zone Assignment m PX Protocol IPX Virtual Network Assignment Remote Access Protocols m TCP Async Gateway Service TCP Service Ports m Serial Line IP SLIP m Point to Point Protocol PPP Van Jacobson TCP IP Header Compression Compressed IPX Header CIPX m AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol ARAP Multiple IP Subnetworks m IP Routing m Security Groups BAA AANA AANAN DOOHNNDDHDOHKRAKRAWDOD A awwwowdnn O00 e ee omen nnn nn on nnn nnn nn on on on nnn in i 4 Table of Conte
272. nds The Manager directory Screen 8 5 provides utilities to obtain information about the LCS60 management LCM subsystem components This directory is not used for standard administration but should only be used for diagnostic admin istrative purposes Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Screen 8 5 Manager Directory gt Top gt manager NOTICE manager requires super user permission Password xxxx Top gt Manager gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config help log ports quit server service session show start stop top update A g Note The Manager directory requires the root password If you have previously supplied the root password the system will not ask for it The following commands are available from the Manager directory Name log Synopsis log level Description The log command is used to obtain and change the verbosity of the log level of the LCS60 manager cm log The higher the number given for the log level the more detailed the log file valid values are 3 6 default and 20 Cc Q 5 Lt O lt Name start or stop Synopsis start or stop Description The start and stop commands can be used to start and stop the LAN Communications manager LCM start starts the LCS60 software stop terminates all active services and their corresponding sessions Note Because stop terminates all active sessions this command can only be
273. network numbers that have been assigned to the link used by the interface expressed as net_low net_high configured ETHERNET VIRTUAL or remote PPP ARAP the number of DDP packets received by the router from this interface Packets are not received over a VIRTUAL interface hence for a VIRTUAL interface Ipkts is N A the number of DDP packets transmitted from the router through this interface Packets are not transmitted over a VIRTUAL inter face hence for a VIRTUAL interface Opkts is N A In general Ipkts will not equal Opkts This is true because 1 many routing protocol Ipkts terminate within the router and are not rebroadcast 2 many routing protocol Opkts are either generated within the router or are replicated within the router for transmission over each of the router s real and virtual interfaces The routing table r option displays known AppleTalk routes The r option displays Destination E 2 the network range to which the route points in the form net _low net_high Issue 3 ATNETSTAT ATNETSTAT 1M Gateway the address of the next router to which packets intended for this Destination will be sent or local if the Destination is directly con nected to the router Distance the number of router hops from the router to the Destination net work The v verbose option may be requested with both the i and r options If the v option is requested then the unique KEY associated with each in
274. ns through StarKeeper II NMS Asynchronous Terminal Data Switch StarKeepen___ ___DCE II NMS Console Port CPM HS Asynchronous LC S60 Port 2 18 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Connecting the Fiber Interface Connection to the data switch network for data communications is by means of a dual optical fiber cable The network LCS60 fiber connection must be to a CPM HS module in a Datakit II VCS or BNS For network connection follow the steps below Routing the Optical Fiber Cable The optical fiber cable may be run in suspended ceilings subfloor cable runs and riser shafts up to 500 feet Before routing the cable connect rubber caps to each end of the cable to protect it from dirt and dust during installation aJeMpJeH Note Tools and hardware used to install copper wire and cable in building duct and conduit systems are satisfactory for use in installing optical fiber cable such as fish wire woven cable grips or rope If woven cable grips are used with fiber optic cables tape them to the cable jacket before pulling the cable When routing the cable keep it away from copper riser cables If this is not pos sible install an inner liner conduit or innerduct to keep the cables separated EFT corrugated tubing or equivalent can be used this tubing comes in short lengths and can be bent Caution Optical f
275. nsfer files from the secondary server to the primary server put local file remote file Store local file on the remote host If remote file is not specified the remote file will be named local file File transfer uses the current settings for type format mode and structure pwd Print the pathname of the current working directory on the remote host quit A synonym for bye quote arg The arguments specified are sent verbatim to the remote FTP server A single FTP reply code is expected in return This command is used to avoid processing of a command by the local FTP client and facilitates the sending of an explicit FTP protocol command to the remote server when the client does not implement the related command recv remote file local file A synonym for get reget remote file local file Similar to get but if local file already exists and is smaller than remote file it is assumed to be a partially transferred copy of the file The transfer is resumed from an offset into the remote file equal to the byte count of the local file rename remote file new name Rename the remote file to new name on the remote host reset Clear the reply queue to resynchronize the command reply mechanism between the client and server restart marker When followed immediately by a get or put command restart the file transfer at the indicated marker which is usually a byte offset into the file Issue 3 E 15 FTP 1 FTP E 16 thelp
276. nt Technologies data switch product line by allowing LAN and data switch net work environments to communicate Some of the benefits include m Device to device connectivity over multiple LANs m Improved capability to develop and use distributed processing environ ments m Access through the most commonly used network protocols m Data switch network access to LAN data m Modular design which permits easy expansion as needs increase Issue 3 1 5 wn oD o LL LAN Protocols TCP IP IP traffic is commonly associated with the Department of Defense DOD TCP IP suite and is often run over Ethernet LANs The LCS60 allows asynchronous end points such as a terminal or host connected to a data switch to log onto any Eth ernet TCP IP LAN host by using the LCS60 s async to TCP gateway service The LCS60 provides the terminal user with an interface to the TCP IP telnet com mand which allows the network user to remotely log onto LAN hosts via a vir tual terminal Conversely an Ethernet TCP IP LAN host can use the LCS60 s TCP to async gateway service to access any asynchronous device host modem pool etc con nected to the data switch network The LCS60 terminates the TCP IP telnet command initiated by the LAN host and provides the LAN user with asynchro nous connectivity to the data switch network Domain Name Server DNS Resolver The LCS60 can be configured as a Resolver in the DNS this allows the
277. nts IP Address Assignment by the LCS60 1 17 Hardware Features 1 17 m Enhanced Processor 1 17 m Fiber Interface 1 18 Network Security 1 18 Copy Protection 1 19 Administration 1 19 m Backup Restore 1 19 m R3 0 Upgrade 1 20 m Remote Upgrade 1 20 m Centralized Network Management 1 20 Manual Pages 1 21 Customer Assistance 1 22 Hardware Installation Introduction 2 1 m Controls and Indicators 2 1 Site Preparation 2 2 m Space Requirements 2 4 m Cabling 2 4 m EMI Considerations 2 5 m Required Equipment 2 5 Assembly 2 6 m Unpacking 2 6 Installing the LCS60 2 6 m Rack Mounting 2 6 m Wall Mounting 2 8 m Table Top Mounting 2 8 m Connecting the System Console 2 9 Serial Port Optioning DTE DCE 2 9 m Direct Connection to the LCS60 2 12 m Connection through a Data Switch 2 12 m Connection through Modems 2 17 m Connection through StarKeeper II NMS 2 17 m Connecting the Fiber Interface 2 19 Routing the Optical Fiber Cable 2 19 Installing the CPM HS Module and Optical Fiber Cable 2 20 m Configuration of the Lucent Technologies Data Switch LCS60 2 21 Issue 2 Table of Contents Dialogues 2 22 Enter Group Name 2 22 Define the Local Address for the LCS60 2 22 Configure the CPM HS Module 2 24 m Power and Grounding 2 25 Power Up Procedures 2 25 Power Down Procedures 2 27 m Verify LCS60 Console Connection 2 27 m Verify Fiber Connection 2 28 m Configure the LCS60 2 29 LAN Connections 2 29 m Ethernet 2 29 3 General LCS60 S
278. nts System Console Connections Direct System Console Connections through a Data Switch System Console Connections through Modems System Console Connections through StarKeeper II NMS LCS60 Rear Panel AC Connections Example Network initsetup srvsetup Example Network PPP Service Configuring PPP Service for IP IPX and AppleTalk Example Network SLIP Service Configuring SLIP Service Example Network ARAP Service Configuring ARAP Service Example Network Gateway Services Gateway Services Configuration Icsadm Interface Directory Structure Faceplates Verifying Connections Example Network Windows 95 IPX Over PPP Example Screens Windows 95 IPX Over PPP Connect To Example Screen PC TCP Example Screens PC TCP Session Configuration Screen Example Network Control Panel Modem Port and PPP Screens IP Address Screen xi Table of Contents Figure F 8 PPP Connection Screen Figure F 9 AppleTalk Status Window Figure F 10 Figure F 11 Figure F 12 Figure F 13 Figure F 14 Figure F 15 Figure F 16 xii Custom Interface Window Custom Setup Window Login Settings Window ARAP Remote Connection Example ARAP Remote Access Setup Connection Screen ARAP Remote Access Setup Modem Example ARAP Remote Access Status Screen Example F 18 F 18 F 19 F 20 F 20 F 23 F 23 F 24 F 25 Issue 2 Tables Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4
279. o Chapters 4 through 7 Note After completing the steps in initsetup you must continue with the con Fill in the Installer Administrator and Hardware Site information on your LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet Software Certificate included in your LCS60 package Keep this certificate handy you will need it once you enter initsetup You will not be able to complete all the steps in initsetup without this certificate Perform the following steps to power up the LCS60 and configure the basic features nodename datetime softwarekey Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Issue 3 Flip the LCS60 rear power switch to the on position Notice the power on messages on the screen and wait for the Con sole Login prompt This may take 1 2 minutes Enter root as the login name As shipped the root login uses a carriage return for the password Enter Return at the password prompt you are now logged in to the LCS60 as root 3 3 na op D ie o z S o L f n o op ca Initial Setup Caution Step 5 Step 6 You have super user permission and could inadvertently change delete any and all files therefore it is important that you follow these steps verbatim Assign a password to root by using the passwd root command The password must contain at least six characters Only the first eight characters are significant longer passwords can be used but the additional c
280. ocation of AppleTalk addresses for PPP and ARAP clients Screen 4 4 Configure AppleTalk Virtual Network Example a N Top gt Config gt atalkas CONFIGURE ADDRESS AND ZONE FOR APPLETALK VIRTUAL NETWORK 1 Configure Address and Zone Name 2 Display Address and Zone Name 3 Delete Address and Zone Name Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt 1 x The AppleTalk virtual network has not yet been configured Enter the network number for the LCS60 interface to the AppleTalk network This must be a number between 1 and 65279 and must NOT be equal to any other network number in use in the AppleTalk network and must not be contained within any other network number range in use in the AppleTalk network Type q to quit gt 2010 Me 7 Screen 4 4 continued on next page 4 10 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 4 Continued T k Enter the zone name to be used by AppleTalk nodes that use the virtual network The name may contain no more than 32 characters Type q to quit or for help gt Research Lab You have entered VIRTUAL NETWORK NUMBER 2010 VIRTUAL NODE NUMBER alt VIRTUAL NETWORK ZONE NAME Research Lab Confirm Enter y n gt y The LCS60 virtual AppleTalk network is configured as follows VIRTUAL NETWORK NUMBER lt 2010 gt VIRTUAL NODE NUMBER lt 1 gt VIRTUAL NETWORK
281. ocumentation refer to the section Reference Docu mentation in this chapter for complete details on this feature 1 18 Issue 3 Copy Protection This release of the LCS60 is copy protected and requires a personalized software key before it can be used This number is assigned during the initial setup of the LCS60 using the Icsadm interface refer to Chapter 3 for complete details The copy protection feature uses a release specific software key that is Release 3 ser vices can only be activated using the Release 3 key Administration The LCS60 has its own local management software package called Icsadm This package allows a network administrator to configure services administer service sessions and collect performance measurement data This administration tool can be accessed either through the LCS60 console port or through the multi plexed fiber interface Note The remote administration feature is delivered in the disabled state Instructions for enabling this feature are given in Chapter 8 Backup Restore The LCS60 provides a backup restore feature that allows an LCS60 to be config ured as a backup restore server A backup restore server can copy to its hard disk i e back up a predefined set of files directories from multiple remote LCS60s and LCS50Es which are configured as backup restore clients The backup restore server can also be configured as its own client Note LCS60 R1 0 backups cannot be used to rest
282. ocumentation for the PPP package you are using Address field compression refer to the documentation for the PPP package you are using The IP address of the remote user Indicates whether Van Jacobson header compression is being used by the peer or not 0 If used the number is the maximum number of slots The peer s identifier field compression setting refer to the docu mentation for the PPP package you are using The IP address of the LCS60 Indicates whether Van Jacobson header compression is being used by the LCS60 or not 0 If used the number is the max imum number of slots The LCS60 s identifier field compression setting refer to the documentation for the PPP package you are using The virtual AppleTalk address lt network gt lt node gt Name of the virtual zone AppleTalk address lt network gt lt node gt of default router the LCS60 The information listed below is given The local side the LCS60 side is the server therefore the Server Info fields Class Imp ID and Name for the peer should be null These fields will be populated if the peer is attempting to act as the server Issue 3 Glossary Class Equals 1 dial in server Imp ID Implementation ID V lt major version gt lt minor version gt Name Name of the server LCS60 AT Comp AppleTalk compression type Not supported Route Proto Routing protocol Not supported Broadcast Broadcast packet suppression Not
283. of the dialstring C The server control file for example srvtab or directory name used H The originating group name truncated to the length of the host field of an etc utmp entry U The user ID mapping file name for example dkuidtab used Server Table Scanning Rules Several parameters are associated with each incoming call Some of these param eters include the requester s originating data switch group the requested service name and the requester s user ID if known The server uses these parameters to match lines in the server table during the call validation process A 8 Issue 3 srvtab Modifications to the Server Table The server table is opened each time a call request is received from the data switch node Opening the server table for each incoming call allows the adminis trator to make modifications that will take effect on the next incoming call There is no need to restart the server after modifications to the table Server Table Validation and Matching Since etc opt dk srvtab is a directory the file corresponding to the requested ser vice is examined If that file does not exist the wild card file is used Call requests are denied with an access denied see dkerr 3x rejection code if the end of the table is reached before a match occurs All lines containing a character in the first column and all lines without the proper number of fields are ignored Following the format v
284. of some software packages are given in Appendix F To unconfigure ARAP service stop the service using stop arap enter maxsessions at the Top gt Config gt prompt and choose option 2 to delete the service 6 4 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for ARAP Service ARAP Service Connection Dialstring The following type of dialstring shown with the area exch name from the exam ple in Figure 6 1 is used to make the ARAP connection dvVuVv DESTINATION mlkway earth brown arap Administration Routine administration of the LCS60 includes ARAP tasks such as starting and stopping ARAP and generating ARAP specific reports This section gives some examples of ARAP specific tasks Refer to Chapter 8 for complete LCS60 administration and to the Glossary for a description of the report fields gen erated by the administrative commands Show Service Example The following screen illustrates a check of the current status of arap service Top gt Service gt show arap LCS60 AppleTalk Remote Access Service Statistics Jan 31 10 45 32 Cfg Use Cap Max Total Busy Fail State 50 4 8 4 32 0 0 Enabled Issue 3 6 5 Administration Show Session Example The screen below shows how to obtain session information for ARAP Sa Top gt session Top gt Session gt show arap LCS60 AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol Statistics Apr 20 09 22 01 Recv Ares c a Sesid Xmit Bytes Xmit Pkts Recv Bytes
285. of the following REASONS ALIVE S The fiber datalink between the LCS60 and the CPM HS unex pectedly went down This could be caused by tampering or by a hardware failure Try manually restarting the interface RX SYNC The optical receiver on the VMEDKHS board in the LCS60 lost synchronization with the data stream transmitted from the CPM HS The probable cause of this failure is tampering with the loop back switch on the CPM HS paddle board at the data 8 42 Issue 3 Error Messages switch Try manually restarting the interface RX MUTE The optical connection between the receiver on the VMEDKHS board in the LCS60 and the transmitter on the CPM HS paddle board at the data switch has been broken Verify that the CPM HS is properly installed in the data switch slot and that there is optical connectivity between the LCS60 and the CPM HS The interface will recover automatically when the condition has been cleared TX HANG The transmitter on the VMEDKHS board in the LCS60 has stalled and is no longer able to send data to the data switch net work through the CPM HS Verify that the CPM HS is properly installed in the data switch slot and that there is optical connec tivity between the LCS60 and the CPM HS Also verify that the CPM HS is in service The interface will recover automatically when the condition has been cleared TX FULL The transmitter on the VMEDKHS board in the LCS60 has apparently stalled and data is no longer drainin
286. oftware Configuration Introduction 3 1 m Preliminary Hardware Requirements 3 1 m Preliminary Configuration Requirements 3 2 m Specific Services 3 3 Initial Setup 3 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup 3 10 Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP 3 23 m Default Route dftroute 3 24 m Domain Name Server dns 3 25 m SNMP Manager snmp 3 26 Starting the LCS60 3 27 m Base Level Backup 3 27 Configuration Changes 3 28 Administrative and Maintenance Commands 3 29 4 PPP Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service 4 1 m PPP Service Connection Dialstrings 4 13 m Privately Administered Static IP Address 4 15 m Reserved IP Address 4 16 Issue 2 iii Table of Contents m Dynamically Assigned IP Address 4 17 Administration 4 18 m Show Session Examples 4 18 m Call Trace Example 4 20 m Log File 4 21 m Related Commands 4 21 SLIP Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service 5 1 m SLIP Service Connection Dialstrings 5 9 m Privately Administered IP Address 5 10 m Reserved IP Address 5 11 m Dynamically Assigned IP Address 5 12 Administration 5 13 m Stop Example 5 13 m Call Trace Example 5 14 m Errors 5 14 m Log File 5 14 m Related Commands 5 15 ARAP Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection for ARAP Service 6 1 m ARAP Service Connection Dialstring 6 5 Administration 6 5 m Show Ser
287. ogin If autologin is disabled ftp will establish the initial connection to the remote host and return to the command interpreter The user command must then be used to log in to that host File names specified as arguments to ftp commands are processed according to the following rules 1 Ifthe file name is stdin for reading or stdout for writing will be used Issue 3 E 9 FTP 1 FTP 2 Tf the first character of the file name is the remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell command Ftp will fork a shell with the supplied argu ment and pipe the output of the ftp command to the shell in the usual manner If the shell command includes spaces the entire argument must be enclosed in quotation marks for example 1s It Note that there can be no space between the pipe symbol and the shell command A particularly use ful example of this mechanism is dir lt dirname gt lpg 3 If globbing is enabled local file names are expanded as per the glob com mand 4 The transformations defined by case ntrans and nmap are applied whenever a destination file name is derived from a source file name For a retrieval using mget or get with an unspecified local file name case ntrans and nmap are applied For a storage using mput or put with an unspecified remote file name ntrans and nmap are applied These transformations are of particular interest when connecting to a non UNIX remote host with different file
288. ognized Some part of the requested destination is not defined in the network The network does not allow this host to have access to the requested destina tion The requested destination is not well formed too many slashes m Dial to vip error L 3 z 4 n O A Q 4 n The call could not be completed because an error occurred converting the dialstring to vlp format m Dialed number is busy The call was dialed successfully and a busy signal was detected m Dialer error The call could not be completed due to an error detected by an old autodi aler m Dialstring too long The call was denied because the length of the dialstring was larger than the network maximum m Directory Assistance The user has requested directory assistance m Dkserver Can t open line Call System Administrator The call could not be completed because the remote host interface server could not open the data switch special device file needed to accept the call If you are using the dk command and this error occurs it may be due to improper configuration of dkdaemon on the machine you are calling You may also see this error message on an incoming call from a DESTINA TION prompt displayed as error code 130 Issue 3 C 3 dp Q O i dp O LL Outgoing Call Error Messages Note If you try to contact a remote host from the DESTINATION prompt any one of the errors 130 136 may occur
289. olling capability The system console can be connected directly through a Lucent Technologies data switch through modems 9600 bps or through StarKeeper II NMS Connect the system console to the LCS60 using one of the four connection methods described in the following sections Serial Port Optioning DTE DCE Direct and network connected system consoles require Serial Port 1 to be optioned to emulate DCE for connection to an external DTE device this is the default If connection is through modems DCE Serial Port 1 must be optioned to emulate DTE Refer to Figure 2 2 and Table 2 5 for optioning information see Table 2 6 for DTE and DCE emulation and pin assignments for RS 232C inter faces Issue 3 2 9 Installing the LCS60 Table 2 5 MVME712M Module Optioning Default Optioning Ext Interface Port Emulation Port Jumper Bridged Pins DTE DCE 1 jl all DTE DCE 2 J16 all DTE DCE 3 J13 all S DCE DTE 4 J19 all z J15 no jumpers 2 Non Default Optioning DCE DTE 1 J11 all DCE DTE 2 J17 all DCE DTE 3 J14 all DTE DCE 4 J18 all i J15 no jumpers Figure 2 2 MVME712M Header Locations and Factory Jumper Placements
290. ollow the appropriate instructions for your hardware For 6386 At the prompt enter the usr bin removepkg Hardware command and respond to the prompts For HP Insert the tape into the tape drive and wait until Hardware the light stops blinking Then execute the follow ing four commands at the prompt B 2 Issue 3 Configuration of the StarKeeper II NMS cd tmp mt rew cpio ivdumB lt dev rmt Omn UNINSTALL 9 2 A D D ke 2 Z z 02 c Enter i Return when you see the following Connections for L60 must either be removed or made inactive If you are upgrading L60 you should make the connections inactive otherwise connection information will have to be re entered Enter r to remove or i to make inactive i d Remove the diskette or tape from the drive 5 Enter the package installation command and follow the instructions For 6386 Enter usr bin installpkg then enter F to install the Hardware floppy diskette Insert the floppy diskette labeled LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet R3 0 StarKeeper NMS RX Y Support for AT amp T 6386 into the disk drive when instructed to do so For HP Insert the tape labeled LCS60 Network Interface for Ethernet Hardware R3 0 StarKeeper NMS RX Y Support for Hewlett Packard into the tape drive and wait until the light stops blinking Then execute the following four commands cd tmp mt rew cpio ivdumB lt dev rmt Omn
291. on of the program This flag should be specified only for remote execution channels x Opens the remote execution protocol data service and invokes the mapped program with the stdin stdout and stderr files attached to the dev dkx device for the remote execution channel I Creates an INIT_PROCESS type utmp entry for the invoked program This style of accounting makes an entry in the system utmpx file that is transparent when using the default options of the who command It also makes an entry in the system wtmpx file that may be displayed using the command last L Creates a LOGIN_PROCESS type utmp entry for the invoked program This style of accounting makes an initial entry in the system utmpx file that is transparent when using the default options of the who command This style of accounting assumes that Table A 1 continued on next page lt rai O Cc Q Q Q lt A 4 Issue 3 srvtab Table A 1 Continued ra the invoked program e g login will overwrite this entry in the system utmpx file with valid user information This style of accounting does not make an entry in the system wimpx file it assumes that the invoked program will make the initial entry thus avoiding multiple entries R Rejects the call unless the resulting mapped user ID has an ordinary shell An ordinary shell is defined as either a null shell field in the password file the default bin sh or a shell field
292. on the local system If to is omitted the from argument is used in both places E 6 Issue 3 DKCU DKCU 1C put from to Copy file from on local system to file to on remote system If to is omitted the from argument is used in both places Permission to create or overwrite the to file must be allowed break Transmit a BREAK to the remote system nae Send the line to the remote system The use of put requires stty 1 and cat 1 on the remote side It also requires that the current erase and kill characters on the remote system be identical to the current ones on the local system Backslashes are inserted at appropriate places The use of take requires the existence of echo 1 and cat 1 on the remote sys tem Also stty tabs mode should be set on the remote system if tabs are to be copied without expansion Multiple Interfaces If multiple interface boards are installed on the originating host dkcu will use the default processing to select the interface for the outgoing call See dkdial 3X and authorize 1M for more information FILES opt dk bin directory in which this command resides SEE ALSO pull 1C push 1C authorize 1M dkdial 3Xx cat 1 echo 1 stty 1 cu 1C uucp 1C in the UNIX System V User s Reference Manual DIAGNOSTICS Exit code is zero for normal exit non zero otherwise WARNINGS If a terminal that is directly connected to a host initiates a dial with dkcu the x
293. onfiguration ordered the operating software loaded and user documentation included Additional equipment required for the initial installation of an LCS60 is listed in Table 2 3 Table 2 3 Required Additional Equipment Quantity Item Description 1 Fiber Pair Lucent FL2P P length specified in feet 1 RS 232 Length required to connect console to DB25 Cable LCS60 1 Ethernet Transceiver Length required for connection from IEEE Cable LCS60 to Ethernet transceiver as reqd Horizontal Shelf Rack mounting hardware for additional Slide Rails or support provided by rack cabinet support brackets vendor 1 as reqd ED5P183 33 G 40 Wall Mounting Kit for LCS60 1 CPM HS module Node connection 1 AWJ2 Paddleboard for the CPM HS module as reqd wire 18 AWG 6 AWG wire for DC powered unit only Formerly AT amp T FL2P P Issue 3 oJeMpJeH D 5 L Assembly Unpacking The LCS60 hardware comes fully assembled with the exception of two handles that mount on the front frame of the enclosure After opening the shipping con tainer remove the documentation package system software tapes and diskettes and package of loose parts Carefully remove the LCS60 unit Open the front cover of the LCS60 and check that the system is equipped as ordered and that all circuit packs are fully seated in the LCS60 card cage Installing the LCS60 Follow the appropria
294. onic mnemonic MNEMONIC ADDRESS up to 8 chars morse PAD SUPPORT yes no no Return DIRECTORY ENTRY up to 30 chars double quoted none none name of the LCS60 GROUP S up to 4 groups separated by commas none none morse ORIGINATING GROUP NAME SECURITY PATTERN S TE comma separated pattern list same_as none none Return fab INITIAL SERVICE STATE in out out in oF LEVEL local area exchange local speedcall local local S TYPE x121 mnemonic both mnemonic mnemonic MNEMONIC ADDRESS up to 8 chars Library 9 PAD SUPPORT yes no no Return DIRECTORY ENTRY up to 30 chars double quoted none none name of the LCS60 GROUP S up to 4 groups separated by commas none none morse ORIGINATING GROUP NAME SECURITY PATTERN S comma separated pattern list same_as none none Return LEVEL local area exchange local speedcall local local INITIAL SERVICE STATE in out out in TYPE x121 mnemonic both mnemonic mnemonic MNEMONIC ADDRESS up to 8 chars Techs PAD SUPPORT yes no no Return DIRECTORY ENTRY up to 30 chars double quoted none none name of the LCS60 GROUP S up to 4 groups separated by commas none none morse ORIGINATING GROUP NAME SECURITY PATTERN S i comma separated pattern list same_as none none Return INITIAL SERVICE STATE in out out in L
295. ons Mode Multi mode Fiber Optic Cable FL2P P Type Connector ST Type Ethernet Interface Interface TEEE 802 3 Connector Female 15 pin DB15 Console Terminal Interfaces Port 1 console Ports 2 3 4 terminal RS 232C limited Asynchronous RS 232C Asynchronous Connectors 25 pin DB25 receptacle Serial Port Defaults Port 1 9600 bps Port 2 9600 bps Port 3 9600 bps Port 4 1200 bps Issue 3 2 3 oJeMpJeH Site Preparation Space Requirements The LCS60 can be rack mounted wall mounted or installed on a secure surface The unit is 7 x 17 x 19 inches and weighs 40 lbs A minimum of 12 inches of clearance is required at the front and rear of the unit for access and a minimum of two inches of clearance at the sides of the unit to permit proper airflow through the unit Cabling WARNING Connect and disconnect cables ONLY when the power is off D 5 _ L There are four types of connections commonly required for the LCS60 1 A dual optical fiber connection to a CPM HS module installed in a Lucent Technologies data switch or concentrator The fiber cable between the LCS60 and the data switch is limited to a maximum length of 2 9 km 2 Ethernet LAN connection 3 A console connection through an RS 232C interface to either a terminal or data switch port RS 232 distance limits apply to the LCS60 console con nection nominally 50 feet 4 An AC power conne
296. onsole protocol summary summary update datetime snmp types update gt Server delhost softwarekey io delnet srvports is dftroute srvsetup ha ee Note All commands in directories shown types dns subnet in bold italic typeface and all individual commands etherif upgrade shown in bold talic typeface require root permission initsetup viewhosts viewnets Note Descriptions of the report fields generated by the Icsadm interface administrative commands are given in the Glossary Common Commands The following commands are available from all directories Is Use Is or the _ Return key to list the available commands and direc tories help help or provides additional information for any command Use the command help in conjunction with the command name for which you need information e g help start quit This command exits the lcsadm interface l The allows the administrator to perform shell commands without exit ing the lcsadm interface requires root permission when remotely administering 8 4 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface The is used to move back to the previous directory Refer to Figure 8 1 Screen 8 1 Top Directory A Top gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config help manager ports quit service session start stop Top gt manager Top gt Manager gt Top gt yf Note in Screen 8 1 that the Top directory is available from the Ma
297. ont Tl BOTTOM Frame WALL MOUNT Horizontal shelf slide rails or Odbinet support brackets Front Uprights ESIMENE RACK MOUNT TABLE TOP MOUNT Issue 3 2 7 JeMmpIeH D 5 L Installing the LCS60 Wall Mounting Wall mounting the LCS60 requires a Wall Mount Assembly to position the unit vertically as shown in Figure 2 1 Wall mounting requires a surface 45 inches wide by 21 inches high covered by a securely fastened 34 inch plywood sheet or a comparably stable mounting sur face The handles for the LCS60 are shipped in a separate package within the main shipping box If desired attach the handles to the front frame with the handles pointing away from the LCS60 using the four flat head machine screws To wall mount the unit 1 Using the Wall Mounting Assembly as a template mark the location of the four mounting holes on the plywood sheet Drill the pilot holes or install appropriate anchors as required Note To function properly the LCS60 must be positioned in the Wall Mount Assembly with the disk and tape drive on top the bottom surface toward the wall and the front cover of the LCS60 to the left 2 Attach the Wall Mounting Assembly to the plywood surface using four 1 4 x inch lag screws 3 Locate the LCS60 in the mounting assembly by aligning the front flange of the LCS60 with the four threaded holes on the flange at the
298. op arap stop asytcp stop atalk stop dkhost stop ipx stop ppp stop routed stop slip stop snmp stop tcpasy stop tcpip arap asytcp atalk dkhost ipx PPP routed slip snmp tcpasy asytcp ppp routed snmp slip tcpasy tepip Session Directory Commands The Session directory Screen 8 2 is used to report information on the status of current gateway sessions Issue 3 gt a 3 l D o w e Icsadm Interface Screen 8 2 Session Directory Top gt Manager gt session Top gt Session gt Return Commands may be abbreviated Commands are config help kill manager ports quit service show top trace types j The following commands are available from the Session directory Name kill 5 Synopsis kill service type sesid sesid ki Description The kill command terminates a session with the specific T service type and session ID sesid entered This command Z requires root permission O Name show Synopsis show i interval v w filename service type sesid show i interval w filename ppp link ip atalk ipx show i interval w filename ppp lt sesid gt link ip atalk ipx all Description The show command gives session statistics such as con nect time idle time and receive transmit byte counts The i flag gives a continuous output at the specified inter val v gives a verbose output The w flag puts t
299. ore R3 0 systems The remote backup of clients is done disk to disk over the data switch network Backups and restores may be initiated either from a server or from a client This feature allows multiple backups of configuration files to be stored and any of several stored backups may be selected to be restored Restores may be comprehensive or selective as required Issue 3 1 19 sounjeo4 wn o LL Administration R3 0 Upgrade Previous releases of the LCS60 can be upgraded to Release 3 0 This requires removing the software and any patches for the earlier release and installing the R3 0 software from tape Upgrade procedures are given in Chapter 9 The configuration is automatically restored after installing R3 0 the user need only configure new or changed services Note When upgrading from R1 0 or R2 0 to R3 0 you must have an R3 0 software key to activate R3 0 features Refer to the section on Copy Pro tection Remote Upgrade Upgrading multiple LCS60s to release 3 0 or greater can be done using the remote upgrade feature To upgrade several LCS60s to release 3 0 or greater the local tape drive need only be used to install the upgrade release on a single LCS60 the remote upgrade server All other R2 0 or greater LCS60s in your data switch network remote upgrade clients may then be upgraded remotely across the data switch network Centralized Network Management StarKeeper II NMS provides
300. ork Example Configure the Ethernet Interface Example Configure IP Network Security Group Example Configure Reserved IP Address Example Configure the Ethernet Interface Example Configure AppleTalk Virtual Network Example Gateway Service Configuration Example Top Directory Session Directory Ports Directory Service Directory Manager Directory Server Directory Config Directory LCS60 Backup and Restore Configuration Menu Backup Restore Menu Tape Backup Management Menu Centralized Backup Restore Menu Server Centralized Backup Server Definition Menu Centralized Backup Client Definition Menu Centralized Backup Operations Menu Centralized Backup Operations Menu Server Tape Backup Management Menu Server TCP to Async Gateway with Network Access Password How to Enter System Responses UFS Utility Fixes Maintenance Tape Installation inet Package Removal 2 13 2 14 3 5 4 3 4 7 4 10 4 12 5 3 5 5 6 3 7 4 8 8 8 10 8 12 8 14 8 15 8 17 8 26 8 28 8 28 8 32 8 33 8 34 8 35 8 36 8 38 8 39 9 7 9 8 XV Table of Contents Screen 9 4 LCS60 Application Software Installation 9 9 Screen 9 5 LCS60 Application Software Removal R2 0 Example 9 14 Screen 9 6 set and env Commands 9 22 Screen 9 7 Example diag com for CPM HS Module 9 26 Screen 9 8 Service Menu 9 31 Screen D 1 How to Enter System Responses D 2 Screen F 1 CCL Script Example F 3 Screen F 2 Sample LCS60 dialup scr F 10 Scr
301. ormal opera tions and it should not be used from automated scripts To use ipxping for fault isolation the hexidecimal IPX address of the target node must be specified in network node format While it is possible to contact the IPX address of the LCS60 s Ethernet port it is not possible to contact the addresses that correspond to the LCS60 s virtual IPX network port By default ipxping sends an IPX data packet that is 56 bytes long The IPX header is followed by a ping header containing signature version type ping id and results fields The remainder of the packet is padded with additional bytes to fill out the packet The size of the packet in bytes may be changed by specifying an alternate packetsize on the command line 40 gt packetsize lt 1500 By default ipxping sends one packet per second and prints one line of output showing the round trip time in hundredths of a second for every packet sent The delay between packets in seconds can be changed by specifying an alternate interval on the command line Since a packet for which no reply has been received by the time the next packet is sent is declared lost it may be necessary to increase the inter packet delay to communicate with hosts over congested net works By default ipxping continues to send packets until it is killed If count is specified on the command line ipxping will send the specified number of Ping Requests and then exit Summary round trip time pac
302. ormation as the command executes This infor mation is helpful in diagnosing both software and or network problems The p ipx or p rip option will show only those statistics for the specified protocol The option interval is a number that represents the frequency with which the display is to be updated This display shows the summary of the packets sent and received over both the ethernet and virtual interfaces DIAGNOSTICS FILES Exit status is zero for normal termination a positive number for error termination The message Can t open device in the different displays indicates that ipxnetstat cannot open the specific protocol device to obtain the requested statistics because the IPX stack is not activated etc lcs ipxas cf usr etc ipxnetstat SEE ALSO E 26 ipxping 1M Issue 3 IPXPING IPXPING 1M NAME ipxping send NetWare Link Services Protocol NLSP Ping Request packets SYNOPSIS ipxping network node packetsize count interval DESCRIPTION ipxping is intended for use in network testing measurement and management primarily for manual fault isolation Tracking a single point hardware or software failure in an Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX network can often be difficult ipxping uses the NLSP Ping Request packet to elicit a Ping Reply from a Novell host or gateway equipped with NLSP Because of the load it could impose on the network hosts and gateways ipxping should not be used during n
303. ort number of the gateway The port number is shown as part of the Local Address field when using the v option The symbolic name or numeric equivalent if the n option is used of the remote host s IP address The data switch channel number used for the gateway The originating group information The NAC user ID if a NAC is used Issue 3 Glossary Trace PPP Top gt Session gt trace ppp Sesid Session ID number Name The name of the PPP session This name will be the letter p followed by the data switch channel number Remote User The symbolic name or numeric equivalent if the n option is used of the remote user s IP address Chan The data switch channel number used for the gateway Switch Address The originating group information Trace SLIP Top gt Session gt trace slip Sesid Session ID number Name The name of the SLIP session This name will be the letter s followed by the data switch channel number Local Address The LCS60 IP address displayed using the v option Dest Address The IP address of the user Remote User The user ID of the remote user Chan The data switch channel number used for the gateway Switch Address The originating group information Issue 3 G 15 AS i ts110 9 Glossary Ports Directory Show Statistics Top gt Ports gt show Port The number of the configured port Service The service configured on the specified port i e directory
304. ory Issue 3 E 35 PULL 1C PULL The push 1C and pull commands invoke the pupu program opt dk bin pupu on the remote system to handle the remote end of all file transfers If the srvtab A4 file on the remote system invokes the pupu program with the r option file transfers will be restricted to from the home directory tree on the remote system by disallowing all paths that begin with a leading or that contain an embedded specification In this restricted mode only transfers containing PATHs relative to the HOME directory will be accepted Multiple Interfaces If multiple interface boards are installed on the originating host the pull com mand will use the default processing to select the interface for the out going call See dkdial 3X and authorize 1M for more information WARNINGS If the source destination is identical to the target host and the source directory is identical to the target directory then the pull command will overwrite filename and its contents may be destroyed The modification times are preserved on transferred files as long as they are ear lier in relative time i e seconds since the 00 00 00 GMT January 1 1970 epoch than the current relative time on the local machine If the modification time for a file would date that file in the future on the local machine the current time on the local machine will be used as the file modification time FILES opt dk bin directory in which this
305. ost and then start dkhost gt a 3 l D o w e Error Messages Note For alarms to StarKeeper II NMS refer to Appendix B Error messages are displayed on the LCS60 system console Issue 3 8 41 Cc 2 5 O lt Error Messages Error Messages from the LCS60 Fiber Interface The following sections identify error messages you may see when executing the commands that make outgoing calls over the Host Interface Console Error Messages The error messages that may appear on the console as a result of errors detected in the CommKit Host Interface software and hardware are included below Messages that begin with the string dkhs0 are printed by the dkhs driver and refer to the specified interface or unit device 0 is the interface number Messages that begin with the string dkux0 are printed by the dkux STREAMS module and refer to the specified circuit or channel Hardware Error Messages If the CPM HS module in the data switch node goes out of service after the data switch interface server is started if the CPM HS is removed from service during operation or if a power failure occurs on the data switch node the following error message will appear on the LCS60 system console indicating the loss in communication with the data switch NOTICE dkhsO Interface is down REASONS The error indicates the software on the interface board has stopped running for one
306. otocol capability to enhance dial in access through the data switch network SLIP enables remote users to gain access to their inter net and use familiar TCP IP commands for most applications e g file transfer electronic mail and remote login SLIP allows a remote PC or Macintosh to logically reside on the TCP IP LAN In a SLIP session a remote user can dial into an LCS60 request SLIP service and receive an IP address automatically This remote user is then logically connected to the LAN and can execute such TCP IP commands as ftp telnet and ping With the capability for automatic assignment of IP addresses the LCS60 main tains a database of used addresses and the LCS60 administrator does not have to pre assign IP addresses to users Static assignment of these addresses is still pos sible however for any situation where it may be necessary Issue 3 1 11 e9 0 oO LL Remote Access Protocols The total combined number of remote access sessions when SLIP PPP and or ARAP are configured available through the LCS60 is 120 Refer to Chapter 5 for configuration of the LCS60 for SLIP service Point to Point Protocol PPP PPP provides point to point connectivity between a remote PC or Macintosh and a LAN host and is the industry standard It is designed to carry multiple proto cols such as TCP IP XNS IPX AppleTalk and DECnet The remote PC or Macintosh negotiates the PPP protocol options
307. ou have a Seagate ST11200N drive refer to Chapter 9 for UNIX Sys tem Software Installation if you a have a Fujitsu drive or a Seagate ST5660N continue with the instructions below 6 Enter bo 0 40 COREunix at the 197 Bug gt prompt This will generate ins tallation screens ending with the Screen D 1 This information will not be repeated use Screen D 1 as you proceed with installation for instructions on entering responses Screen D 1 How to Enter System Responses a a How to Type Responses during Installation m x O Cc Q Q Q lt When typing responses lt response gt lt RETURN gt Enters lt response gt lt CTRL gt h Erases the last character typed lt CTRL gt u Erases the entire line lt CTRL gt r Reprints the entire line lt CTRL gt s Pauses output to the screen lt CTRL gt q Resumes output to the screen lt CTRL gt z Suspends the installation lt CTRL gt c Cancels the installation and returns here lt RETURN gt Gets help for the current screen Press lt RETURN gt to continue Zi D 2 Issue 3 UNIX System Software Installation Note If you have not inserted the tape the following will be displayed Booting from VM197 Controller 0 Drive 40 Loading COREunix Boot logic error Packet status 0000 Additional Error Status 0002 7 Ifyou have a Fujitsu Drive go to step 12 8 For the Seagate ST5660N drive only continue with steps 9 through 11 d N
308. ow communication between the data switch and LAN host by means of the TELNET protocol Some features of this service are m File Transfer The LCS60 provides a mechanism for data switch to LAN and LAN to data switch file transfer A host connected to the data switch network or to the LAN can initiate a file transfer such as a uucp file transfer by including the dialstring for the LCS60 in its system files and requesting TCP socket service Both services provide an 8 bit TCP pipe as a path for large file transfers this pipe bypasses telnet which is slower m Break character The LCS60 recognizes the data switch connected user s break character and converts it into a telnet IAC break character From the LAN the LCS60 converts the telnet IAC BREAK sequence into an URP Level D break toward the data switch connection m Security The LCS60 can be configured to drop the telnet connection if the host to which the user is trying to telnet is unavailable Without this feature trying to reach an unavailable host would result in putting the user at the telnet gt prompt and could possibly allow unauthorized con nection to other LAN hosts With this security feature the connection is taken down completely if the host is unavailable The LCS60 provides as many as 500 simultaneous telnet sessions when no PPP SLIP ARAP sessions are configured which may be distributed in any way between TCP to async and async to TCP sessions Note Simultaneous ses
309. own on the screen below you must stop and then start all services To prevent inadvertently restoring files from one machine to another the selective copy function will only accept backup tapes that were created for the same machine this includes tapes created by a backup restore server for a backup restore client gt a 3 D Q w e The selective copy function allows four types of restores 1 COMPLETE Return the machine to the state defined by the backup 2 Password User ids and passwords 3 Server Centralized backup restore control files 4 Config Protocol and services configuration files One of these types must be selected before the restore can proceed A COMPLETE restore is comprehensive and returns the machine to the state defined by the variable configuration files at the time of the backup All files and directories are restored COMPLETE or Config restores will abort unless the TCP IP protocol has been stopped Issue 3 8 29 Cc BS 5 LE ze lt Backup and Restore Operations There are three types of partial restores each of which restores predefined sets of related files Password restores group id password files and shadow files and the time zone setting Server restores lists of authorized backup restore servers and clients and for servers only restores the archives containing all back ups for all clients The directory etc
310. ows Feature Description Hardware Installa tion General Software Configuration PPP Configuration and Administration SLIP Configuration and Administration ARAP Configura tion and Administra tion Gateway Services Configuration and Administration Administration Maintenance Originating Group Security StarKeeper II NMS User Error Messages Issue 3 Chapter 1 describes the LCS60 and its supported ser vices Chapter 2 gives all the information needed to install the LCS60 Chapter 3 details the basic configuration procedures for the LCS60 and gives examples of configuring the sup ported services PPP SLIP ARAP Gateway Chapter 4 gives the specific instructions for configuring and administering the PPP service Chapter 5 gives the specific instructions for configuring and administering the SLIP service Chapter 6 gives the specific instructions for configuring and administering the ARAP service Chapter 7 gives the specific instructions for configuring and administering the Async to TCP service including details of the UUCP feature and the Telnet service Chapter 8 provides detailed instructions on administer ing the LCS60 system Chapter 9 provides maintenance procedures for reload ing and removing the software performing board diag nostics and verifying connections Appendix A briefly defines the originating group secu rity built into the LCS60 using the srvtab files Appendix
311. ows how to check 4 18 Issue 3 Administration m Link information for all PPP sessions m Link IP IPX and AppleTalk status for a single PPP session m IP information for a single PPP session and display the local address as a numeric value D Top gt Session gt show ppp link LCS60 Point to Point Session LINK Configuration Feb 05 07 56 00 Max Max Timeout Proto Addr Sesid State Config Term Secs S MRU ACCM EA opened L 1500 Oxffffffff Ox2e01c315 1 0 P 1500 Oxffffffff OxfcO09fe02 4 0 1 10 opened 10 2 3 L 1500 0x00000000 0x2e0191lef 1 1 P 1500 0x00000000 0x0000002a 1 1 Top gt Session gt show ppp 1 1 all LCS60 Point to Point Session LINK Configuration Feb 05 07 56 07 Max Max Timeout Proto Addr Sesid State Config Term Secs S MRU ACCM Magic Comp Comp dived opened 10 2 3 L 1500 Oxffffffff Ox2e01c315 1 0 P 1500 Oxffffffff Oxfc09fe02 1 0 LCS60 Point to Point Session IP Configuration Feb 05 07 56 10 Peer Peer Local Local Peer Max Comp Local Max Comp Sesid State Addr Slot Slot Addr Slot Slot Lt opened 154 12 24 49 15 1 154 12 24 1 15 1 LCS60 Point to Point Session IPX Configuration Jan 5 07 56 14 ROUTE ROUTER CIPX Sesid State S ADDRESS PROTO NAME MAX SLOT 1 1 opened L 00000057 01 none morse 0 P 00000057 01 none morse 0 LCS60 Point to Point Session ATALK Configuration Feb 05 07 56 18 Sesid State Server Info Ld opened LOCAL Addr 2010 1 Class 1 AT Comp none Zone Research Lab Imp ID V1 1 Route Proto none Router 20
312. pplicable the n option to netstat will disable the symbolic translation of the address fields Unspecified or wildcard addresses and ports are identified by an asterisk The connection display default shows the status of active Internet connections This display includes the protocol the size in bytes of the send and receive queues the local and remote addresses of the transport endpoints and the inter nal state of the connection The A option adds the associated protocol control block PCB to the display The a option includes the inactive connections listen ing servers The n option disables the symbolic translation of the local and remote addresses causing both to be displayed in their Internet dot notation The p protocol option limits the display to the specified protocol The interface display i shows the status of the configured network interfaces This display includes the interface name the maximum transmission unit Mtu in bytes the network and interface addresses the number of packets received and sent and the number of send and receive errors The n option disables the sym bolic translation of the network and interface addresses causing both to be displayed in their Internet dot notation An asterisk after the interface name means the interface is down The routing table display r shows the status of the configured routes This display includes the address of the destination host or network the addre
313. pxping E 27 K Keepalive PPP connection 4 14 Kill 8 8 L LAN G 2 LAN protocols 1 6 LAN to LCS60 to data switch 7 15 LCM 8 13 G 2 start 8 14 stop 8 14 Icm log 8 14 8 47 LCS G 2 LCS50 B 1 LCS60 Backup and Restore Configura tion menu 8 26 Lcsadm 3 4 Lcsadm interface 3 4 8 3 directory structure 8 4 Lcsadm service field A 3 Index IcsstatD log 8 47 Len G 11 Limit G 17 Local addr G 12 Local address G 14 to G 15 Local backup restore 8 27 Local comp slot G 12 Local max slot G 12 Log 8 14 to 8 15 Log file arap log 6 7 asytcp log 7 20 ftslisten log 7 20 gateway services 7 20 ppp log 4 21 server 8 45 slip log 5 14 tcpasy log 7 20 Log file name G 19 Log files 8 47 Log level 8 45 example 8 23 Log levels 8 16 Logging on 8 1 Login A 3 Mac configuration F 1 F 22 connection F 2 user information F 1 Magic G 12 Maintenance 9 1 D 1 commands 3 29 8 18 Manager directory 8 14 commands 8 13 log 8 14 report fields G 19 show 8 15 G 19 start 8 14 stop 8 14 update 8 15 Manual pages 1 21 E 1 Mask bits G 8 Max G 18 Max config G 11 Max term G 11 Maxses G 19 Maxsessions 4 3 5 3 7 3 G 5 Memory dump 9 30 Messages error 8 41 MIB G 2 Modem 2 17 hints F 5 port screen F 16 Mounting 2 6 MRU G 11 Mtu G 9 Multiple IP subnetworks 1 13 MVME197 diagnostics 9 23 faceplate 9 23 MVME712M jumpers 2 10 N NAC
314. quires the user to reconfigure each interface again Enter a name for Ethernet Interface 0 for help q for menu gt morse e0 Enter aliases for morse e0 Separate each alias with blanks Hit return if there are no aliases q to quit gt mor Enter morse e0 internet address e g 154 11 21 1 q to quit gt 154 12 21 5 Enter official name of network 154 12 or q to quit gt dock net Enter aliases for morse Separate each alias with blanks Hit return if there are no aliases q to quit gt gt Is morse 154 12 divided into subnets ly n l y Enter name of subnet to be added for help q for quit gt m net0O Enter number of mask bits for this subnet for help q for quit gt 8 Entering Ethernet interface 0 morse e0 154 12 21 5 gt Is this correct ly n y Ethernet interface 0 morse e0 154 12 21 5 configured Enter Menu Selection Screen 4 5 continued on next page 4 12 Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service Screen 4 5 Continued T k for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q NOTE Changes to the configuration will not take effect until you enter the lcsadm command and then type stop tcpip from the top command directory to stop TCP IP protocol enter the lcsadm command and then type start tcpip from the top command directory to start TCP IP protocol Top gt Config gt k x
315. r Release 4 Version 4 Copyright c 1988 UNISYS Copyright c 1991 1992 1993 Motorola Inc All rights reserved Found 1 CPU s NOTICE MP Locking disabled STREAMS threshold 13738550 Max STREAMS memory 26103245 UNIX R MP System V Release 4 0 Motorola m88k Version R40V4 2 Total real memory 33554432 Available memory 27648000 Copyright c 1984 1986 1987 1988 1990 AT amp T Copyright c 1991 UNIX System Laboratories Inc Copyright c 1987 1988 Microsoft Corp Copyright c 1990 1991 1992 1993 Addamax Copyright c 1990 1991 1992 1993 Motorola Inc All Rights Reserved Node morse Enter lt CR gt to pause in a single user shell before init Default boot sequence continuing Updating modules with master file contents stand unix is being created found in in core EDT BSW id 0 found in in core EDT CONS1X7 id 0 Node morse Enter lt CR gt to pause in a single user shell before init Default boot sequence continuing The system is coming up Please wait configuration change detected creating device nodes sadc Building symbols in tmp sa adrfl for stand unix Starting process accounting Print services started Welcome Your LCS60 Network Interface must be set up by you When you see the prompt you must login as root and then type lcsadm config initsetup Me login followed by the RETURN key This will lead you through the steps to configure wy 9 12 Issue 3
316. r bal2 12 MODULE ADDRESS 18 Se 7 Issue 3 2 13 aJeMPJEH Installing the LCS60 Screen 2 1 continued a PORT NUMBER 1 12 1 12 11 COMMENT up to 60 chars double quoted console for lcs60 morse MNEMONIC ADDRESS up to 8 chars morscon PAD SUPPORT yes no no Return console to morse gmorscon ORIGINATING GROUP NAME SECURITY PATTERN S INITIAL SERVICE STATE in out out in CCO gt restore ty MODULE ADDRESS 18 PORT NUMBER 1 12 11 CCO gt X DIRECTORY ENTRY up to 30 chars double quoted GROUP S up to 4 groups separated by commas comma separated pattern list same_as none LEVEL network area exchange local speedcall x SERVICE TYPE console dialer host modem 2way or terminal terminal console GROUP up to 8 chars gmorscon g g BAUD RATE 300 1200 9600 ext auto 9600 Return ab EXTERNAL BAUD RATE 2400 4800 19200 2400 Return PARITY off even odd off Return J FLOW CONTROL OF TY 12 BY DEVICE xon_xoff eia none none Return FLOW CONTROL OF DEVICE BY TY 12 xon_xoff eia none xon_xoff Return O IS AN AT amp T VDM CONNECTED TO THIS LINE yes no Return ran TY TYPE 12 or bal2 Delete L CCO gt enter address LEVEL local area exchange local speedcall local local TYPE numeric mnemonic both mnemonic Return none none none none
317. r menu gt q CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 3 The LCS60 IPX Parameters are configured as follows Ethernet Network Number lt 1562 gt Virtual Network Number lt 57 gt Ethernet Frame Type lt Ethernet II gt CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection Ne ss Issue 3 4 9 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q NOTICE To allow IPX configuration changes to take effect you must first stop and restart the IPX software as follows lcsadm c stop ipx lcsadm c start ipx 10 Configure the AppleTalk network zone atalkas m Enter atalkas at the Top gt Config gt prompt or enter config atalkas from the Top directory m Follow the on screen instructions for setting up the AppleTalk network number and zone name Refer to Screen 4 4 The virtual AppleTalk address must be defined it is used for dynamic all
318. r system 3 Exit without doing anything reboot 4 Enter maintenance mode Enter option number of choice 1 4 ctri c m 28 O Cc Q Q Q lt Installation Upgrade Interrupt You have interrupted the installation or upgrade No modifications to the system have yet taken place 1 Restart the installation 2 Reboot the machine 3 Shutdown the machine Enter option number of choice 1 3 1 1 Analyzing configuration P 11 For the Seagate ST5660N drive only Enter Return once the How to Type Responses screen is displayed again 12 For both the Fujitsu and Seagate ST5660N drives Continue with the dialo gue that follows D 4 Issue 3 UNIX System Software Installation a The display options currently assume your terminal has 24 lines unknown cursor addressing a Set Display Options 1 No change proceed with installation or upgrade 2 Change the number of lines and return to this screen 3 Select vt100 cursor addressing 4 Select wyse50 cursor addressing 5 Select unknown cursor addressing ie sae me aoe oa a UNIX SYSTEM V 88 Release 4 Upgrade Installation Enter option number of choice You have the following options 1 Full installation 2 Upgrade an existing R40V2 or later system Do you want to continue yn y Package Selection Confirmation 3 Exit without doing anything reboot 4 Enter maintenance mode Enter option number of choice
319. rKeeper II NMS Graphics User Guide for details on StarKeeper II NMS alarms L600600 LCS60STATD process exiting Description The lcs60statD process has terminated execution Action None required StarKeeper II NMS will report a link down condition for the LCS60 within several minutes of receiving this message it will then attempt to reestablish connection to the LCS60 The Ics60statD process will automatically be restarted when the connection is reestablished B 6 Issue 3 Alarms to StarKeeper II NMS L600610 Interface to lt interface id gt is down reason n Description The LCS60 is not able to transmit data over the specified interface Reason code 1 Loss of carrier detected for the physical Ethernet interface Action The recommended action for reason code 1 is as follows Verify the con nection of the Ethernet interface to the LCS60 and verify the physical state of the Ethernet network The LCS60 does not need to be rebooted when the physical connection is reestablished L600625 Process lcm is down Description The lcm process is not executing Action Restart the LCM by executing Icsadm c manager start on the system con sole If the problem occurs again reboot the system from the console using cd etc shutdown y g0 i6 Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists L600630 Process routed is down Description The routed process is not executing Action Restart the routed process b
320. range or ignored altogether by using a fixed user ID See Table A 2 Regardless of the user ID mapping mode specified a valid etc passwd entry must exist for the resultant user ID in order for the server table entry to match the call request A program cannot be invoked with an invalid or illegal user ID gt xe D 2 x gt Issue 3 A 5 lt 28 O Cc Q Q Q lt srvtab Table A 2 User ID Mapping Options Option Description n o Use the numeric user ID supplied in the call request information The o means the user ID should be interpreted as an octal number The n indicates the user ID should be treated as a self determining number For example an initial 0x or 0X indicates hexadecimal and an initial 0 indicates octal The n and o user ID formats will only provide a valid match if an etc passwd file entry exists with the same numerical user ID and the password has not expired The group id is determined from that password file entry Translate the supplied user ID and group id names using the dkuidtab file This type of entry matches only those user IDs which have entries in the dkuidtab file This facility allows a user with a user ID on one host to be preauthorized as a user with a different numerical user ID on another host This preauthorization is performed by the authorize command lt uid gt uid The previous two forms can be further restricted to a range of user ID
321. rdware error messages 8 42 installation 2 1 requirements 3 1 HDLC G 2 Header compression 1 12 to 1 13 F 13 Help 1 2 Host G 1 G 7 address G 7 interface name G 1 Hyphen service field A 3 Idle G 17 Idle time G 10 IETF G 2 Ifconfig E 19 Ifstat E 21 Iftrace E 24 Imp ID G 13 Inactivity timeout G 7 option 7 9 Indicators 2 1 Inet package removal 9 8 Initial configuration 3 3 Issue 2 Initial parms field A 7 Initial setup 3 3 Initsetup 3 6 8 5 example 3 6 Installation 2 6 application software 9 9 CPM HS module 2 20 hardware 2 1 StarKeeper II NMS B 1 UFS Utility Fixes tape 9 7 Interface G 2 address G 4 G 8 name G 4 Internet G 2 Internet host address G 5 Internet network address G 5 InterPPP F 14 Inuse G 20 IP address assignment 1 17 4 15 assignment by the LCS60 1 17 configuration 4 4 5 4 privately administered static 4 15 screen F 17 server 4 5 5 4 static 4 15 5 11 IP addressing reserved 5 11 IP network address 4 7 5 7 IP network security group 1 15 2 21 4 3 5 3 IP network security group name G 5 IP packets routed 1 7 IP routing 1 14 IP subnetworks 1 13 Ipas 3 15 4 4 5 3 to 5 4 IPCP G 2 Issue 2 IPX 4 7 G 2 IPX address 4 7 IPX example screens F 9 IPX header compression 4 15 IPX network configuration 4 7 IPX over PPP F 6 IPX parameters 4 7 IPX protocol 1 9 IPX virtual network assignment 1 9 Ipxas 3 23 Ipxnetstat E 26 I
322. responses how to enter 9 2 D 2 System software reload 9 1 D 1 T Table top mounting 2 8 Tape backup to 8 27 list contents 8 30 restore from 8 29 Tape Backup Management menu 8 28 server 8 38 TCP gateway sessions 1 11 TCP service ports 1 11 TCP window size G 7 tcpasy log 7 20 8 47 TCP IP configuration commands 3 28 TCP IP protocol 1 6 tcplisten log 8 47 Tcpsock 1 10 7 14 A 3 see also Socket service TCP to async gateway service 1 6 7 3 8 39 configuration parameters G 6 example 7 12 Tcpws G 16 Technical support 1 2 Telnet 1 6 7 11 8 39 E 43 dialstring options 7 8 inactivity timeout option 7 9 l 14 return to DESTINATION option 7 10 service port 7 3 Telnet service G 3 options 7 8 Telnet service field A 3 Time and date reset 9 21 Timeout inactivity G 7 wait for input G 7 Timeout Secs G 11 Top directory 3 5 8 5 commands 8 5 start stop 8 6 Total G 16 G 18 Total servers G 19 Total ses cfg G 19 Total ses used G 19 Trace 8 9 arap 6 6 example 4 20 6 6 Ppp 4 20 slip 5 14 tcp 7 19 Trace arap G 13 Trace async G 14 Trace ppp G 15 Trace slip G 15 Trace tcp G 14 example 7 19 Traps SNMP 1 7 Troubleshooting 8 46 TY configuration 2 14 Types 8 10 8 13 8 16 Issue 2 Cc FS Utility Fixes tape installation 9 7 JNIX commands 1 21 NIX System software installation 9 1 D 1 pdate 8 12 8 15 pgrade 1 20 8 21 R1 0 to R3 0
323. restore cannot be done Security Authorizing Clients and Servers To ensure the integrity of a network containing backup restore servers and clients the centralized backup restore facility requires that 1 Servers identify which machines clients are authorized to store backups on their hard disk Issue 3 8 31 Cc 2 5 O lt Backup and Restore Operations 2 Clients identify which machines servers are authorized to copy backups from them and restore backups to them Centralized backup restore operations can only proceed when server and client authorizations agree Access to Backup Restore Functions Clients and Servers By default an LCS60 is configured as a backup restore client An LCS60 is automatically configured as a backup restore server as soon as it defines its first client To access the centralized backup restore functions needed by a backup restore client use the Backup Restore menu Screen 8 9 obtained by selecting option 1 from Screen 8 8 To access these functions from a backup restore server select option 2 from the LCS60 Backup and Restore Configuration Menu Screen 8 8 this will display Screen 8 11 Screen 8 11 Centralized Backup Restore Menu Server a k CENTRALIZED BACKUP RESTORE MENU SERVER 1 Define delete and list backup restore clients 2 Create delete and restore backups 3 Create a backup tape for a client Enter Menu Selection
324. restore capability can be used at any time by any LCS60 whether it is a backup restore client a backup restore server or if it operates in a network without a backup restore server This capability saves and restores variable files by copying reading them to from removable tape cartridges that have been inserted into the integral tape drive gt a 3 l D QD w e To access the local backup restore functions 1 Enter lcsadm config backup at the root prompt 2 Select menu item 1 from the LCS60 Backup and Restore Configuration menu shown in Screen 8 8 Screen 8 9 will be displayed Issue 3 8 27 Cc BS 5 O lt Backup and Restore Operations Screen 8 9 Backup Restore Menu m gt BACKUP RESTORE MENU 1 Define delete and list backup_restore servers 2 Create delete and restore backups from a remote server 3 Copy backups to from tape Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT for HELP or to GO BACK Jj gt 3 Ms FZ To copy all variable configuration files to tape select item 3 on the Backup Restore menu Screen 8 9 and then item 3 on the Tape Backup Management menu Screen 8 10 Screen 8 10 Tape Backup Management Menu a gt TAPE BACKUP MANAGEMENT MENU 1 Display the contents of a backup restore tape 2 Selectively copy variable files from tape to disk 3 Copy ALL variable files to tape Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT
325. rface always has four components You may specify the interface alias name a name that can be used in place of the interface name It can be any name but is usually an abbreviation of the name Separate each alias with blanks or tabs Specify a name for the interface to the LAN For example the inter face name is morse e0 for the LCS60 named morse The interface name cannot be more than 31 characters Interface names may con tain letters numbers dashes and underscores You may specify the network s alias names names that can be used in place of the official network name Separate each alias with blanks or tabs Specify the name of the network up to 31 characters to which this interface is connected e g dock net Network names may contain letters numbers dashes and underscores The system will ask if the network is subnetted and if so prompt for subnet information actually taking the user through the subnetwork configuration option prompts Issue 3 Glossary DNS Resolver dns domain The domain this machine and its name server s belong to nameserver The nameserver is identified by its internet address using dotted decimal notation Multiple servers may be defined in your confi guration file they will be accessed in the order listed until a con nection to a server is made Define Service Sessions maxsessions session This parameter defines the session type async to TCP asytcp parameter TCP to a
326. ring A single asterisk may be used to match any requested service and the special entry is used to match the case where no specific service was requested by the dialstring You may add additional unique services to the server table but the following alphabetically listed services are distributed as part of the standard product File Service hyphen null generally login arap ARAP asterisk wild card matches any requested service authorize authorize see also the section User Field cbr LCS60 backup and restore do do invoke commands on remote hosts Icsadm LCS60 administrative interface login login PPP PPP pupu file transfer question directory assistance delivered in disabled state rl auto login rx remote execution slip SLIP tcpsock socket telnet telnet uucp uucp whoami invokes the echo command gt xe D 2 x gt For complete details of the standard delivered services refer to the CommKit Host Interface 386 486 Computer Installation and Administration Guide refer to Chapter 1 for ordering information Issue 3 A 3 srvtab Flags Field The flags field of a server table mapping line contains one or more flags that may be used to control or modify the actions the server takes when processing a call request that has been mapped to that line Flags specify options that are unique to the mapped line A brief description of each flag is provided in Table A 1
327. rm Sep 25 08 45 40 112 0 000 The number in parentheses is the process ID of the dkserver process encountering the problem The number in brackets 0 000 is in x yyy format x indicates the interface number and yyy indicates the channel number on which the error occurred If you get this error message look in the dksrvlog file for additional information and check the state of the CPM HS module on the data switch node console and all hardware connections Call Error Messages The error messages that may appear when placing a call through the CommKit Host Interface are listed in Appendix C 8 44 Issue 3 Error Messages Lucent Technologies Data Switch Server Log File The log file dksrvlog is written to by LCS60 interface software and contains infor mation about incoming call requests The default log file name is oar opt dk log dksrvlog network_security_group_name There will be as many dksrvlog files as there are multiple subnetworks configured For the example in Figure 3 1 the three dksrvlog files are dksrvlog morse dksrvlog Library and dksrvlog Techs The dksrvlog file name may be changed with the 1 option of the dkserver com mand The v option specifies the amount of information that will be written to the file i e log level Its contents can be displayed by use of the pg command as shown in the following example Each entry in the dksrvlog file begins with a time stamp The first message logged after the dks
328. rror commonly occurs with finger requests Server failure The name server found an internal inconsistency in its database and could not return a valid answer Refused The name server refused to service the request Format error The name server found that the request packet was not in the proper for mat NOTE This error indicates that there is a bug in the program NOTES If you are connected to a name server that handles more than one domain all host names used in requests must be fully qualified by their domain For example the server seismo css gov handles three domains harvard edu css gov and cornell edu A request for the host aiken in the domain harvard edu must be speci fied as aiken harvard edu The set domain name and set defname commands can be used to automatically append a domain name to each request SEE ALSO named 1M resolver 3 named boot 4 resolv conf 4 Issue 3 E 33 PING 1M PING NAME ping send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets SYNOPSIS ping r v host packetsize count DESCRIPTION Ping is intended for use in network testing measurement and management pri marily for manual fault isolation The DARPA Internet is a large and complex aggregation of network hardware connected by gateways Tracking a single point hardware or software failure can often be difficult Ping uses the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP mandatory ECHO REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE fro
329. rt e g a TY 12 port 2 12 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 1 Serial Port 1 should be optioned to emulate DCE operation This is the default therefore if you haven t changed anything there will be no need to change the option 2 Connect the LCS60 rear panel connector labeled Serial Port 1 to an asyn chronous port using a straight through connection D8AH connector connect the 25 pin end to the LCS60 3 Configure the asynchronous port on the data switch according to Table 2 4 as a receiving group Conduct the dialogues shown in Screen 2 1 or 2 2 on the data switch console to a Configure a group on the data switch network for the asynchronous port connected to the LCS60 b Configure a name pointing to this group which can be used to access the LCS60 console port Refer to the appropriate Lucent Technologies data switch Node Reference Guide for complete instructions Note If you already have a terminal attached to the data switch that has a DES TINATION prompt skip to step 7 Screen 2 1 TY Configuration Dialogue oa gt CCO gt enter group GROUP up to 8 chars gmorscon TYPE local trunk local local DIRECTION originate receive 2way receive DEVICE OR HOST up to 8 chars morscon HOST AUTOBAUD on off off off ROUND ROBIN SERVICE per_port per_module none none Return Creating New Host morscon GROUP up to 8 chars Delete CCO gt enter ty TY TYPE 12 o
330. rtual PPP Interface Configura tion Parameters enter the virtual IPX network number For example in Figure 3 1 morse s actual IPX network number is 1562 and its virtual IPX network is 57 Frame Type Enter the type of framing ethernet 802 2 802 3 or snap used in the IPX network TCP to Asynchronous Gateway Services srvports enable The NOHUP feature keeps a telnet session active after the vir NOHUP no tual circuit is disconnected The benefit is automatic reconnec hangup tion into the data switch network Enter y to keep the session up when the data switch is disconnected this will force the LCS60 to attempt to re establish the connection when the data switch is up enable 2WAY works in conjunction with NOHUP With 2WAY enabled 2WAY the telnet user will be prompted to enter the Return key before automatic reconnection into the data switch network Enter y if you want the LCS60 to wait for the user to press the _Return_ key before it attempts to re establish the connection enable SID The SID feature works in conjunction with NOHUP SID allows the LAN user to automatically pass back through a security server without having to re authenticate The period of time that this automatic bypass stays active is dependent on the security server administrator Enter y to enable this feature only if the service port is defined to establish telnet service to a NAC Secu rity Server This feature allows the LCS60 to recognize author i
331. s 8 26 m Local and Remote Modes 8 27 m Backup Restore Tape Local Mode 8 27 To Back Up to Tape 8 27 To Restore from Tape 8 29 To List the Contents of a Tape 8 30 m Centralized Backup Restore Remote Mode 8 30 Security Authorizing Clients and Servers 8 31 m Access to Backup Restore Functions Clients and Servers 8 32 Defining Backup Restore Servers on a Client 8 33 Defining Backup Restore Clients on the Server 8 34 Backup or Restore Functions 8 35 Creating a Tape 8 38 Network Access Password Option 8 38 m Deleting the Network Access Password 8 40 m Changing the Network Access Password 8 40 Status 8 40 Error Messages 8 41 m Error Messages from the LCS60 Fiber Interface 8 42 Console Error Messages 8 42 Hardware Error Messages 8 42 Server Error Messages 8 44 m Call Error Messages 8 44 m Lucent Technologies Data Switch Server Log File 8 45 m Additional Log Files 8 46 9 Maintenance Reload System Software 9 1 m UNIX System Software Installation 9 1 m UFS Utility Fixes Tape Installation 9 7 m inet Package Removal 9 8 vi Issue 2 Table of Contents m LCS60 Application Software Installation 9 9 Removing the LCS60 Application Software 9 13 Upgrade 9 15 Remote Upgrade 9 16 m Installing an Upgrade on a Remote Upgrade Client 9 16 Processor Board Firmware Update 9 19 Processor Diagnostics MVME197 9 23 VMEDKHS Diagnostics 9 25 Connection Verification 9 28 LCS60 to Data Switch Connected Host Verification dkcu 9 28 LC
332. s F 6 m Windows 95 IPX over PPP F 6 PC Configuration F 7 PPP Connection F 9 m WIN PC TCP 3 0 F 9 PC Configuration F 9 PPP Connection F 11 m InterPPP F 14 m Connection F 14 SLIP Service Examples F 19 m ChameleonNFS 4 0 F 19 ARAP Service Example F 22 m Connection via Modem F 22 G Glossary Glossary G 1 m General G 1 m Parameters G 3 AppleTalk Network Zone atalkas G 3 Ethernet Interface etherif G 4 DNS Resolver dns G 5 Define Service Sessions maxsessions G 5 SLIP PPP Service ipas ipx G 5 TCP to Asynchronous Gateway Services srvports G 6 Subnetwork Configuration subnet G 7 m Report Fields G 8 Session Directory G 8 Ports Directory G 16 Service Directory G 17 Issue 2 ix Table of Contents Manager Directory Server Directory Index Index Issue 2 Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 8 1 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure F 1 Figure F 2 Figure F 3 Figure F 4 Figure F 5 Figure F 6 Figure F 7 Issue 2 LCS60 as an AppleTalk Router AppleTalk Virtual Zone IPX Virtual Network IP Routing with the LCS60 IP Address Assignment Mounting the LCS60 Cabinet MVME712M Header Locations and Factory Jumper Placeme
333. s attempted for an entry that wasn t present in the tables MTU too large The entry was not added to the table because the MTU value requested was too large no current route to gateway The entry was not added to the table because there is no route to gateway routing table overflow The entry was not added to the table because the table is full already exists br The entry was not added to the table because the same route already exists illegal flags set RTF_UP flag not on Using the flush command of route 1M while routed 1M is running will cause inconsistencies in the route tables If this happens the route daemon routed 1M must be restarted SEE ALSO Issue 3 netstat 1 named 1M routed 1M E 41 STATLCS 1M STATLCS NAME statlcs check the interfaces and core processes status of the LCS60 SYNOPSIS statlcs t DESCRIPTION statlcs with t displays the status to the terminal without the t option statlcs out puts the status into the file tmp statlcs log EXAMPLES An example of statlcs t is shown LCS60 STATUS REPORT Ethernet interface status Interface to en0 is UP Data Switch status Fiber Interface to data switch is UP Process status routed is UP snmpd is UP tlid is UP inetinit is UP lcm is UP dkdaemon is UP morse is UP IP Network Security Group atmgr is UP ipxd ISS URs sapd is UP Where morse is the official name i e nodename of your
334. s by appending lt uid or gt uid to the field This restricts the incoming user ID to be less than or greater than the specified decimal number For example n gt 0 prevents root user ID 0 from matching the line Only one modifier may be appended to an entry login This type of entry provides a fixed login name that is used for all matching call requests The login user ID format will return a valid match as long as a valid etc passwd entry exists for login Fixed login name specifications are useful for assigning a single uucp login to a group of originating sites The facility is also useful when invoking authorization type services that require a fixed set of per missions The login user ID format can be thought of as a form of setuid facility since all call requests are mapped to the same login ID Program Field The program field of a server table entry contains the pathname of the program to be executed The field may contain a s which will be replaced by the pathname of the user s shell as obtained from the etc passwd file The server uses the execv library function when invoking programs so only paths to binary executables may be specified in the program field of a server table entry The path should be fully specified for example usr lbin program for each entry in the server table A 6 Issue 3 srvtab Initial Parms Field The initial parms field fixed program arguments field of a
335. s call address in the form area exchange local when prompted This authorizes the server to establish the necessary connections Note Do not exit or quit at this time You will need to perform some additional steps later on throughout this procedure 4 Log on to the server from the system console as root z D 5 o gt 5 D O 4 5 Access the Remote Upgrade Installation Menu using lcsadm c config upgrade 5 On the server select item 5 under the SERVER Procedures and answer the prompts accordingly Note A server can only maintain i e spool one copy of an LCS60 software generic and an LCS60 patch Therefore if a copy already resides on the server this procedure will automatically remove it before copying the newer generic from tape onto disk Issue 3 9 17 1 Cc c 0 a Remote Upgrade Note 10 11 12 13 14 Note 9 18 On the server select item 6 to transfer the software generic from the server to the client Before the copy is initiated the client is checked to ensure it has sufficient disk space to receive and store the copy The software is downloaded in the client s save area Do not continue with step 8 until this transfer has completed After the transfer from the server is complete on the client select menu item 2 This will remove the previously installed software generic and patch if a patch is installed and stop all servi
336. s connected to the LCS60 by means of a data switch network enter the appropriate console name entered in Screens 2 1 or 2 2 in response to the DESTINATION prompt 3 Power up the LCS60 by turning the on off switch to on Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Figure 2 7 LCS60 Rear Panel AC Connections To Asynchronous Terminal Coaxial Cable 2 l 2 D O Serial Pot1 Serial Pot 2 o conle nyoy 9 P fan System Reset C Interface Je T Serial Pot3 SerialPot4 Ethemet Printer See Inset a RX for AC and DC inf iit connections LE Q Ethemet Transceiver Cab To Ethemet Transceiver or Multipoint Transc eiver Unit O O Fiberto Data Switch CPM HS On Off y Switch Sa AC Connection DC Connection 110 VAC Power 48 VDC Power Source 2 26 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Power Down Procedures Only a user logged on as root may shut the system down at the system console When logged on as a user log off and log back on as root refer to Chapter 8 As shipped the root password is the Return key At the root prompt enter etc shutdo
337. s must be mapped by means of the server table there are no privileged calls that can bypass this procedure The server table is a directory containing files whose names correspond to the names of requested services For example etc opt dk srvtab pupu is the name of the file used for the file transfer service pupu Comments are indicated by a character in the first column and are ignored dur ing call validation and mapping Use comments to describe the function of map ping lines You may also use comments to disable mapping lines without remov ing them from the file Mapping lines in srvtab table consist of six tab separated fields Issue 3 A 1 gt xe O D 2 x gt lt Ra O Cc Q Q Q lt srvtab system service flags user program initial parameters Note Delimit fields by tabs only Do not use blanks These fields are described below System Field The system field originating group contains a pattern against which originating groups are matched The format of the pattern is area exchange group user where the suffixes and user are optional The area exchange group pattern may be specified in one of the following ways m completely specified as in lc sporty hotrod m consisting of a single asterisk wild card as in The originating group suffix may be specified for originating group patterns that end with an asterisk wild card The exclamation point prevents
338. s not assigned to the host connected CPM HS module Address too long The call was denied because the length of the dialstring was larger than the network maximum All channels busy All assigned ports channels are in use or are marked as not available by the remote endpoint All trunk channels busy One of the network control computers has run out of some resource and is unable to process the call at this time Auto dialer failed to initiate call Try again The autodialer on the called port responded to the data switch node and failed during dialing If this message appears more than twice in succes sion contact the data switch Network Administrator Bad Parameter The dkdial routine was called with an invalid parameter Call did not go through Try again The autodialer on the called port responded to the data switch node and failed during dialing If this message appears more than twice in succes sion contact the data switch Network Administrator Call Failed Unknown call setup or remote host error Connection broken Try again later The call cannot be completed The connection was broken enroute to the destination Try again Issue 3 Outgoing Call Error Messages m Could not complete your call Try again The call could not be completed because The autodialer failed to complete the dialing sequence or The port connected to the autodialer was removed from service during the call m Destination not rec
339. s on the MVME197 are on solid contact your service representative Caution Use the exit command or ctrl d to log off the system console and use a break break sequence to disconnect The break break sequence will not log you off the console so you must first type exit or cirl d to log off Verify Fiber Connection The newer CPM HS modules have a red LED on the CPM HS paddleboard that indicates if the cable has not been installed correctly If this LED is lit or if after configuring the CPM HS module the following message appears NOTICE DKHSO Interface is down TX HANG KKKKKKKKKK The CommKit Server for morse is having problems x Please get someone to attend to it The last error was May 16 07 49 20 273 O0 dkmgr Can t open dev dk dial0 KKK KKK KKK reverse the fiber cable connection on either the LCS60 or CPM HS whichever is more convenient if the machine doesn t recover after a few minutes stop and start dkhost from the Icsadm interface If the error message appears again per form a diagnostic check as described in Chapter 9 2 28 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 Configure the LCS60 Configure the LCS60 as directed in Chapters 3 through 7 LAN Connections oJeMpJEH Ethernet Connections to an Ethernet LAN are made by a standard DB15 Ethernet trans ceiver cable The MVME197 processor board supports a single LAN connection Refer to Figure 2 7 and follow the steps in the procedure belo
340. s they remain unique Valid keywords are no aaonly Allow authoritative query only all Print the current values of options to set as well as information about the current default server and host ALL Print the current values of all options to set including the hidden options as well as information about the current default server and host no d2 Print exhaustive debugging information no debug Turn debugging mode on More information is printed about the packet sent to the server and the resulting answer The default is nodebug no ldefname Append the default domain name to the host name for every search The default is nodefname domain domain Change the default domain name to domain no ignore Ignore truncation errors no primary Use the primary server for the queries E 31 NSLOOKUP 1 NSLOOKUP type qtype query qtype Specify the type of information requested from the name server The NS and SOA records apply to a domain the PTR records apply to a reverse Internet address the remaining records apply to a host A Internet address the default of the host CNAME canonical official name for an alias HINFO host CPU and operating system type MB mail destination MG mail group member MINFO mailbox or mail list information MR mail rename domain name MX mail exchanger NS primary name server for the domain PTR host having the Internet address SOA Start of Authority information for a domain WK
341. s will clear the current memory status Abort leaves the current status intact Pressing the Abort button will dump all of the current program regis ters to the screen This information is vital 3 Atypical register dump is shown in the screen below e Format Vector 1108 PC 000054AC SR 3000 TR OFF_SM_O_ VBR 00004000 USP O01FFFEF8 MSP 04000E64 ISP 0018BBFC SFC 1 UD CACR 2111 D W E_I B E CAAR 00000000 DFC 1 UD DO 00000000 D1 00000020 D2 00003600 D3 0000001C D4 0000001C D5 00000000 D6 00002000 D7 00000000 AO 00000000 Al 00010202 A2 00000000 A3 0017F980 A4 0017EBA0 A5 001398E8 A6 04000E70 A7 04000E64 000054AC 4E75 RTS a r 4 If there is no dump of register information enter rd at the 197 Diag gt prompt to dump the registers 5 At the 197 Diag gt prompt enter menu for the Service Menu Screen 9 8 o oO Cc Cc oO ca 9 30 Issue 3 Memory Dump Screen 9 8 Service Menu 1 Continue System Start Up 2 Select Alternate Boot Device 3 Go to System Debugger 4 Initiate Service Call 5 Display System Test Errors 6 Dump Memory to Tape Enter Menu 6 Atthe Service Menu enter 6 to dump memory to tape 7 Continue with the dialogue below use Return to select defaults Do you wish to dump memory N Y y Controller LUN 04 Device LUN 00 Change DLUN and or CLUN Y N y Controller LUN 0
342. scape character for the session The 8 option will enable eight bit mode for the session Host can be either a host name or Internet address see hosts 4 Port can be either a service name or number see services 4 If no port number is specified telnet will attempt to contact the server at the default port options quit Toggle viewing of TELNET options processing When disabled default options negotiation is conducted silently When enabled options negotia tion will be displayed Options sent by the local server are labelled SENT options received from the remote server are labelled RCVD Close the open TELNET connection if there is one and exit to the local shell status Show the current status of the telnet connection modes and options transnvt command Send Network Virtual Terminal NVT commands to the remote server over an open connection The NVT commands help to preserve such func tions as abort output interrupt and break which may be invoked by dif ferent keystrokes on the local and remote hosts When command is speci fied telnet will send that NVT command and return to the command or input mode prompt When command is omitted telnet will enter transnvt mode as indicated by the transnvt gt prompt To send an NVT command in this mode enter com mand at the prompt To return to command or input mode from transnvt mode enter a carriage return at the transnvt gt prompt E 45 TELNET 1 NOTES
343. scribed in detail in Chapters 3 7 the following configuration commands are available from the Config directory Name addhost delhost or addnet delnet Synopsis addhost or addnet gt a 3 D o w e Description The addhost delhost commands allow the system adminis trator to add or delete hosts names and addresses in the network by adjusting the LCS60 database file The addnet delnet commands allow the system administrator to add or delete the network by adjusting the LCS60 database file Name datetime Synopsis datetime Description This command allows the system administrator to set the date and time Refer to initsetup in Chapter 3 Issue 3 8 17 Icsadm Interface Name nodename Synopsis nodename Description This command allows the system administrator to set change the LCS60 node name Refer to initsetup in Chapter 3 Name subnet Synopsis subnet Description This command allows the system administrator to enter subnetwork information for the LCS60 The following administrative maintenance commands are available from the Config directory Name backup Synopsis backup Description This command generates a menu which allows you to per form the full range of LCS60 backup and restore opera tions Refer to the section Backup and Restore Operations later in this chapter Cc 2 oO 5 LE O lt Name console Synopsis console Description This command is used to
344. se by another user The LCS60 may have already dynami cally assigned the requested IP address to another IP session m Nota match to any reserved IP address that has been allocated by the LCS60 administrator except for a reserved IP address set aside for that user s user ID 5 10 Issue 3 Reserved IP Address The user requests a reserved IP address by omitting the D option on his her data switch dialstring and by having a negotiable IP address administered in his her client software package The reserved IP address must be centrally administered by the LCS60 administrator prior to the user s call To find that user s reserved IP address the LCS60 searches its configuration database with both the IP network security group name and the user ID field The latter value is extracted from the u option appended to the data switch dialstring by the NAC In the absence of a NAC or an explicit u option the user ID defaults to the value guest If the LCS60 does not find a reserved IP address for the given combination of the IP network and user ID then the session start up request is assigned a dynamic IP address If the reserved IP address is allocated when a second session setup attempt is made for the same user ID the call is refused with a slip is busy error refer also to Appendix C A given user ID can have multiple reserved IP addresses one for each of the IP network security groups that has been configured on a LCS60
345. select StartPPP then close the window 5 Under Configure select PPP choose the PPP settings Figure F 6 then close the window F 14 Issue 3 PPP Service Examples Note To set the IP address under Configure select TCP IP Figure F 7 and enter the IP address in Local IP Address Note If you are using a privately administered IP address enter it in the Local IP Address field otherwise the LCS60 will dynamically assign an IP address if a negotiable IP address has been admin istered in the client software package From the Main Screen Figure F 8 Enter the phone number or the dialstring Under File select Save As to save the setup to a file name for example lcs60 This will allow you to launch Ics60 the next time you want to establish the PPP connection rather than repeating this procedure Select Connect from the main screen Figure F 8 to make the connection Note The status will be displayed on the right side of the main screen as shown in Figure F 8 To check AppleTalk status select AppleTalk under Configure This will display a screen similar to that shown in Figure F 9 For additional status under Status select Status for overall status of the connection Activity Log to see log entries of the connection Cc n oO 3 e 3 je Issue 3 F 15 PPP Service Examples Figure F 5 Network Control Panel Control Panels 26 items 32 1 MB in disk
346. set system console parameters Currently it can be used to enable or disable the autobaud feature Refer to the section System Console Parameters Autobaud later in this chapter Name softwarekey Synopsis softwarekey 8 18 Issue 3 Icsadm Interface Description This command generates a menu which allows you to display and configure the software key parameters for your LCS60 softwarekey is invoked by the initsetup pro gram since a key is required to activate any services you configure for the LCS60 You must obtain a software key from 1 800 WE2CARE for your particular LCS60 before you can complete the softwarekey command An example of the softwarekey command is shown below The software key is specific to the release of the LCS60 and will not grant access to features introduced in later releases d 5 Top gt Config gt softwarekey SOFTWARE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Display LCS60 Machine ID 2 Enter Software Certificate and Software Key 3 Display Software Certificate and Software Key Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 1 gt a 3 D Q w e LCS60 ID XXXXXXXX SOFTWARE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Display LCS60 Machine ID 2 Enter Software Certificate and Software Key 3 Display Software Certificate and Software Key Enter Menu Selection Type q to quit or for help gt 2 A valid LCS60 registration record has been found on your system
347. sions atalkas The examples in this chapter use the individual commands If previous configuration for example for PPP service has been performed some of the steps required for configuring the LCS60 for ARAP service may have already been completed e g atalkas Skip the steps that have been completed previously Note The user should familiarize him herself with all aspects of the LCS60 ARAP and AppleTalk service Refer to Chapter 1 After configuring the LCS60 as described under Initial Setup in Chapter 3 per form the steps shown in Figure 6 2 to configure the LCS60 ARAP Service Issue 3 6 1 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for ARAP Service Figure 6 2 Configuring ARAP Service config protocol J atalk arap past ind maxsessions gt atalkas network name zA il srvsetup etherif start all a contigure EN S O side of ARAP etherif is not required for service d ARAP service however it e p is required if other services such as PPP are being configured as well 1 Obtain the AppleTalk network number and zone name for the virtual network The network number must be unique in the AppleTalk internet 2 Enter the lcsadm interface 3 Add the ARAP service m Enter protocol from Config or config protocol from the Top directory m Add atalk as required m Add arap 4 Define the ARAP service sessions maxsessions
348. sions are not necessarily all active Details of the telnet service are given in Chapter 7 Refer to the CommKit Internal Interface Specification for details of the Universal Re ceiver Protocol URP 1 10 Issue 3 Remote Access Protocols The TCP gateway sessions take advantage of the highly efficient fiber interface between the LCS60 and the data switch With this service any TCP IP host that can be reached on the LAN is accessible from the data switch network For LAN users connection is generally provided through a DESTINATION prompt how ever a TCP service port can be customized to bypass this prompt and automati cally connect the LAN user directly to a particular data switch end point sounjee4 Refer to Chapter 7 for configuration of gateway services TCP Service Ports A TCP service port is identified by a port number and can be customized to streamline the transition from the TCP IP network to the data switch network These ports can be configured with predefined destinations PDDs disconnect options window size changes time limit options for the DESTINATION prompt and for data transmission and customized destination prompts The number of TCP service ports is 500 each port can be defined with a unique PDD offering the administrator enhanced flexibility in terms of the number of data switch network connected hosts than can be contacted by each LCS60 Serial Line IP SLIP The LCS60 provides SLIP pr
349. specified was net accepted by Ihe server gou are calling Figure F 15 ARAP Remote Access Setup Modem Example O Remote Access Setup ca Modem Setup Madem Hayes Optima 14 4 Y Port Madem Speaker on Jar Dialing Tone Puke o kyrra dial tana H Use MAP 10 error correction in modem a far oO Z O 4 i i fod 72 Note Hayes Optima 14 4 in the figure above is the dialing script CCL which contains the necessary instructions to set up the modem and log on to the LCS60 Modem Port is used to select which device the modem is connected to the modem port is usually designated F 24 Issue 3 ARAP Service Example Figure F 16 ARAP Remote Access Status Screen Example Remote Accegs Status ae Connection Established a Connected to F brown Time connected 0 00 16 Time remaining Unlimited Disconnect Issue 3 F 25 Cc n D a h 2 x 3 sed 2 ARAP Service Example Cc Q 5 oO O ro fod 72 mD F 26 Issue 3 Glossary Issue 3 Glossary General Parameters m AppleTalk Network Zone atalkas m Ethernet Interface etherif m DNS Resolver dns m Define Service Sessions maxsessions m SLIP PPP Service ipas ipx m TCP to Asynchronous Gateway Services srvports m Subnetwork Configuration subnet Report Fields m Session Directory m Ports Directory m Service Directory m
350. ss of the gateway host the status and type of the route flags the current number of active uses of the route refcnt the number of packets sent using that route use the maximum transmission unit MTU in bytes and the interface name of the gate way A direct route is automatically added to the table for each configured inter face when the network is brought up Routes can also be added manually by the system administrator route 1M or dynamically by the routing daemon routed 1M or by IP itself if MTU discovery RFC1191 is being used The G flag indicates that the route is a gateway to another network The H flag indicates that Issue 3 NETSTAT NETSTAT 1 the destination of the route is a host The D flag indicates that the route is dynamic The U flag indicates that the route is up The n option disables the symbolic translation of the network and interface addresses causing both to be displayed in their Internet dot notation Note that the reference count will always be zero since the kernel routing functions do not yet track this statistic The network statistics display s shows the current values of the statistics main tained by the kernel for each protocol This display includes statistics for the ip icmp tcp and udp protocols The p protocol option will show only those statistics for the specified protocol The r option will show routing statistics The STREAMS display S shows the number of failed requests for
351. ssary to reload the system software by 1 Installing the UNIX System software 2 Installing the UFS Utility Fixes tape Chapter 9 3 Removing the inet package Chapter 9 4 Installing the LCS60 application software Chapter 9 UNIX System Software Installation Caution Once the UNIX Software has been loaded the LCS60 must not be reset or powered off without first shutting down the system etc shutdown y g0 i0 Resetting or powering off the system may result in file damage gt ie D 2 x w Caution A new installation of the UNIX System will destroy all files currently on disks used for the installation To install the UNIX System software 1 Power off the LCS60 2 Insert the UNIX System installation tape tape 1 of 3 in the tape drive Insert the tape with the label toward the left and the tape guard down 3 Turn the machine on this will generate the autoboot Abort the autoboot by hitting the Break key this will display the debugger prompt 197 Bug gt Issue 3 D 1 UNIX System Software Installation 5 Determine which type of drive you have by typing ioi at the 197 Bug gt prompt The response to the ioi command is shown below for each of the three types of drives Seagate ST5660N 0 0 VME197 0 00 N SEAGATE ST5660N 0600 Seagate ST11200N 0 0 VME197 0 00 N SEAGATE ST11200N ST31230 0456 Fujitsu 0 0 VME197 0 00 N FUJITSU M2624F 512 M405 If y
352. st the destination from the telnet prompt by opening a dotted IP numerical address e g open 123 45 6 78 Additionally a host IP address can be specified in one of the following ways m Host name e g telnet moon m Dotted IP address telnet 154 12 26 1 m Fully qualified DNS name telnet moon lab att com Once the user is finished and exits the telnet session the DESTINATION prompt is returned A refinement of this service is shown on the screen below The LAN can be reached directly from the DESTINATION prompt Issue 3 7 11 User Information DESTINATION earth brown telnet moon Login The Lucent Technologies data switch speedcall feature can also be used In the following screen the first speedcall is entered such that telnet brown telnet the second speedcall is entered such that the host moon brown telnet moon refer to the Lucent Technologies data switch documentation for details on set ting up speedcall names DESTINATION earth telnet telnet gt open 154 12 26 1 Login DESTINATION earth moon Login TCP to Async Gateway Service A user on a host or workstation connected by means of an Ethernet LAN to an LCS60 can use the LCS60 to connect to data switch connected hosts Examples of TCP to async gateway connections are shown in Figure 7 1 To use the TCP to async gateway service the user can issue a telnet command to the LCS60 s IP address with or without the use of a servi
353. sue 3 Basics The administrator is responsible for operation of the LCS60 this includes verify ing connections maintaining the network monitoring the operation collecting data backing up and restoring files starting and stopping protocols and gen erating reports All administration is done after the LCS60 is configured see Chapters 3 7 Administration can be performed at the system console or from a remote terminal Logging On The most powerful user is root often referred to as the superuser The superuser may access alter or remove any file on the system Only the superuser has the freedom to do all of the tasks needed to administer an LCS60 To restrict the users with superuser privileges give the root password only to approved users Caution To protect the system from unauthorized changes it is strongly urged that only the system administrator and a minimum number of other knowledgeable users approved by the system administra tor ideally this number is zero be allowed access to the system as the superuser gt a 3 l D o w e The administrator must log on as root to configure the system As shipped the password is the Return key Change the root password whenever the security provided by the current password is suspected of having been compromised Only the superuser can change the password for root To change the password use the passwd root command Note The commands in th
354. supported therefore no Supp packets are suppressed Address ipx IPX network number and node number Router The IPX router the LCS60 for the virtual network Name ipx CIPX Max Indicates whether CIPX compression is being used or not 0 If Slot ipx used the number is the maximum number of slots Route Proto Routing protocol to exchange Not supported ipx Trace ARAP Top gt Session gt trace arap Sesid Session ID number Name The name of the ARAP session This name will be the letter a followed by the data switch channel number Remote Addr The zone name of the virtual AppleTalk network assigned to Zone the LCS60 Remote Addr The network and node number assigned to this session Address AS i ts110 9 Issue 3 G 13 gt 2 40 9p ip 2 Glossary Remote User Chan Switch Address Trace Async TCP The user ID or numeric equivalent if the n option is used of the remote user s IP address The data switch channel number used for the gateway The originating group information Top gt Session gt trace Top gt Session gt trace asy tep Sesid State Local Address Port Foreign Address Chan Switch Address Remote User Session ID number The state of the TCP to Async or Async to TCP connection IDLE CONN or FLOW The LCS60 address This is displayed when using the v option in the form address port e g morse e0 23 The p
355. sync tepasy PPP ppp SLIP slip and ARAP arap maxsessions defines the maximum number of supported LCS60 sessions for all services session The number of sessions you want to configure for a specific ser parameter vice Maximum values maxsessions 180 for a single protocol or value 500 for gateway service or if other protocols are running the maximum value is 120 asytcp tcpasy 500 or 120 if other proto cols are running slip ppp arap 120 SLIP PPP Service ipas ipx IP Network A name 1 8 characters for the workgroup in which the Security Group user will be assigned an IP address name Internet network Enter the IP network address for the Network Security address Group subnet The system will ask if the the IP network address for the Network security group is divided in to subnets If y it will prompt for the number of mask bits mask bits Enter the number of mask bits Refer to the section Subnet Configuration subnet later in this Glossary internet host Enter the IP host address allocated for the user ID within the address Network Security Group selected Si ts110 9 Issue 3 G 5 Glossary User login id Enter the remote user s ID If a NAC is used this is the NAC ID Network To configure the network address in ipx s Ethernet Confi Address guration Parameters enter the actual IPX network number 1 8 digits in hexadecimal of the LCS60 To configure the network address in ipx s Vi
356. t Time Hrs Mins 2 93 TELNET 8 bit 5634703 5634466 Apr 24 15 50 0 00 2 92 TELNET 7 bit 5652973 5652736 Apr 24 15 50 0 00 291 TELNET binary 5574273 5574036 Apr 24 15 50 0 00 LCS60 Async to TCP Gateway Session Statistics Apr 26 09 30 25 Char Total Total Idle Time Sesid Service Mode Xmit Bytes Recv Bytes Connect Time Hrs Mins kgg TELNET 8 bit 2700993 2700781 Apr 24 16 02 0 00 Ke 1 8 TELNET 7 bit 2701930 2701718 Apr 24 16 02 0 00 _ 1 7 TELNET binary 2701930 2701718 Apr 24 16 02 0 00 g LCS60 AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol Statistics Apr 26 10 24 07 Ke2 Recv BEYA Cc Sesid Xmit Bytes Xmit Pkts Recv Bytes Recv Pkts CRC BadF Rej ae 21109 655 15714 504 0 0 8 z LCS60 Serial Line IP Gateway Session Statistics Apr 26 08 18 20 Sesid Name Mtu PriQ Vjslots Xmit Bytes Xmit Pkts Recv Bytes Recv Pkts 1 s510 1006 YES 16 0 0 0 0 LCS60 Point to Point Session Statistics Apr 26 09 30 25 Receive Errors Xmit Bytes Xmit Pkts Recv Bytes Recv Pkts Len CRC State Alloc iT 8731 90 1527 108 0 0 0 0 t 3558396 21156 2584518 15559 0 0 0 0 6 3553134 21134 2579398 15534 0 0 0 0 10 519 21 525 21 0 0 0 0 LCS60 Point to Point Session IPX Configuration Apr 26 09 30 40 ROUTE ROUTER CIPX Sesid State S ADDRESS PROTO NAME MAX SLOT dak opened L 00000057 08003E224056 none P 00000057 0000000001FC none Top gt Session gt Y y 8 22 Issue 3 Typical Administrative Tasks Log Level Ex
357. t of service by the LCS60 administrator Issue 3 Incoming Error Messages m ipaserrno lt error number gt An internal error occurred with the IP Address Server software logic m slip is temporarily disabled Either insufficient resources are available to allocate another SLIP session or one of the required system processes cannot be contacted to set up the user s session Try again later if the problem persists contact the LCS60 administrator m may have only one s option got lt dkserver name gt and lt name from user gt The IP SLIP client attempted to bypass NAC security by entering a s lt name from user gt option on his her data switch dialstring even though he she had been authorized to call lt dkserver name gt The call is refused and a message logged in the usr adm Ics slip log file uy 3 s z 4 n O A Q 4 n m missing s h option in dksrvtab 4 slip file The slip file in directory etc opt dk srvtab does not have the mandatory s h option on the sliptoss command line This error message suggests that this file was not correctly installed or was edited incorrectly when adding originating group security patterns m ip address lt IP address gt is invalid The IP SLIP client entered a syntactically invalid IP address on his her data switch dialstring The IP address should be in dotted notation i e WWW XXX YYY ZZZ where WWW XXX YYY and ZZZ are decimal numbers between 1
358. te delete lt net host gt destination gateway DESCRIPTION E 40 Route is used to manipulate the network routing tables used by ip to determine which local network interface should be used to transmit a packet The flush command will remove all gateway routes see netstat 1 from the tables If the optional net or host keywords is used only gateway routes of those type will be removed The optional keywords net and host force the destination of the route to be inter preted as a network or host respectively If neither option is specified the Inter net address of the destination is used to determine the type The destination will be interpreted as a network if the host part of the Internet address is INADDR_ANY or the address matches an entry in the networks database see networks 4 Other wise the destination is presumed to be a host Destination is the name or Internet address of the host or network to which the route leads The destination default will match any host or network address the default route is used for outbound packets to any destination for which a more specific route does not exist Gateway is the name or Internet address of the gateway through which packets intended for the destination should be routed Metric is the number of hops from the local host to the destination The metric between the local host and another host on the local network will be zero If the route is to a destination connected through a g
359. te instructions refer to Figure 2 1 to install the LCS60 Rack Mounting Mount the LCS60 in a 19 inch rack or cabinet using compatible mounting hardware as shown in Figure 2 1 Mounting in a 23 or 25 inch rack or cabinet requires a Bracket Extension Kit The front frame of the LCS60 has four mounting holes for securing the unit in a standard 19 inch equipment rack The weight of the LCS60 requires a shelf slide rails or a support bracket Contact the cabinet vendor for compatible hardware The handles for the LCS60 are shipped in a separate package within the main shipping box The handles can be attached to the front frame with the handles pointing away from the LCS60 using the four flat head machine screws To rack mount the unit 1 Attach either a horizontal shelf slide rails or support brackets to the verti cal uprights of the cabinet For design compatibility this hardware should be purchased from the cabinet vendor 2 6 Issue 3 Installing the LCS60 2 With the horizontal support in place slide the LCS60 into place Fasten the front frame of the LCS60 to the front uprights with four screws 23 or 25 inch cabinets require extension brackets Figure 2 1 Mounting the LCS60 Cabinet WALL TOP Cabinet Disk and tape drives z Rear uprights m must be on top Ha lt i Wall Mount Assy mounts to wall LCS60 mounts inside EN Wall Mount Assembly Fr
360. ted Commands The following commands may be of particular interest when administering the LCS60 s ARAP service eatping eatnetstat atlog The manual pages for these commands are contained in Appendix E of this docu ment they are also available online Issue 3 6 7 dvVuVv Administration 6 8 Issue 3 Gateway Services Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service 7 1 Access to Gateway Services Issue 3 Dialstrings 7 8 Telnet Service 7 8 Inactivity Timeout Option 7 9 Return to DESTINATION Option 7 10 User Information 7 10 Async to TCP Gateway Service 7 11 TCP to Async Gateway Service 7 12 UUCP Feature 7 13 m Data Switch to LCS60 to LAN 7 13 m LAN to LCS60 to Data Switch 7 15 m Example UUCP Service Using SunOS 4 0 7 16 m Example UUCP Service Using NCR 4 0 7 17 Administration 7 18 Service Ports 7 18 Trace TCP Async 7 19 Error Messages 7 19 Log Files 7 20 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service Figure 7 1 shows an example network using gateway services Figure 7 1 Example Network Gateway Services his LCS60 brown brown e0 154 12 26 6 Virtual IP Address aes M
361. ter a name for Ethernet Interface 0 for help q for menu gt morse e0 Enter aliases for morse e0 Separate each alias with blanks Hit return if there are no aliases q to quit gt mor Enter morse e0 internet address e g 154 11 21 1 q to quit gt 154 12 21 5 Enter official name of network 154 12 or q to quit gt dock net f 09 f op Enter aliases for dock net Separate each alias with blanks Hit return if there are no aliases q to quit gt f Return 3 gt Is dock net 154 12 divided into subnets ly n y Enter name of subnet to be added for help q for quit gt m net0 Enter number of mask bits for this subnet for help q for quit gt 8 Entering Ethernet interface 0 morse e0 154 12 21 5 gt Is this correct ly nl y Ethernet interface 0 morse e0 154 12 21 5 configured Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q NN g 3 20 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup Note The following prompts ipx will be displayed only if IPX is configured 5 This step allows the LCS60 Administrator to configure the IPX protocol for x the Ethernet interface and define the virtual IPX network for PPP Since x the IPX protocol is selected it must be configured CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feat
362. terface and route is displayed The VIRTUAL interface is always assigned a zero KEY For ETHER NET connections the KEY associates routes with the interface over which they may be reached For PPP and ARAP connections the KEY may be used for diag nostic purposes to ensure that a route at distance zero exists for each interface if there is no route to a connection then it will not be possible to transmit data to that connection The zone list z option displays the AppleTalk zones and their corresponding net work ranges known to the atmgr process AppleTalk zone names may contain characters that cannot be displayed on an alphanumeric terminal To make these characters visible each such character that occurs in a zone name is replaced by the 5 character string S xy where xy is the two digit hexadecimal value of the character To distinguish this construct from zone names that may actually contain the symbol all characters that occur within a zone name are prepended with a backslash in the display EXAMPLES FILES Issue 3 To display the zone name ABCDAE with the z option the display will show the following ABCD 80 E Whereas the zone name ABCD E would be displayed as ABCD SE usr etc lcs atmgr usr etc lcs atalkif etc lcs atalkas cf usr etc atnetstat E 3 ATPING 1M ATPING NAME atping send AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP Request packets SYNOPSIS atping d sec net node packetsize
363. terminal access socket for 8 bit raw TCP data stream e g uucp file transfer or directory for LAN queries of the TCP service port database m Follow the on screen instructions for customizing each service port you are configuring Help is available by typing A sample session illustrating each of the three service port types is shown in Screen 7 1 5 If TCP IP has not been started enter start tcpip from the Top directory now Issue 3 7 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service Screen 7 1 Gateway Service Configuration Example a N TCP TO ASYNCHRONOUS GATEWAY SERVICE CONFIGURATION MENU Display Change the LCS60 call address prompt Add a service port Delete a service port Change modify a service port OB WNEH Display service ports Enter Menu Selection Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 2 Enter service port number Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt 4419 Enter service type telnet socket or directory for port 4419 Type q to QUIT or for HELP gt telnet Enter Pre Defined call address or dash for no call address Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of gt mlkway earth yard Enter TCP window size Type q to QUIT for HELP or press RETURN for default of 1024 gt Return Enable 8 bit character mode for this port Type q to quit for help or press RETURN for default of n Enter y n gt y Enable the LCS60
364. ters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 2 VIRTUAL PPP CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Configure Display Network Address Enter an IPX Network Number Type q to quit or for help gt 57 5 Enter Menu Selection z for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 N i fo Current Virtual Network Number lt Undefined gt Co op Network lt 57 gt is already configured for your Ethernet Interface VIRTUAL PPP CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Configure Display Network Address Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu Me A 3 22 Issue 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup A gt 3 The LCS60 IPX Parameters are configured as follows Ethernet Network Number lt 1562 gt Virtual Network Number lt 5 S Ethernet Frame Type lt Ethernet II gt CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface
365. the asterisk wild card from matching the local dkserver name For example if the local server name is camaro the pattern Ic sporty will match all originating groups in area exchange c sporty except lc sporty camaro This feature prevents users from calling themselves on the same host The local server name and the group name of the host in the data switch control computer database must be the same for the feature to work The originating group suffix user may be used to match specific users from either specific groups or from classes of groups The user must be specified as a decimal integer user ID to match the format provided in the call request informa tion The group pattern 0 would match the user root from any originating group while the pattern lc sporty 0 would match the user root from any group in the area exchange lc sporty A question mark is used to match the null user ID Since TY6 and TY12 ports do not generate a user ID as part of the dialstring the pattern may be used to match requests from an originating terminal or modem group Finally the pattern lc sporty 0 on the host hotrod would match the user root from any group except lc sporty hotrod A 2 Issue 3 srvtab Service Field The service field contains the name of the service the caller may request This field consists of a single word or abbreviation and is used to match the service string that appears after the first period in the requester s dialst
366. the UFS Utility Fixes tape Remove the inet package Install the LCS60 application software UNIX System Software Installation Caution Once the UNIX Software has been loaded do not reset or power off the LCS60 without first shutting down the system etc shutdown y g0 i0 as file damage may result A new installation of the UNIX System will destroy all files currently on disks used for the installation To install the UNIX System software 1 Power off the LCS60 2 Insert the UNIX System installation tape tape 1 of 3 in the tape drive Insert the tape with the label toward the left and the tape guard down 3 Turn the machine on this will generate the autoboot 4 Abort the autoboot by hitting the Break key this will display the debugger prompt 197 Bug gt v 5 Determine which type of drive you have by typing ioi at the 197 Bug gt D prompt The response to the ioi command is shown below for each of the JR three types of drives D P Seagate ST5660N 0 0 VME197 0 00 N SEAGATE ST5660N 0600 Seagate ST11200N 0 0 VME197 0 00 N SEAGATE ST11200N ST31230 0456 Fujitsu 0 0 VME197 0 00 N FUJITSU M2624F 512 M405 If you a have a Fujitsu drive or a Seagate ST5660N refer to Appendix D for UNIX System Software Installation if you have a Seagate ST11200N drive continue with the instructions below Issue 3 9 1 Reload System Software 6 Enter bo 0 40 COREunix at the 197 Bug gt prompt
367. the dialstring for example pupu hi f The originating group name of the caller for example lc sporty hotrod gt xe O D 2 x gt Issue 3 A 7 lt 28 O Cc Q Q Q lt srvtab Table A 3 Continued Specification Description h The local server name l The originator as known to the local node m The originating module number of the call being serviced n The originating data switch node name 0 The type of originating device p Parameters from the dialstring The parameters are reparsed so that colons may be used to produce separate arguments r The protocol field of the dialstring if any s The pathname of the user s shell as obtained from the etc passwd file A null shell field in the password file will be expanded as bin sh t The device file name that corresponds to the assigned CommKit Host Interface channel minus the initial dev u The numeric user ID of the user placing the call x The call flag applies only to originating data switch ports for example TY6 TY12 etc which have been assigned a predefined destination An F is returned in place of the flag if this is the first call from the originating device and a P if there have been previous calls z The module type flag will return the module type of the originating device if the data switch includes this information in the dialstring field 1 of the fifth line
368. to the HOME directory will be accepted Multiple Interfaces If multiple interface boards are installed on the originating host the push com mand will use the default processing to select the interface for the out going call See dkdial 3X and authorize 1M for more information WARNINGS E 38 If the source host is identical to the target destination and the source directory is identical to the target directory then the push command will overwrite filename and its contents may be destroyed The modification times are preserved on transferred files as long as they are ear lier in relative time i e seconds since the 00 00 00 GMT January 1 1970 epoch than the current relative time on the local machine If the modification time for a file would date that file in the future on the local machine the current time on the Issue 3 PUSH PUSH 1C local machine will be used as the file modification time FILES opt dk bin directory in which this command resides etc opt dk dkhosts host control file for destination mapping SEE ALSO pull 1C authorize 1M dkdial 3X maphost 3X dkhosts 4 srvtab 4 time 2 in the UNIX System V Programmer s Reference Manual find 1 in the UNIX System V User s Reference Manual Issue 3 E 39 ROUTE 1M ROUTE NAME route manipulate the routing tables SYNOPSIS route flush lt net host gt route add lt net host gt destination gateway metric netmask value mtu value rou
369. ult filter b Set capture filter to ignore broadcasts This option is only valid with g get packets This option does not reset the default filter h By default packets are interpreted and displayed in a verbose format This option interprets Ethernet Type II IEEE802 3 and IEEE802 2 LLC SNAP headers and displays the rest of the packets in a hexade cimal dump format n Display host addresses in numerical format The default display translates addresses into host names This option is only valid with p set When using gp this option is recommended since packets are pro cessed faster f diskfile Specify a diskfile for capture or display The default filename is var adm cs iftrace data i count Capture count packets and quit This option is only valid with g get packets The default action is to capture until killed E 24 Issue 3 IFTRACE IFTRACE 1M d Allows internal debug tracing to be enabled keywords Allows packets to be filtered based upon specific fields within a packet The keywords ip ipx and apple are required to filter packets for either DOD IP Internet or Novell IPX or AppleTalk datagrams repectively Only one datagram type can be specified at a time Once a datagram type has been selected the remaining keywords src dst sport and dport can then be selected to further filter datagrams based upon specific fields within a packet The src and dst keywords will only capture packets whose source
370. ult route in the network Enter default router name alias or internet address Type q to quit or for help gt 154 12 21 3 Trying to reach host 154 12 21 3 OK CURRENT default route is None NEW default route will be 154 12 21 3 Enter y to confirm NEW default route 154 12 21 3 Enter n to reject NEW default route 154 12 21 3 gt y Top gt Config gt we Be sure to specify routed with the protocol command to start default route ser vice at boot time bs The dftroute command cannot be run unless the TCP IP protocol is running 3 24 Issue 3 Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP Domain Name Server dns Use dns to define the Domain Name Server as shown in the example below k Top gt Config gt dns DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM DNS CONFIGURATION 1 Display Current Configuration 2 Modify Create DNS Resolver Configuration 3 Enable Disable DNS Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit gt 2 Enter Domain Information q gt ny att com Enter Name Server q gt 154 12 21 110 Enter Name Server q gt 154 12 48 5 Enter Name Server q gt q DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM DNS CONFIGURATION 1 Display Current Configuration 2 Modify Create DNS Resolver Configuration 3 Enable Disable DNS ep D ie o z S o Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 3 This system is configured with DNS DISA
371. ure IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parameters Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu J gt 1 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Configure Display Network Address 2 Configure Display Framing Type Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 na ep D ie Q z o Current Ethernet Network Number lt Undefined gt Enter an IPX Network Number Type q to quit or for help gt 1562 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Configure Display Network Address 2 Configure Display Framing Type Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 2 Current Ethernet Frame Type lt Undefined gt Enter frame type ethernet 802 2 802 3 or snap Type q to quit or for help gt ethernet ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 1 Configure Display Network Address XS y Issue 3 3 21 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup a 2 Configure Display Framing Type Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt q CAUTION Please refer to the I amp A Guide for instructions about configuring this feature IPX CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 1 Ethernet interface configuration parameters 2 Virtual PPP interface configuration parameters 3 Display all Parame
372. uring the ethernet interface Refer to the example in Screen 5 3 Screen 5 3 Configure the Ethernet Interface Example a gt Top gt Config gt etherif TCP IP ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION MENU 1 Configure an Ethernet Interface 2 Delete an Ethernet Interface 3 Display all Interfaces that are configured Enter Menu Selection for help q to quit RETURN for menu gt 1 WARNING This option will automatically delete each interface that was previously configured It reconstructs the Ethernet interface database from scratch and requires the user to reconfigure each interface again Enter a name for Ethernet Interface 0 for help q for menu gt morse e0 Enter aliases for morse e0 Separate each alias with blanks Hit return if there are no aliases q to quit gt mor Enter morse e0 internet address e g 154 11 21 1 q to quit gt 154 12 21 5 Enter official name of network 154 12 or q to quit gt dock net Nec z Screen 5 3 continued on next page Issue 3 5 7 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service dS LCS60 Configuration and Connection for SLIP Service Screen 5 3 Continued a gt Enter aliases for morse Separate each alias with blanks Hit return if there are no aliases q to quit gt gt Is morse 154 12 divided into subnets ly n l y Enter name of subnet to be added for help q for quit gt m net0O
373. use ful in combination with find 1 to select portions of a directory tree to transfer push preserves the file modes and modification times of the files it moves The original file owner numeric user ID is preserved if the effective user ID of the process on the target machine is root Otherwise the files will be owned by the user s login on the target host push preserves the name type and contents of the files it moves with the follow ing exceptions Long Names If the target machine is a SVR4 implementation but the target file system does not support file names greater than 14 characters and the source machine transfers a file with a name greater then 14 characters the file name will be truncated to 14 characters The remote side will warn the user for each file name that is truncated E 37 PUSH 1C PUSH Long Names If the target machine is not a SVR4 implementation and the source machine transfers a file with a name greater then 14 characters the name will usually be truncated to 14 characters Note A few pre SVR4 implementations support long file names but the push com mand has no way of knowing if these systems do or do not The local side will warn the user for each file name that may be trun cated Symbolic Links Files of type symbolic link will be preserved unless the L option is used or the target machine does not support symbolic links A transferred symbolic link will be identical to the source file it
374. vailable for the LCS60 from the Lucent Technologies Cus tomer Technical Support Center at 1 800 WE2CARE For more information on these service offerings or to establish a service account contact your Lucent Technologies account representative or call 1 800 WE2 CARE during our standard business hours 8AM 5PM Eastern Time Monday through Friday excluding holidays and ask for the Data Networking Services Operations department When you need assistance call 1 800 WE2 CARE during the coverage period selected when you established your service account You will need to provide your Service Account Number and identify the specific Lucent Technologies Data Networking product for which you need assistance Outside the United States Lucent Technologies Data Networking products and support services are provided by Lucent Technologies subsidiaries and author ized value added resellers For more information contact your sales representa tive 1 22 Issue 3 Hardware Installation Issue 3 Introduction 2 1 Controls and Indicators 2 1 Site Preparation 2 2 Space Requirements 2 4 Cabling 2 4 EMI Considerations 2 5 Required Equipment 2 5 Assembly 2 6 Unpacking 2 6 Installing the LCS60 2 6 Rack Mounting 2 6 Wall Mounting 2 8 Table Top Mounting 2 8 Connecting the System Console 2 9 m Serial Port Optioning DTE DCE 2 9 Direct Connection to the LCS60 2 12 Connection through a Data Switch 2 12 Connection through Modems 2 17
375. ver PPP refer to Chapter 1 and to the ipas command in Chapter 4 PPP or Chapter 5 SLIP 3 28 Issue 3 Configuration Changes Note 2 The addhost and viewhosts commands display only the hosts configured in the local system database If DNS is used on your system the nslookup command can be used to display host information Administrative and Maintenance Commands In addition to the commands described in the previous sections the following administrative maintenance commands are also available from the Config direc tory Refer to the chapter listed in Table 3 3 for details of these commands Table 3 3 Administrative Maintenance Commands Config Directory D Operation Command Description g Enable disable autobaud console see Chapter 8 Backup restore functions backup see Chapter 8 Remote upgrade upgrade see Chapter 9 Issue 3 Administrative and Maintenance Commands L f n o op 3 30 Issue 3 PPP Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection Issue 3 for PPP Service 4 1 PPP Service Connection Dialstrings 4 13 Privately Administered Static IP Address 4 15 Reserved IP Address 4 16 Dynamically Assigned IP Address 4 17 Administration 4 18 Show Session Examples 4 18 Call Trace Example 4 20 Log File 4 21 Related Commands 4 21 Table of Contents ii Issue 3 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for
376. vice Example 6 5 m Show Session Example 6 6 m Call Trace Example 6 6 m Log File 6 7 m Related Commands 6 7 iv Issue 2 Table of Contents 7 Gateway Services Configuration and Administration LCS60 Configuration and Connection for Gateway Service 7 1 Access to Gateway Services Dialstrings 7 8 m Telnet Service 7 8 m Inactivity Timeout Option 7 9 m Return to DESTINATION Option 7 10 User Information 7 10 m Async to TCP Gateway Service 7 11 m TCP to Async Gateway Service 7 12 m UUCP Feature 7 13 Data Switch to LCS60 to LAN 7 13 LAN to LCS60 to Data Switch 7 15 Example UUCP Service Using SunOS 4 0 7 16 Example UUCP Service Using NCR 4 0 7 17 Administration 7 18 m Service Ports 7 18 m Trace TCP Async 7 19 m Error Messages 7 19 m Log Files 7 20 8 Administration Basics 8 1 Logging On 8 1 m System Console 8 2 m Remote Administration 8 2 lcsadm Interface 8 3 m Common Commands 8 4 m Initial System Setup initsetup 8 5 m Top Directory Commands 8 5 m Session Directory Commands 8 7 m Ports Directory Commands 8 10 m Service Directory Commands 8 12 m Manager Directory Commands 8 13 m Config Directory Commands 8 16 Issue 2 v Table of Contents Typical Administrative Tasks 8 21 m Show Session Example 8 22 m Log Level Example 8 23 m Change the Default Route Example 8 23 m Summary Output Examples 8 24 m System Console Parameters Autobaud 8 24 Backup and Restore Operations 8 25 m Generic vs Variable File
377. vice sessions define 5 3 SLIP session error messages C 10 slipdial log 8 47 slip ini file F 21 slip log 5 14 8 47 SNMP 1 6 3 26 G 3 traps 1 7 SNMP agent setup 3 26 SNMP Configuration menu 3 26 Socket service port 7 3 Socket service 1 10 7 14 G 3 see also Tcpsock Software reinstall 9 13 Software certificate 1 19 3 3 3 7 Software key 1 19 3 7 3 28 see also Copy protection Softwarekey 3 7 3 28 8 18 see also Copy protection Space requirements 2 4 Specifications 2 4 Srvports 7 3 Srvsetup 3 10 Srvtab A 1 StarKeeper II NMS 1 20 2 9 alarms B 6 Issue 2 configuration B 1 configuration commands B 4 connection 2 17 determining release of B 1 installation B 1 Start all 3 27 8 6 dependencies 8 6 protocols 8 6 8 14 Start the LCS60 3 27 Start time G 19 Startup time G 20 State G 11 G 14 State port G 16 State service G 18 Static address 4 16 Static IP address 5 11 Statlcs 8 40 to 8 41 E 42 Status 8 40 Stop all 8 6 dependencies 8 6 protocols 8 6 8 14 SLIP example 5 13 Subnet 3 28 8 18 G 5 G 7 Subnetwork G 3 to G 4 address G 7 name G 8 Subnetworks multiple IP 1 13 Summary 8 11 8 13 example 7 19 SunOS example 7 16 uucp example 7 16 Superuser root 8 1 Support 1 2 Switch address G 14 to G 15 1 13 Index System console 8 2 configuration 2 9 connection 2 9 System console parameters 8 24 System Field A 2 System
378. viewhosts are available from the Config directory Com mands show types and summary are also available to check the current confi guration before making configuration changes Refer to Chapter 8 for details of these commands The configuration database may be changed at any time by using commands available from the Config directory Table 3 2 lists the configuration commands Table 3 2 Configuration Commands Config Directory Configuration Command Set the date and time datetime Change the node name nodename Choose the protocols to start when the LCS60 is rebooted protocol Change the default route dftroute Set the software key softwarekey Set the DNS resolver dns Change the SNMP configuration snmp Change the number of service sessions maxsessions Define service ports srvports Configure virtual IP network for PPP and SLIP ipas Configure IPX addresses for PPP ipx Configure virtual AppleTalk network for ARAP and PPP atalkas Add a new host to the network addhost Add a new network to the LCS60 configuration addnet Remove a host from the network delhost Remove a network from the LCS60 configuration delnet Configure the Ethernet interface etherif Configure subnetworks and masks subnet Display all hosts on a network viewhosts Display all configured networks viewnets All of these commands are entered at the Top gt Config gt prompt Note 1 For information on configuring multiple IP subnetworks for SLIP or for IP o
379. w to connect the LAN to an LCS60 Label all connections This data is required for correct confi guration 1 When using the MVME197 interface connect one end of the DB15 cable to the Ethernet 0 connector on the MVME712M module at the back of the LCS60 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet transceiver at the LAN 3 After configuring the system as described in Chapters 3 through 7 verify the connections as specified in Chapter 9 Issue 3 2 29 LAN Connections eb rat ca Fe ca I 2 30 Issue 3 General LCS60 Software Configuration Issue 3 Introduction 3 1 Preliminary Hardware Requirements 3 1 Preliminary Configuration Requirements 3 2 Specific Services 3 3 Initial Setup 3 3 Configure Protocols and Gateway Services srvsetup 3 10 Configure Default Route DNS and SNMP 3 23 Default Route dftroute 3 24 Domain Name Server dns 3 25 SNMP Manager snmp 3 26 Starting the LCS60 3 27 Base Level Backup 3 27 Table of Contents Configuration Changes 3 28 Administrative and Maintenance Commands 3 29 ii Issue 3 Introduction This chapter describes the steps required for configuring the LCS60 software An example of a network topology is shown in Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Example Network Virtual IP Address 1CS60 154 12 22 1 brown brown EEE Virtual AppleTalk Zone Baker Street 609 1 Mac E 154 12 24 49 IP
380. will not receive their reserved IP address Dynamically Assigned IP Address The LCS60 will assign an IP address dynamically from the IP network range associated with the called IP Network Security Group To do so the session start up request must meet one of the following conditions m The user has included the D option on his her data switch dialstring and has a negotiable IP address administered in his her client software pack age m The D option has been omitted from the dialstring and the user does not have a reserved IP address administered in the LCS60 configuration data base To obtain a dynamic address from the LCS60 for your Mac or PC you must Issue 3 4 17 LCS60 Configuration and Connection for PPP Service 1 Have administered a negotiable IP address in your client software pack age 2 Enter this address e g 0 0 0 0 in some packages on the appropriate screen as documented for your client package 3 Append the D option to the data switch dialstring DESTINATION area exch 60name ppp D For example DESTINATION mlkway earth morse ppp D Administration Routine administration of the LCS60 includes PPP tasks such as starting or stop ping PPP and generating PPP specific reports Refer to Chapter 8 for complete LCS60 administration and the Glossary for a description of the report fields gen erated by the administrative commands Show Session Examples The following screen sh
381. with the i option a sin gle channel on a single interface is reset vV Verbose Option used for debugging and trouble shooting The dkmaint command works silently without the v option FILES opt dk sbin directory in which this command resides dev dk ctl X Common Signaling Channel device for interface X SEE ALSO dkdaemon 1M dkhs 7 dkux 7 ioctl 2 close 2 in the UNIX System V Programmer s Reference Manual DIAGNOSTICS The dkmaint command reports errors when it cannot open the driver control device for the specified interface It also reports if the host interface driver returns an error when the ioctl 2 request is issued WARNINGS E 8 Resetting a channel with dkmaint will cause the host interface driver to request that the process currently using the requested channel release close 2 the chan nel This is done by sending an M HANGUP message from the driver up STREAM to the process This is designed to look like having the remote side of the connection disappear The action that the process takes is application dependent Issue 3 FTP FTP 1 NAME ftp file transfer protocol SYNOPSIS ftp d g i n t v wwsize host port DESCRIPTION Ftp is the user interface to the ARPANET standard File Transfer Protocol FTP This protocol allows a user to transfer files to and from a remote network site The ftp client includes a command interpreter which interactively executes file transfer
382. wn g0 y i0 The on off switch can be used to halt the system only when you receive the mes sage stating the system is secured for powering down Caution Use the correct procedure to power down the system Do not use the Reset button the on off system power switch or pull the electrical plug to stop the system or UNIX System file corruption may result Reboot To reboot the system rather than shut it down use the command etc shutdown g0 y i6 This will shutdown the system and then reboot it The reboot sequence ends with the Console Login prompt Verify LCS60 Console Connection To verify the console connection perform the following 1 Power up the LCS60 and verify that communication with the console has been established The console should display diagnostic text followed by the Console Login prompt 2 Ifthe above information is not displayed on the console after powering up the LCS60 check the following for your connection m Direct console optioning and cabling m Through the Data Switch console and LCS60 connections to the data switch network and the related data switch configuration Issue 3 2 27 oJeMpJeH D 5 L Installing the LCS60 m Through Modems console and modem optioning and cabling m Through StarKeeper II NMS check the console and LCS60 connec tions to the data switch network and the related data switch confi guration 3 Ifthe STATUS and RUN LED
383. xam ples of SLIP specific tasks Refer to Chapter 8 for complete LCS60 administration and to the Glossary for the report fields generated by the administrative commands Stop Example The following screen shows an example of the stop slip command fa tS Issue 3 5 13 Administration Top gt stop slip RAA Stopping slip zes Top gt Call Trace Example The following screen shows how to obtain call trace information for SLIP Top gt Session gt trace slip LCS60 Serial Line IP Gateway Tracking Information Jun 16 10 57 50 Sesid Name Dest Address Remote User Chan Switch Address 1 78 s510 154 12 23 7 cbaker 510 yard samterm 141 10 1 106 s508 154 12 23 18 smccoy 508 yard samterm 140 6 Errors For SLIP connection errors refer to Appendix C Log File The log file slip log is written to by the LCS60 interface software and contains information about incoming SLIP call requests To display the contents of the log file use the page command as shown in the example below 5 14 Issue 3 Administration N pg usr adm lcs slip log Fri Jun 2 10 59 34 22885 3 slipl started loglevel 3 Fri Jun 2 11 00 32 22885 3 slipl NEW 1 1 dkserver morse ip 154 12 23 89 dk marina pier cove 140 9 ch 510 uid tbaker Fri Jun 2 11 11 12 22885 3 slipl DEL 1 1 ip 153 22 92 14 Fri Jun 2 14 42 04 22885 3 slipl exited Fri Jun 2 14 42 35 23342 3 slipl started loglevel 3 Se we
384. y executing Icsadm c start routed from the LCS60 system console Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists L600635 Process inetinit is down Description The inetinit process is not executing Action Reboot the system cd etc shutdown y g0 i6 Note Anytime the inetinit processs goes down the system must be rebooted even if a message is displayed that inetinit is back up Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists Issue 3 B 7 9 2 A D D ke 2 Z z 09 n Z D Q eb oO x n Alarms to StarKeeper II NMS L600640 Process tlid is down Description The tlid process is not executing Action Restart the tlid process by entering lcsadm c stop tcpip and then Icsadm c start all from the LCS60 system console If the problem occurs again reboot the system cd etc shutdown y g0 i6 Refer to the start all command in Chapter 8 Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists L600645 An IP Network Security Group lt servername gt process is down Description An IP Network Security group process is not executing Action Log onto the LCS60 system console and restart the process or processes by executing sh etc init d ipas_dkitrc restart from the LCS60 system console Call your LCS60 support personnel if the problem persists L600665 Process atmgr is down Description The atmgr process is not executing Action Restart the
385. zed users within a pre determined time span generally hours and to bypass reauthorization for these users Enter other if the endpoint is not a NAC Security Server with the SID feature con figured or if you do not wish to bypass reauthorization gt 2 40 9p ip 2 G 6 Issue 3 Glossary Enable 8 bit This prompt will be displayed for telnet ports only enter y to character allow the administrator to configure the service port with 8 bit mode character mode enabled The default n is 7 bit character mode inactivity Enter the time in minutes in which the session will terminate if timeout there is no input or output The default is n which is a two minute wait PDD To associate a call address with this TCP to async port enter a PDD in the form area exchange local address e g mlkway earth yard or local address e g yard port number Enter the number of the port you wish to configure security Enter nac if your system uses a Lucent Technologies Network server type Access Control System NAC R4 0 to provide security service Enter other if this service is provided by a non Lucent Technolo gies security server service type Enter the type of service being configured telnet directory socket TCP win The allowed values for the TCP window size are 512 1024 2048 dow size 4096 8192 and 16384 the default is 1024 Generally choose a small window size for telnet connections and a larger window

HP LCS60 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents